ss481stud

V3.1.0.1

cover




Front cover

IBM TotalStorage DS8000 and DS6000 Implementation Workshop for Open Systems (Course Code SS48)

Student Notebook ERC 1.0

IBM Certified Course Material

Student Notebook

Trademarks IBM® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. The following are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, or other countries, or both: AIX Enterprise Storage Server FlashCopy i5/OS POWER Predictive Failure Analysis TotalStorage z/OS

DB2 ESCON HACMP iSeries POWER5 pSeries Virtualization Engine zSeries

eServer FICON Hypervisor OS/400 PowerPC RS/6000 xSeries

Java and all Java-based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States, other countries, or both. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, product and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.

August 2005 Edition The information contained in this document has not been submitted to any formal IBM test and is distributed on an “as is” basis without any warranty either express or implied. The use of this information or the implementation of any of these techniques is a customer responsibility and depends on the customer’s ability to evaluate and integrate them into the customer’s operational environment. While each item may have been reviewed by IBM for accuracy in a specific situation, there is no guarantee that the same or similar results will result elsewhere. Customers attempting to adapt these techniques to their own environments do so at their own risk. © Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2005. All rights reserved. This document may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM. Note to U.S. Government Users — Documentation related to restricted rights — Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

TOC

Contents Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix Course Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi Agenda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Unit Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1.1 DS8000 Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Topic: DS8000 Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 DS8000 Series Models (2107) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 DS8000 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 DS8000 Hardware Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Interfaces to DS8000 (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Interfaces to DS8000 (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 IBM TotalStorage Management Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 DS8000 Data Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Host Connectivity: IBM Subsystem Device Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 DS8000 Enhancements At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 DS8000 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 1.2 DS8000 Hardware Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Topic: DS8000 Hardware Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 DS8000: Primary Frame Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 DS8000 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 DS8000 Hardware Components Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 DS8000 Processor Complex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 DS8000 Processor Complex: Power5 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 DS8000 Processor Complex PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 DS8000 Processor Complex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 DS8000 Persistent Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 DS8000 I/O Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29 RIO-G and I/O Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30 DS8000 RIO-G Port: Layout Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31 Bus Interconnect Performance Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32 DS8000 Host Adapters HA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33 Host Adapter with Four Fibre Channel Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34 DS8000 FCP/FICON Host Adapters: HA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35 DS8000 FICON/FCP Host Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36 DS8000 Device Adapter DA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 Fibre Channel Device Adapters with Two Gbps Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 DS8000 Device Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39 DS8000 RAID Device Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40 RAID and Logical Volume Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41 DS8000 Storage Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Contents Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

iii

Student Notebook

16 Drive Disk Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43 DS8000 Switched FC-AL Disk Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44 DS8000 and DS6000 Switched FC-AL/FC-AL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-45 Switched FC-AL Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-46 DS8000: Storage Enclosure and DA Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47 DS8000 Storage Enclosure and DA Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-48 1.3 DS8000 Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49 Topic: DS8000 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50 DS8000: Primary Frame Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-51 DS8000 Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-52 IBM TotalStorage DS8100 (2-Way) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53 DS8300 (4-Way with Two Expansion Frames) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-54 DS8100 (Model 921) - 2-way . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-55 DS8300 (Models 922 and 9A2) - 4-way . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-56 DS8000 Storage Enclosure Connectivity (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57 DS8000 Storage Enclosure Connectivity (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-58 DS8000 – 2 way - Data Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-59 DS8000 – 4 way - Data Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60 1.4 DS8000 Cache Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61 Topic: DS8000 Cache Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-62 Sequential Prefetching in Adaptive Replacement Cache (SARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-63 DS8000 and DS6000 Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-64 DS8000 and DS6000 Caching Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-65 1.5 DS8000 RAS Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67 Topic: DS8000 RAS Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-68 DS8000 Hardware Components Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-69 Processor Complex RAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-70 Hypervisor – Storage Image Independence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-71 Server RAS (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-72 Server RAS (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-73 Server Failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-74 NVS Recovery After Complete Power Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-75 Host Connection Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-76 What’s New with SDD 1.6.0.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-77 Disk Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-78 Disk Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-79 Power and Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-81 Microcode Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-82 Management Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-83 Unit Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-85 Unit 2. DS8000 Virtualization Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Unit Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2 2.1 Physical Configuration Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Topic: Physical Configuration Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 Physical Configuration Concepts: Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 DS8000 / DS6000 - Storage Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 iv

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

TOC

Storage Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 DS8000 Switched Loop Layout in an Enclosure Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 DS8000 Array Across Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 DS6000 Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 DS6000 Array Sites on Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 DS8000 Creating an Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Array Site Configurations: DS8000 Eight DDMs/Array with Arrays Across Loops 2-14 DS8000 AAL Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Sparing Rules (DS8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Sparing Example 1 - RAID 5: DS8000 All Same Capacity, Same RPM . . . . . . . . 2-17 Sparing Example 2 - RAID 10: DS8000 All Arrays Same Capacity and Same RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Sparing Example 3 – DS8000 RAID 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 DS6000 Creating an Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 DS6000: Four DDM Arrays (Not at GA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Arrays: Eight DDM Arrays On Loop for DS6000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Two Array Sites Configurations: DS6000 Eight DDMs/Array with Arrays on Loop 2-23 One Array Site Configurations: DS6000 (After GA) Four DDMs/Array with Arrays on Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Sparing Rules (DS6000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Sparing Example 1 - RAID 5: DS6000 All Same Capacity, Same RPM . . . . . . . . 2-26 Sparing Example 2 - RAID 10: DS6000 All Same Capacity, Same RPM . . . . . . . 2-27 Sparing Example 3 - RAID 5: DS6000 All Same RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Sparing Example 4 – RAID 5: DS6000 Different Size and RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Capacity Magic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Floating Spare Rules (DS6000 and DS8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 DS8000/DS6000: Forming a Rank (Example, FB with 1 GB Extents) . . . . . . . . . 2-33 DS6000/DS8000 Extent Pool Concept Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Device Configuration – Extent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Extents / Extent Pools Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Extent Pools Example in a Mixed CKD and FB Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Logical Volume Concept (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Logical Volume Concept (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Virtualization Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 I/O Ports (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 I/O Ports (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 Volume Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Volume Groups and Host Attachment (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 Volume Groups and Host Attachment (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Hosts and Volume Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 2.2 Logical Configuration Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Topic: Logical Configuration Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Physical Infrastructure Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 LSS / LCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 LSS Groups and LSS Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 LSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Contents Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

v

Student Notebook

Address Group (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55 Address Group (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56 LSS and Address Group Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57 Logical Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58 Device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59 Logical Configuration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60 Virtualization Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61 Extent Pools (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62 Extent Pools (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63 Extent Pools (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64 Extent Pools (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65 Volumes (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66 Volumes (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67 Volumes (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68 Volume Groups (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-69 Volume Groups (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70 Volume Groups (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71 DS6800 LSS Dual Pathed Host (Recommended) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72 Volume Groups (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73 DS8000 LSS Dual Pathed Host (Recommended) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-74 Unit Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76 Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Unit Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 3.1 Introduction and Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Topic: DS CLI Introduction and Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 DS Command Line Interface (CLI) Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 What’s New? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8 Supported DS CLI Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9 DSCLI Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 DSCLI Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11 Management Consoles: HMC / SMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12 DS CLI Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13 DS6000 Data Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14 3.2 DSCLI Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Topic: DS CLI Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16 DS CLI Installation (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17 DS CLI Installation (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18 Unzipped DSCLI CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19 DSCLI - Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20 Starting DSCLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21 DSCLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 DS CLI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23 DSCLI Profile File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24 DSCLI Profile File Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 3.3 DSCLI Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Topic: DSCLI Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 vi

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

TOC

Three Ways to Use DSCLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 DSCLI Interactive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 DSCLI “DSCLI Script” Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 3.4 Configuration Process using DSCLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Topic: Configuration Process using DSCLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 DS8000/DS6000 - Storage Virtualization Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Storage Hierarchy Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Physical Infrastructure Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Initial Configuration Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 DS CLI User Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 DSCLI User Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 New DSCLI Password Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 3.5 DSCLI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 Topic: DSCLI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 DSCLI Command Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 DSCLI Flag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 Command Flag Parameters or Profile File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 DS CLI Command Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48 List and Show Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 Getting Help with DSCLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50 Object ID Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51 Infrastructure IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52 Object IDs (1 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53 Object IDs (2 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54 Object IDs (3 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55 Object IDs (4 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56 Object IDs (5 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57 1750 Host IOPORT Port Numbers from DS CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58 Sample CLI Configuration Script (1 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59 Sample CLI Configuration Script (2 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60 Sample CLI Configuration Script (3 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 Sample CLI Configuration Script (4 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62 Sample CLI Configuration Script (5 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63 Unit Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65 Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Unit Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 4.1 DS6000 Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Topic: DS6000 Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 DS6000 Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 DS6000 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 DS6000 Model EX1 Hardware Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Disk Enclosure Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 DS6800 – Model 1750-EX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Disk Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 4.2 DS6000 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Topic: DS6000 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Contents Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

vii

Student Notebook

DS6000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17 DS6800 with One Expansion Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18 DS6000 Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19 Sequential Prefetching in Adaptive Replacement Cache (SARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20 Disk Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22 Four Data Paths To Every Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23 Components Architecture (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24 Components Architecture (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25 DS6000 Host and Device Adapter Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26 DS6000 Device Adapter Ports for Disk Enclosure EX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27 DS6000 Switched Disk Expansion (13 Max) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28 DS6000 RAID Array Supported Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29 Preferred Path – What Is It? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30 DS6800 LSS Dual Pathed Host (Recommended) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31 DS6800 LSS Single Pathed Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32 4.3 DS6000 Reliability, Availability Serviceability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 Topic: DS6000 Reliability, Availability, Serviceability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34 High Availability and Scalability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35 Server Failover and Failback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37 NVS Recovery After Complete Power Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38 Major Components – BBUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39 Serviceability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40 DS6000 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41 Light Path Diagnostics In MR 1750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42 DS6000 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43 Rear Panel Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44 DS6000 Maintenance and Support: Call Home and Remote Support . . . . . . . . . .4-45 Logs: Realtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46 Log Display: Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47 4.4 DS6000 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 Topic: DS6000 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50 DS6000 Installability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51 Installation Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52 Storage Management Console (SMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54 DS Storage Manager Supported Operating Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55 DS6000 SMC – Network Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56 HA with Storage Management Console (SMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-57 Installing Storage and Server Enclosures in a Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58 DS6000 Server Enclosure Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-59 Connect Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60 Connect Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-61 Connect Storage Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62 Setting the IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-63 Disk Storage Feature Activation (DSFA) is a Customer Web Application . . . . . . .4-64 Starting DSFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65 License Activation (Enter 32-Digit Code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66 DS6000 - Select DS6000 Series Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67 viii

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

TOC

DS6000 - View Feature Activation Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage Complex Real-Time Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage Unit - Real-time Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assign the Storage Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage Unit Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DFSA Feature Activation Web Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Activation Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter Customer Account Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter Customer Shipping Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter Customer Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set up Call Home Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update DS6000 Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activate Remote Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Performance Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume Performance Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-68 4-69 4-70 4-71 4-72 4-73 4-74 4-75 4-76 4-77 4-78 4-79 4-80 4-81 4-82 4-84

Unit 5. DS8000 Hardware Management Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Unit Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5.1 DS8000 Storage Management Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 DS8000 Management Console Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 DS8000 Management Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Hardware Management Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 DS8000 MC – Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 DS8000 MC and a Pair of Ethernet Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 DS8000 MC and Ethernet Switches Plugging (Back View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 DS8000 MC Network Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 DS8000 and DS6000 Remote Access Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 DS8000 MC Network Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 DS8000 MC – Network Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Redundant DS8000 MC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 DS8000 MC – User Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 DS6000 and DS8000 Remote Support through VPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 How Virtual Private Network (VPN) Operates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 DS8000 MC – Remote Service Security (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 DS8000 MC – Remote Service Security (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 MC – Network Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 DS8000 MC Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Unit Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Unit Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 6.1 DS Storage Manager GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Topic: DS Storage Manager GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 DS Storage Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 DS8000 Management Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 DS Storage Manager Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Contents Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

ix

Student Notebook

DS Storage Manager Realtime Manager - DS8000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9 DS Storage Manager Simulated Manager – DS8000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10 DS Storage Manager Realtime and Simulated Managers – DS6000 . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 DS Storage Manager and DS CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12 Realtime versus Simulated Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 Exporting Logical Configuration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14 Unlock Admin Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15 6.2 Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 Topic: Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18 DS Storage Manager Supported Operating Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19 DS Storage Manager Supported Client Browsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-20 DS8000 Storage Manager Installation Process (1 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21 DS8000 Storage Manager Installation Process (2 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-22 DS8000 Storage Manager Installation Process (3 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-23 DS8000 Storage Manager Installation Process (4 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24 DS8000 Storage Manager Installation Process (5 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-25 DS8000 Storage Manager Installation Process (6 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-26 DS8000 Storage Manager Installation Process (7 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-27 6.3 Activating Keys and Storage Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 Topic: Activating Keys and Storage Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30 Storage Image (DS8000*) – Apply Activation Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-31 Storage Image (DS8000*) - Apply Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32 Apply Configuration – Select Application Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33 Apply Configuration – Select Storage Complex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34 Apply Configuration - Authenticate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-35 Apply Configuration – Select Storage Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-36 Manage Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37 User Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-38 Add User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-39 6.4 Architecture and Logical Configuration Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41 Topic: Logical Configuration Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-42 Recommended Logical Configuration Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-43 DS Storage Manager Signon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-44 DS Storage Manager Welcome Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45 Import Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-46 Create Storage Complex (DS8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-47 Create Storage Complex – Define Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-48 Create Storage Unit – General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-49 Create Storage Unit - Specify DDMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-50 Create Storage Unit - Define Licensed Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-51 Create Storage Unit - Define Licensed Function (Details) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52 Create Storage Unit - Specify I/O Adapters (DS8000*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-53 Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-54 Finish Creating the Storage Complex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-55 Import Storage Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-56 Add Imported Storage Unit to Complex (DS8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-57 Long Running Task Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-58 x

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

TOC

Create Host System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59 Create Host System – General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60 Create Host System – Define Host Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61 Host Attachment Identifier Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62 Create Host System - Specify WWPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63 Create Host System - Specify Storage Image (DS8000*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 Create Host System – Specify Storage Image Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65 Format I/O Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67 Host Attachment Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68 Create Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69 Create Array – Definition Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70 Create Array - Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71 Add Arrays to Ranks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72 Create Array - Custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73 Create Extent Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74 Create Extent Pool – Auto (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75 Create Extent Pool - Auto (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76 Create Extent Pool – Reserve Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77 Create Extent Pool - Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78 Create Extent Pool - Custom Define Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79 Create Extent Pool – Custom Select Ranks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80 Create FB Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81 Create FB Volume – Select Extent Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82 Create FB Volume – Define Volume Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83 Create FB Volume – Define Volume Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84 Create FB Volume – Create Volume Nicknames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85 Create FB Volume Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86 Create FB Volume Group – Define Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87 Create FB Volume Group – Select Host Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88 Create FB Volume Group – Select Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89 Help for Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90 DS Storage Manager Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91 6.5 Summary of Logical Configuration Differences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93 Topic: Summary of Logical Configuration Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94 Summary of Logical Configuration Differences (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95 Summary of Logical Configuration Differences (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96 DS8000/DS6000 and ESS Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97 DS Storage Manager Logical Configuration Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98 Express Configuration (DS6000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99 Express Configuration Volume Creation – Open Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100 Express Configuration - Volume Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102 Express Configuration - Volume Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103 Express Configuration - Host Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104 Express Configuration - Host Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105 Express Configuration -- Host WWPNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106 Express Configuration -- Assign Host to Volume Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Contents Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

xi

Student Notebook

Other Configuration Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-108 Storage Image (DS8000*) – Apply Activation Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-109 Storage Image (DS8000*) - Apply Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-110 Apply Configuration – Select Application Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-111 Apply Configuration – Select Storage Complex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-112 Apply Configuration - Authenticate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-113 Apply Configuration – Select Storage Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-114 Manage Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-115 User Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-116 Add User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-117 Help for Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-118 Unit Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-120 Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Center Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Unit Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2 7.1 DS8000 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Topic: DS8000 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4 Host Adapter Performance - Single Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5 Maximum Total System IOPS/sec, Open and z/OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6 Sequential Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7 Total Disk System Sequential Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8 z/OS Cache Standard Workload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9 Open Systems 70/30/50 Workload ESS 800 and DS8100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10 Global Mirror Write Overhead for Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11 ESS 800 PPRC versus DS8000 Global Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12 FlashCopy Performance Improvements with DS8000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13 7.2 DS6000 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Topic: DS6000 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16 How Migrating to DS6800 Might Affect Hit Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17 Cache Read Hit Performance - 512 Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18 Cache Read Hit Performance - 64 KB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19 DS6800 Cache Read Hit Performance (Max IOPs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20 DS6800 Cache Read Hit Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21 DS6800 OLTP Workloads (RAID5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22 DS6800 4 KB Read Miss Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23 Full Box 64 KB Sequential Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24 Single Stream 64 KB Sequential Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25 7.3 TotalStorage Productivity Center (TPC) and Productivity Data Center Utility (PDCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27 Topic: TotalStorage Productivity Center (TPC) and Productivity Data Center Utility (PDCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28 Storage Infrastructure Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29 Overview of TPC V2R3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30 The Performance Data Collection Utility (PDCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-31 PDCU Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32 PDCU - Supported Platforms and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-33 xii

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

TOC

PDCU Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring and Running PDCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Where the PDCU Data is Stored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDCU Sample Configuration Data Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDCU Script Invocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Report Generator – Example Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port Performance Data Collected via PDCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rank Performance Data Collected via PDCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume Performance Data Collected via PDCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume Performance Data Collected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rank Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDCU Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDCU Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-34 7-35 7-36 7-37 7-39 7-40 7-41 7-43 7-45 7-47 7-49 7-50 7-51 7-52 7-53 7-55

Unit 8. DS Copy Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Unit Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 8.1 Advanced Copy Services Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Topic: Local Flash Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 FlashCopy Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 FlashCopy NOCOPY to COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Persistent Flash Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Multiple Relationship FlashCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Incremental FlashCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 FlashCopy Consistency Group Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 8.2 Remote Mirror and Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Topic: Remote Mirror and Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Disk Storage Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Metro Mirror (Synchronous PPRC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Global Copy (PPRC XD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 FlashCopy on Remote Mirror and Copy Primary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 IBM TotalStorage Metro Mirror / Global Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 PPRC Global Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 PPRC Global Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 PPRC-XD Normal Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 PPRC Async Increment Pending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 PPRC Async Run Consistency Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 Back to Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 8.3 Advanced Copy Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 Topic: Advanced Copy Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26 Advanced Copy Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27 IBM TotalStorage Metro/Global Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 Statement of Direction: Metro/Global Copy Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 DS8000 LPAR and Copy Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 License for FlashCopy (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Contents Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

xiii

Student Notebook

License for FlashCopy (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32 Licence for Remote Mirror Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33 8.4 DSCLI for Copy Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35 Topic: DS CLI for Copy Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36 What’s New? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37 ESS Copy Services Command Flow with CS CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38 DS8000 Copy Services Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39 DS8000 CLI Copy Services Command Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40 DS6000 CLI Copy Services Command Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41 CLI Copy Services Coexistence for ESS and DS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42 DS CLI Copy Services Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-43 DS CLI FlashCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-44 DS CLI PPRC - Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-45 DS CLI PPRC – Global Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-46 DS CLI PPRC - Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-47 DS CLI Clearvol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-48 DS CLI PPRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-49 8.5 DS Storage Manager for Copy Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51 Topic: DS Storage Manager Copy Services GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-52 DS Storage Manager Copy Services GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-53 GUI Create FlashCopy Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-54 GUI FlashCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-55 GUI Select FlashCopy Options (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-56 GUI Select FlashCopy Options (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-57 Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-58 GUI LSS Copy Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-59 Metro Mirror Real-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-60 DS8000 GUI Copy Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-61 Communicate with ESS Copy Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-62 Create FlashCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-63 Create a FlashCopy Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-64 Select a Source Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-65 ESS Copy Services CLI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-66 DSCLI Copy Services Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-67 Make a FlashCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-68 List Established FlashCopies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-69 Unit Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-71 Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Unit Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 9.1 AIX Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Topics: AIX Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4 DS8000 and DS6000 AIX Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5 IBM pSeries and RS/6000 Servers - AIX (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6 IBM pSeries and RS/6000 Servers - AIX (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7 Checking AIX Code Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8 Remove 2105 Fileset (1 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9 xiv

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

TOC

Remove 2105 Fileset (2 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Remove 2105 Fileset (3 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Remove 2105 Fileset (4 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Remove 2105 Fileset (5 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Remove 2105 Fileset (6 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Remove 2105 Fileset (7 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Remove 2105 Fileset (8 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Remove 2105 Fileset (9 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 FileSet and MP SDD Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 MP SDD Installation (1 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 MP SDD Installation (2 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 MP SDD Installation (3 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 MP SDD Installation (4 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 MP SDD Installation (5 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 MP SDD Installation (6 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 MP SDD Installation (7 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Discover WWN of FC HBAs (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Discover WWN of FC HBAs (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Discover WWN of FC HBAs (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Now You Go to the DS6000 (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Now You Go to the DS6000 (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Now You Go to the DS6000 (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Now You Go to the DS6000 (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32 Volume Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Host Attachment (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Host Attachment (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 Host Attachment (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36 LUN Creation (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 LUN Creation (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38 On AIX Server After CFGMGR - No Connection to the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 On AIX Server After GFGMGR - Connection to the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40 On AIX Server After CFGMGR - Connection to the Switch and to the DS6000 . . 9-41 After CFGMGR (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42 After CFGMGR (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43 After CFGMGR (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44 After Creation of VG and FS (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45 After Creation of VG and FS (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46 After Creation of VG and FS (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 9.2 Windows Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49 Topics: Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50 Windows Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51 Intel-Based Servers - Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52 Windows Disk Management (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 Windows Disk Management (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 MP SDD Installation (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55 MP SDD Installation (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56 MP SDD Installation (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Contents Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

xv

Student Notebook

Volume Group on DS6000 (1 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58 Volume Group on DS6000 (2 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-59 Volume Group on DS6000 (3 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-60 Volume Group on DS6000 (4 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61 Volume Group on DS6000 (5 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62 Volume Group on DS6000 (6 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-63 Host System on DS6000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64 Host System - General Host Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-65 Host System - Define Host Ports (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66 Host System - Define Host Ports (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-67 Host System - Define Host WWPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68 Host System - Specify Storage Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69 Host System - Specify Storage Units Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70 Host System - Storage Units Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-71 Host System - Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-72 Host System on DS6000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73 After SDD Install on Windows 2000 (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-74 After SDD Install on Windows 2000 (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-75 After Rescan or Reboot (1 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-76 After Rescan or Reboot (2 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-77 After Rescan or Reboot (3 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-78 After Rescan or Reboot (4 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-79 After Rescan or Reboot (5 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-80 After Rescan or Reboot (6 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-81 9.3 Linux Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-83 Topics: Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-84 Agenda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-85 Servers – LINUX RH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-86 Firmware Checking (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-87 Firmware Checking (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-88 Firmware Checking (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-89 Checking of Number of LUNs (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-90 Checking of Number of LUNs (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-91 Rebuild the RAM-Disk (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-92 Rebuild the RAM-Disk (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-93 Now You Go to the DS6000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-94 Volume Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-95 Host Attachment (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-96 Host Attachment (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-97 LUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-98 MP SDD Installation (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-99 MP SDD Installation (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-100 MP SDD Installation (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-101 MP SDD Installation (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-102 Check LUN Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-103 Determine if Module qla2300 is Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-104 Unload Module qla2300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-105

xvi

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

TOC

Reload Module for qla2300 in Order to Discover New LUNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-106 The LUNs Are Not Seen by SDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-107 The LUNs Are Seen by SDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108 Add a New Partition to Linux with the LUN from DS6000 (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-109 Add a New Partition to Linux with the LUN from DS6000 (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-110 Create a Filesystem (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-111 Create a Filesystem (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-112 Mount the Filesystem /PSSCeduc1 (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-113 Mount the Filesystem /PSSCeduc1 (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-114 9.4 iSeries Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-115 Topics: iSeries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-116 iSeries Servers – OS/400 and i5/OS (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-117 iSeries Servers – OS/400 and i5/OS (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-118 DS6000 Connection to iSeries Systems: Step by Step Commands . . . . . . . . . . 9-119 iSeries Host Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-120 iSeries Volume Group Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-121 iSeries Volume Group Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-122 iSeries Volume Group Creation: Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-123 Volume Group Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-124 Host Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-125 Creation of iSeries Protected Volumes on the DS6000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-126 DS6000 Volumes View from the iSeries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-127 Creation of iSeries Unprotected Volumes on the DS6000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-128 Volume Group Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-129 DS6000 Volumes Usage in iSeries Disk Pools (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-130 DS6000 Volumes Usage in iSeries Disk Pools (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-131 DS6000 Volumes Usage in iSeries Disk Pools (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-132 DS6000 Volumes Usage in iSeries Disk Pools (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-133 Unit Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-135 Appendix A. DS8000 LPAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 Appendix B. DS8000 Layout and Cabling Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Appendix C. Checkpoint Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Contents Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

xvii

Student Notebook

xviii DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

TMK

Trademarks The reader should recognize that the following terms, which appear in the content of this training document, are official trademarks of IBM or other companies: IBM® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. The following are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, or other countries, or both: AIX® Enterprise Storage Server® FlashCopy® i5/OS™ POWER™ Predictive Failure Analysis® TotalStorage® z/OS®

DB2® ESCON® HACMP™ iSeries™ POWER5™ pSeries® Virtualization Engine™ zSeries®

eServer™ FICON® Hypervisor™ OS/400® PowerPC® RS/6000® xSeries®

Java and all Java-based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States, other countries, or both. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, product and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Trademarks Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

xix

Student Notebook

xx

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

pref

Course Description IBM TotalStorage DS8000 and DS6000 Implementation Workshop for Open Systems Duration: 3 days Purpose To learn the DS6000/DS8000 storage subsystem and its hardware components and logical structure for Open systems hosts. The students configure hosts and fixed-block LUNs for the DS8000 storage subsystem using a DS8000 Storage Manager GUI, and review the DSCLI interface for scripting configuration functions. Configuration can be handled online or offline, with import and export capabilities for configuration files created in the offline configuration simulator. This course introduces the DS8000 and its hardware components, and teaches the students the process of configuring the subsystem using the DS8000 GUI or DSCLI interfaces. The DS6000 differences are covered in the class, but most of the labs focus on the DS8000 SM and DSCLI.

Audience Information Technology (IT) storage administrators responsible for the implementation of storage resources in a SAN environment with hardware solutions an operating systems.

Prerequisites • SN70 Introduction to Storage Area Networks • SS05 Introduction to Data Storage Systems • An understanding of zSeries storage and open system operating systems

Objectives After completing this course, you should be able to: • Describe the hardware components of the IBM TotalStorage DS6000/DS8000 • Describe the architecture of the IBM TotalStorage DS6000/DS8000

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Course Description Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

xxi

Student Notebook

• Describe the hardware installation and cabling of the DS6000/DS8000 • Describe the DSCLI interface installation and setup • Describe the DSCLI interface commands and how to use them • Describe the DS Storage Management GUI interface installation and setup • Describe the DS Storage Management GUI and how to use the panels to configure the DS6000 subsystem for Open Systems hosts • Describe the zSeries Host Attachment considerations for the DS6000/DS8000 • Describe the use of the SM GUI and DSCLI for Copy Services • Describe how to access target volumes in Open Systems hosts • Describe the use of scripts and additional programs for managing Copy Services • Describe the high-level management interfaces for DS6000 • Describe maintenance and support of the DS6000 • Describe the customer maintenance and CRU replacement procedures

Curriculum relationship This course is part of the Storage Networking curriculum. A basic understanding of file systems as used in the Open Systems environment is also a prerequisite. A possible corequisite or follow-on course is SN82 - Planning and Implementing the SAN Volume Controller. Other courses in this curriculum group are: • SN70 - Introduction to Storage Area Networks • SS05 - Introduction to Data Storage Systems • SS58 - Planning and Implementing the IBM TotalStorage DS6000 for zSeries • SS59 - Planning and Implementing the IBM TotalStorage DS8000 for zSeries

xxii DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

pref

Agenda Day 1 Welcome Unit 1 - DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Unit 2 - DS8000 Virtualization Concepts Unit 3 - DS8000 Command Line Interface Labs: DSCLI Hands-on Labs

Day 2 Unit 4 - DS6000 Hardware Architecture Unit 5 - DS8000 Hardware Management Console Unit 6 - DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Labs: DS Storage Manager GUI Hands-on Labs

Day 3 Unit 7 - DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Center Utility Unit 8 - DS Copy Services Unit 9 - DS Host Attachment Consideration AIX, Windows, Linux, iSeries Optional Lab: GUI and DSCLI and Q and A

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Agenda Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

xxiii

Student Notebook

xxiv DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture What This Unit Is About The DS8000 storage subsystem is the next generation of storage and provides RAID-5 or RAID-10 storage arrays attached to a scalable state-of-the-art processor with variable cache memory and persistent fast-write cache. Power5 1.9 GHz processors process instructions and move data through the subsystem at almost six times the rate of the current ESS storage subsystems. The user can configure the storage subsystem using a GUI-based interface or a DSCLI interface, and configuration can be handled online or offline, with import and export capabilities for configuration files created in the offline configuration simulator. This unit introduces the DS8000 and its hardware components and architecture. We look at the different models and expansion units, and overview the features and components of the subsystems.

What You Should Be Able to Do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Describe the IBM DS8000 highlights • Describe the IBM DS8000 hardware components • Describe the IBM DS8000 architecture • Describe the IBM DS8000 Sequential Prefetching in Adaptive Replacement Cache (SARC) management • Describe the IBM DS8000 RAS features • Describe the IBM DS8000 layout and cabling rules

References SG24-6452

IBM TotalStorage DS8000 Series Architecture and Concepts

SC24-7623

IBM TotalStorage: DS8000 users Guide

GC26-0495

IBM TotalStorage DS8000 Introduction and Planning Guide

SY27-7641

IBM TotalStorage DS8000 Installation Guide

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-1

Student Notebook

SC26-7628

IBM TotalStorage DS8000 Host Attachment Guide

SC26-xxxx

IBM TotalStorage DS8000 Command Line User's Guide

Http://www.storage.ibm.com/ess http://www.snia.org Storage Network Industry Association (SNIA) http://www.fibrechannel.org Fibre Channel Industry Association (FCIA) http://www.t11.org Technical Committee T11 for device interface of NCITS (National Committee for Information Technology Standards)

1-2

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you should be able to: Describe the IBM DS8000 highlights Describe the IBM DS8000 hardware components Describe the IBM DS8000 architecture Describe the IBM DS8000 SARC cache management Describe the IBM DS8000 RAS features

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-1. Unit Objectives

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-3

Student Notebook

1-4

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

1.1 DS8000 Highlights

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-5

Student Notebook

Topic: DS8000 Highlights DS8000 Highlights DS8000 Hardware Components DS8000 Architecture DS8000 Cache Management DS8000 RAS Features

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-2. Topic: DS8000 Highlights

SS481.0

Notes:

1-6

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 Series Models (2107) Are: High Performance High-capacity series of disk storage Designed to support continuous operations Redundancy Hot replacement / updates Uses IBM POWER5 server technology That is integrated with the IBM Virtualization Engine technology Consist of Storage unit One or two (recommended) Management Consoles (MC) Graphic User Interface (GUI) or Command Line Interface (CLI) allows Performing logical configurations and copy services management functions For high-availability, hardware components are redundant © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-3. DS8000 Series Models (2107)

SS481.0

Notes: The DS8000 storage subsystem is the next generation of storage, and provides RAID-5 or RAID-10 storage arrays attached to a scalable state-of-the art Power 5 processors with variable cache memory and persistent fast-write cache. Power5 1.9 Ghz processors process instructions, and move data through the subsystem at almost six times the rate of the current ESS storage subsystems. The user can configure the storage subsystem using a GUI-based interface or a CLI interface, and configuration can be handled online or offline, with import and export capabilities for configuration files created in the offline configuration simulator. This unit introduces the DS8000 and its hardware components and architecture. We look at the different models and expansion units, and overview the features and components of the subsystems.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-7

Student Notebook

DS8000 Models DS8100 (Model 921) Processor Complex Dual Two-way Up to one expansion frame DS8300 (Models 922 and 9A2) Processor Complex Dual Four-way Up to two expansion frames Model 9A2 supports two IBM TotalStorage System Logical Partitions (LPAR) in one storage unit Expansion frame Model 92E attaches to 921 and 922 Expansion frame Model 9AE attaches to 9A2 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-4. DS8000 Models

SS481.0

Notes: There are three models of the DS8000 available to customers. The DS8100 model 921 provides a 2-way 1.5 Ghz Power5 SMP processor and disk storage up to 115 TB. It can address 255 LSSs and 65280 devices, and supports Open Systems LUNs in sizes which can span over multiple arrays, and 3390 devices ranging in size from a single cylinder up to 65520 cylinders in size. It supports fibre channel attachment to SAN environments and supports mainframe PAVs, Multiple Allegiance and I/O priority queuing along with all of the Copy Services functions. The DS8300 provides a 4-way Power5 1.9 Ghz SMP processor and disk storage up to 192 TB.

1-8

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 Hardware Overview 2-Way (Model 8100) Two dual processor servers Up to 128 GB Cache

8 to 64 2 Gb FC/FICON – 4 to 32 ESCON ports 16 to 384 HDD Intermixable 73 GB 15,000 rpm, 146/300 GB 10,000 rpm

Physical capacity from 1.1 TB up to 115 TB (384 x 300 GB DDMs)

4-Way (Model 8300) Two four processor servers Up to 256 GB Cache

8 to 128 2 Gb FC/FICON – 4 to 64 ESCON ports 16 to 640 HDD Intermixable 73 GB 15,000 rpm, 146/300 GB 10,000 rpm

Physical capacity from 1.1 TB up to 192 TB (640 x 300 GB DDMs)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-5. DS8000 Hardware Overview

SS481.0

Notes: The DS8100 provides a 2-way SMP processor and cache memory from 16 to 128 GB. It can house from 2 to 16 FC or ESCON adapters providing 8 to 64 2 GB FCP/FICON ports or 4 to 32 ESCON ports. The base frame, pictured here, can house up to 128 DDMs, and a single expansion frame can add 256 more DDMs for a total of 384 for the DS8100 model 921 and a Model 92E expansion frame. This provides disk storage up to 115 TB. It can address 255 LSSs and 65280 devices and supports 3390 devices up to 65520 cylinders in size. It supports PAVs, Multiple Allegiance and I/O priority queueing along with all the of Copy Services functions. The DS8300 provides a 4-way SMP processor, and can house from 2 to 32 FC or ESCON adapters providing 8 to 128 2 Gb FCP/FICON ports or 4 to 64 ESCON ports. The base frame, pictured here, can house up to 128 DDMs and two 92E expansion frames can add 512 more DDMs for a total of 640 for the DS8300 model 922, and two Model 92E expansion frames providing disk storage up to 192 TB.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-9

Student Notebook

Interfaces to DS8000 (1 of 2) IBM TotalStorage DS Storage Manager (DS-SM: Web based) Program Interface to perform logical configurations and copy services management functions Installed via GUI (graphical mode) or as an unattended (silent mode) Accessed through Web browser Offers: Simulated Configuration (offline) Create / Modify / Save logical config when disconnected Apply them to a network attached storage unit Real-time Configuration (online) Logical configuration and Copy Services to a network attached storage unit Both DS command-line interface (CLI: Script based) OPEN hosts invoke and manage FlashCopy, Metro and Global Mirror functions Batch processes and scripts Check storage unit configuration and perform specific application functions For example: Check and verify storage unit configuration Check current copy services config used by storage unit Create new logical storage and copy-services config settings Modify / delete logical storage and copy-services config settings © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-6. Interfaces to DS8000 (1 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: The interfaces used to monitor and configure the DS8000 consist of a Web-based GUI and a command-line interface. The DS8000 Storage Manager can be used either in Real-time (online) or Simulated (offline) mode. Either mode is used to manipulate the storage configuration process for a DS8000, defining CKD or fixed block (FB) storage, or it may be used to modify an existing configuration. The Simulated Manager which can preconfigure new configurations or modify existing configurations, is to be exported to the DS8000 at a later time. For example, the Simulated Manager could be used to execute or modify changes at an off-peak hour. Normally, a user would access either Real-time or Simulated interfaces through the DS8000, Storage – Hardware Management Console (S-HMC), which is an integrated component of the DS8000 base frame. However, the DS8000 Storage Manager can be installed on a user workstation and used in a no-attach offline mode using the simulated Storage Manager. In this way, users can prepare configurations to download to the DS8000 or just use the simulated mode SM to learn about the GUI interface and become familiar with its operation.

1-10 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

The IBM TotalStorage DS Command-Line Interface (the DS CLI) is a software package that allows open systems hosts to invoke and manage Copy Services functions as well as to configure and manage all storage units in a storage complex. The DS CLI is a full-function command set.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-11

Student Notebook

Interfaces to DS8000 (2 of 2) DS Open application programming interface (API) Nonproprietary storage management client application supporting Routine LUN management activities (creation, mapping, masking) Creation / Deletion RAID5 and RAID10 volume spaces Copy services functions: FlashCopy, PPRC Helps to integrate configuration management support into existing storage resource management (SRM) applications Enables automation of configuration management through customer-written applications Complements the use of Web-based DS-SM and script-based DS-CLI Implemented through IBM TotalStorage Common Information Model (CIM) Agent Middleware application providing CIM-compliant interface DS Open API uses CIM technology to manage proprietary devices as open system devices through storage management applications DS Open API allows these applications to communicate with a storage unit DS API used by TPC for Disk

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-7. Interfaces to DS8000 (2 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: A common Application Programming Interface is also provided for use with storage resource management program such as SRM or TPC.

1-12 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM TotalStorage Management Console Focal point for Configuration, Copy Services, Maintenance

Dedicated workstation installed inside DS8000 Is the eServer Power5 HMC and can be also called S-HMC on DS8000 Automatic monitoring the state of system Notify user and IBM when service is required (Call Home) Can also be connected to network Enabling centralized management through CLI or API scenarios

External management console (optional) For redundancy with high availability Called SMC on DS6000

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-8. IBM TotalStorage Management Console

SS481.0

Notes: The S-HMC is used to perform configuration, management, and maintenance activities on the DS8000. It can be ordered to be located either physically inside the base frame or externally for mounting in a customer-supplied rack. If the S-HMC is not operational then it is not possible to perform maintenance, power the DS8000 up or down, or perform Copy Services tasks, such as the establishment of FlashCopies. It is thus recommended to order two management consoles to act as a redundant pair.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-13

Student Notebook

DS8000 Data Flow The normal flow of data for a write is the following : 1. Data is written to cache memory in the owning server. 2. Data is written to NVS memory of the alternate server. 3. The write is reported to the attached host as having been completed. 4. The write is destaged from the cache memory to disk. 5. The write is then discarded from the NVS memory of the alternate server.

NVS for odd LSSs

NVS for even LSSs

Cache memory for even LSSs

Cache memory for odd LSSs

Server 0

Server 1

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-9. DS8000 Data Flow

SS481.0

Notes: Redundancy in the DS8000 servers allows data to be written into cache and persistent memory of the two servers so that I/Os can be completed and hosts can be released prior to destaging data to disk arrays. This improves write performance and also provides redundancy for failover conditions.

1-14 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Host Connectivity: IBM Subsystem Device Driver Server IBM Subsystem Device Driver

Device Driver SCSI

DS6000

SDD provides the following functions: Enhanced data availability Automatic path failover Dynamic I/O load-balancing across multiple paths Path selection policies for the host system Concurrent download of licensed machine code With DS6000 and DS8000, SDD is supported on the following OS: Windows Netware AIX HP-UX SUN Solaris Linux Can coexist with RDAC (DS4000 multipath driver) on most OS as long they manage separate HBAs Cannot be used with most other multipath drivers (that is, Vertias, PV-Links, Powerpath) © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-10. Host Connectivity: IBM Subsystem Device Driver

SS481.0

Notes: For Open Systems hosts a multipath driver is provided for use in load balancing and multipath operation which is fairly common today for disk access. SDD version 1.6.x.x. is provided for the DS6000 and DS8000, and supports most of the common OSs. It can be installed with RDAC for the DS4000 servers as long as each product manages separate HBAs. If third-party multipath drivers or volume managers are used, they supersede the need to install the SDD package.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-15

Student Notebook

DS8000 Enhancements At a Glance Hardware – new everything Processors, adapters, internal paths, frames… Increased management flexibility via storage system LPARS Enhanced Performance Faster or more of almost everything New patent pending cache algorithms Extended logical device addressing Up to 256 logical subsystems (LSS) with virtualized assignment of physical capacity to LSSs Up to 65,280 logical volumes Extended Connectivity Up to 128 host ports (FC or Ficon) Or 64 ESCON host ports Up to 510 FCP logins per port and 8,192 per storage LPAR Up to 512 FICON logical paths per logical control unit image and 128,000 per storage facility image Up to 256 FICON logical path groups per control unit image Up to 2,048 FICON logical paths per port

Improved volume management Nondisruptive volume add and delete Up to 65,280 volumes assigned to up to 256 Logical Subsystems (LSSs); an array can contain volumes for multiple LSSs Larger LUNs (over 2 TB) 64,000 cylinder (55.6 GB) zSeries volumes Improved Administration Online and offline configuration capability using a Web-based graphical user interface (GUI) Ease-of-use improvements (compared to the ESS Specialist) Command-line interface (CLI) supports control of copy services without dependencies on GUI-created tasks Even more attractive Total Cost of Ownership More flexible feature licensing Four-year standard warranty period Larger capacity volumes supported Increased opportunities for consolidation

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-11. DS8000 Enhancements At a Glance

SS481.0

Notes: Looking at the DS8000 at a glance, there are many reasons why this product is state of the art in disk storage. The new hardware and internal components provide an increase every area of the subsystem making it one of the fastest storage processing subsystems available. Increased logical addressing provides 16 times the number of available addresses, and increased connectivity allows connections to many host environments and large SAN installations. The new GUI and CLI interfaces are some of the most robust and functional interfaces in the market, and have adopted a standard look and feel to other IBM TotalStorage products. Major enhancements in the volume administration from the ESS make the DS8000 more flexible and easier to configure than any other storage subsystem. All of these things improve the Total Cost of Ownership or TCO to the customer.

1-16 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 Overview

Processor - pSeries Squadron Power5 Cache Expansion Rack Host Adapters - per HA: 4-port FC / FICON (2 Gb) - per HA: 2-port ESCON

Device Adapters Drives - 73 GB (15 K rpm)

2-way (Base Frame Only)

2-way + Expansion Frame

4-way or LPAR (Base Frame Only)

4-way or LPAR + Expansion Frame

4-way or LPAR + Two Expansion Frames

2-way 1.5 GHz

2-way 1.5 GHz

4-way 1.9 GHz

4-way 1.9 GHz

4-way 1.9 GHz

16 to 128 GB

16 to 128 GB

32 to 256 GB

32 to 256 GB

32 to 256 GB

Yes (1)

--

Yes (1 or 2)

--

--

2 to 16

2 to 16

2 to 32

2 to 32

2 to 8

2 to 8

2 to 16

2 to 16

2 to 16 (example, 8 to 64 FC / FICON ports) 2 to 8 (example, 1-4 FCALs)

16 to 128 16 to 384 (Increments of (Increments of 16) 16)

16 to 128 (Increments of 16)

Physical Capacity

1.1 to 38.4 TB

1.1 to 115 TB

1.1 to 38.4 TB

1.1 to 115 TB

1.1 to 192 TB

Power

Three-Phase

Three-Phase

Three-Phase

Three-Phase

Three-Phase

76 x 66.5 x 43 in 19.86 sq. ft.

76 x 99.75 x 43 in 29.79 sq. ft.

- 146 GB (10 K rpm) - 300 GB (10 K rpm)

Dimensions -Height x Width x Depth - Footprint

76 x 33.25 x 43 in 76 x 66.5 x 43 in 76 x 33.25 x 43 in 9.93 sq. ft. 19.86 sq. ft. 9.93 sq. ft.

16 to 384 16 to 640 (Increments of 16) (Increments of 16)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-12. DS8000 Overview

SS481.0

Notes: Here is a chart which maps the features of the DS8000 according to the various models that are available.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-17

Student Notebook

1-18 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

1.2 DS8000 Hardware Components

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-19

Student Notebook

Topic: DS8000 Hardware Components DS8000 Highlights DS8000 Hardware Components DS8000 Architecture DS8000 Cache Management DS8000 RAS Features

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-13. Topic: DS8000 Hardware Components

SS481.0

Notes:

1-20 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000: Primary Frame Topology Standard 19in rack mounting space

Dense HDD Packaging 16 drives per pack

Dual FC-AL Loop Switches Point to Point Isolation Two Simultaneous Operations per loop

Storage Hardware Maintenance Console

Redundant Power

Processor Complex IBM eServer p5 570 Dual 2-way or Dual 4-way

4 I/O Enclosure Bays Each bay supports 4 Host Adapters and 2 Device Adapters

Host Adapter

BBU:

4 FCP/FICON Ports or 2 ESCON Ports

Battery Backup Units

Device Adapter

Front

4 FC-AL Ports

Rear

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-14. DS8000: Primary Frame Topology

SS481.0

Notes: Here are the front view and the back view of the DS8000 Model 921 or 922 primary frame or base frame. The frame houses the processors, power supplies, host and device adapters. It also provides a 19-inch rack for up to eight disk enclosures or up to 128 DDMs. Additional DDMs can be added via expansion frames as well as additional adapters. The processor complex is a pair of Power5 p570 servers, and can be 2-way or 4-way processors. One of the primary advantages of the p5 is the LPAR capability using the 4-way processor. The DS8000 can be split into two distinct logical partitions. One of the 2-way processors and half the device and host adapters can be physically allocated to each LPAR. This unique design allows two completely separate versions of LIC to be loaded in each LPAR.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-21

Student Notebook

DS8000 Terminology Storage Complex A group of DS8000s managed by a single Management Console Storage Unit A single DS8000 including expansion frames Processor Complex One P5-570 pSeries server Two processor complexes form a redundant pair Divided in one LPAR (models 921 or 922) or two LPARs (model 9A2)

LPARs Processor complex 0

Processor complex 1

Server 0

Storage facility image 1

Server 1

Server 0

Storage facility image 2

Server 1

LPARs

Storage Server The Software that uses an LPAR Has access to a percentage of resources available on the Processor Complex for the LPAR At GA, this percentage is 50% (model 9A2) or 100 % (models 921 or 922) Storage Facility Image (SFI) Union of two LPARs, one from each Processor Complex Each LPAR hosts one Storage Server © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-15. DS8000 Terminology

SS481.0

Notes: The group of DS8000 Storage servers it manages is called a Storage Complex and each frame is called a Storage Unit. Each Storage Unit has two pSeries p5 570 servers, and this is called the processor complex. When using the Storage Unit in LPAR mode, the resources of the Storage Unit can be divided into two logical partitions called LPARs. A Storage Server is the software that is used to control the LPAR. The two LPARs create a Storage Image and each Storage Server has a Storage Image ID associated with it.

1-22 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 Hardware Components Detail 2 Gbps Fibre Channel ports

HA

Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

RIO-G Module

PowerPC

Processor Complex

Server 0

Server 1

Memory

L3 Memory

L1,2 Memory

Processor

L1,2 Memory

Processor

RIO-G Interconnect

RIO-G Module

Processor

L1,2 Memory

Processor

L1,2 Memory

Memory

L3 Memory

RIO-G Module

POWER5 2-way SMP

POWER5 2-way SMP

Processor Complex

RIO-G Module

PowerPC

2 DAs I/O enclosure

Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

DA

2 Gbps Fibre Channel ports

4 HAs © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-16. DS8000 Hardware Components Detail

SS481.0

Notes: The RIO-G is the backbone of the DS and connects the storage servers to the hosts and to the disk enclosures via device adapter pairs. DA pairs are used from two different RIO-G bays to form a loop between the servers and the device adapters which then connect to the disk enclosures.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-23

Student Notebook

DS8000 Processor Complex 2 Gbps Fibre Channel ports

HA

Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

RIO-G Module

PowerPC

Processor Complex

Server 0

Server 1

Memory

L3 Memory

L1,2 Memory

Processor

L1,2 Memory

Processor

RIO-G Interconnect

RIO-G Module

Processor

L1,2 Memory

Processor

L1,2 Memory

Memory

L3 Memory

RIO-G Module

POWER5 2-way SMP

POWER5 2-way SMP

Processor Complex

RIO-G Module

PowerPC

2 DAs I/O enclosure

Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

DA

2 Gbps Fibre Channel ports

4 HAs © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-17. DS8000 Processor Complex

SS481.0

Notes: The processor complex is connected to the storage using a high-speed I/O bay called the RIO-G. It contains host adapters and device adapters.

1-24 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

DS8000 Processor Complex : Power5 Server

To host servers

Adapter

Processor

Adapter

Adapter

Processor

Adapter

Storage server

Uempty

Processor

L1,2 Memory

Processor

L1,2 Memory

Memory

L3 Memory

RIO-G Module POWER5 2-way SMP

The CEC enclosures in the Model 921 each have one processor card (2-way) The CEC enclosures in the Model 922 and 9A2 each have two processor cards (4-Way) CEC: Computer Electronic Complex The CEC Enclosures contain components such as the processor cards, cache memory, and the CEC hard drives

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-18. DS8000 Processor Complex: Power5 Server

SS481.0

Notes: For storage processing we can get by with 2-way and 4-way. In today’s data processing environments there is no need to go further because nobody requires that kind of speed, however, as the need arises in the future, IBM is well positioned to provide a processor to meet the requirements.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-25

Student Notebook

DS8000 Processor Complex PC IBM eServer pSeries POWER5 Servers 2-way 1.5 GHz (3X an ESS 800) 4-way 1.9 GHz (6X an ESS 800) The POWER5 processor supports logical partitioning The p5 hardware and Hypervisor manage the real-to-virtual memory mapping to provide robust isolation between LPARs IBM has been doing LPARs for 20 years in mainframes and 3 years in pSeries At GA LPARs are split 50-50, so: A 4-way has two processors to one LPAR and two processors to the other LPAR Post GA, 25-75 possible LPARs only possible in the 4-way P5s (RIO-G can't be shared in 2-way) Cache memory from 16 GB-256 GB Persistent Memory 1 GB to 8 GB dependent on cache size Battery backed for backup to internal disk (4 GB per server) © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-19. DS8000 Processor Complex PC

SS481.0

Notes: The Power5 processors in the Model 921 are a 2-way 1.5 Ghz compared to a 4-way 600Mhz in an ESS-800. The 922 uses a 1.9 Ghz 4-way processor and provides 6x performance of an ESS-800 The 4-way processor in a 922 can be split at the factory and divided into two LPARs, creating a Model 9A2 and physically splitting the resources of the DS8300 into two logical partitions. Each partition has access to a pair of 2-way processors, two of the RIO-G bays and half the host and device adapters. The disk enclosures are divided between the LPARs. As far as we know this LPAR split is only done at the factory, and is not available as a field upgrade yet.

1-26 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 Processor Complex PCI-X adapters with blind swap mechanism

power supply 1 power supply 2

Front View DVD rom drives

disk drive bays processor cards

operator panel power supply 1

power supply 2

Rear view PCI-X slots RIO-G ports

RIO-G ports

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-20. DS8000 Processor Complex

SS481.0

Notes: The Power5 processor is pictured above. The Model 921 has the RIO-G ports on the motherboard, but lacks the second set which are provided in the 922 and 9A2 via a RIO-G card which is installed in one of the PCI-X slots. The processor complex also houses disks for the AIX kernel and storage for backing the persistent memory for fast write cache.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-27

Student Notebook

DS8000 Persistent Memory The 2107 does not use NVS cards, NVS batteries, or NVS battery chargers Data that would have been stored in the 2105 NVS cards resides in the 2107 CEC cache memory A part of the system cache is configured to function as NVS storage If the 2107 has pinned data in cache, it is written to an extra set of four disk drives located in each of the CEC enclosures Six disk drives total in each CEC: 2 for LIC (LVM Mirrored AIX 5.2 + DS8000 code) 4 for pinned data and other CEC functions During the recovery process the pinned data can be restored from the extra set of CEC disk drives just like it would have been from the NVS cards on the ESS 800

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-21. DS8000 Persistent Memory

SS481.0

Notes: Persistent memory is the cache memory allocated for fast write operations and, like NVS in the ESS, it is protected from failures and backed by disk and battery power in case of failures in the processor complex or cache. The batteries in the DS8000 hold up the disks in the CEC until the persistent memory can be offloaded to them in the event of a power failure or cache problem.

1-28 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 I/O Enclosure 2 Gbps Fibre Channel ports

HA

Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

RIO-G Module

PowerPC

Processor Complex

Server 0

Server 1

Memory

L3 Memory

L1,2 Memory

Processor

L1,2 Memory

Processor

RIO-G Interconnect

RIO-G Module

Processor

L1,2 Memory

Processor

L1,2 Memory

Memory

L3 Memory

RIO-G Module

POWER5 2-way SMP

POWER5 2-way SMP

Processor Complex

RIO-G Module

PowerPC

2 DAs I/O enclosure

Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

DA

2 Gbps Fibre Channel ports

4 HAs © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-22. DS8000 I/O Enclosure

SS481.0

Notes: All base models contain I/O enclosures and adapters. The I/O enclosures hold the adapters and provide connectivity between the adapters and the processors. Device adapters and host adapters are installed in the I/O enclosure. Each I/O enclosure has six slots. Each slot supports PCI-X adapters running at 64 bit, 133 Mhz. Slots 3 and 6 are used for the device adapters. The remaining slots are available to install up to four host adapters per I/O enclosure.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-29

Student Notebook

RIO-G and I/O Enclosures Also called I/O Drawers 6 PCI-X slots : 3,3 V, 133 MHz blind swap Hot-plug: Four port Host Adapters cards with four ports each: FCP or FICON adapters ports Two Device Adapter cards with four ports each: 4 FC-AL ports per card 2 FC-AL loops per card Access to cache via RIO-G internal Bus Each adapter has it's own PowerPC processor Owned by processors in LPAR SPCN : System Power Control Network Used to control and monitor the status of the power and cooling within the I/O Enclosure. Cabled as a loop between the different I/O Enclosures

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-23. RIO-G and I/O Enclosures

SS481.0

Notes: The I/O enclosures hold the adapters and provide connectivity between the adapters and the cache memory over the RIO-G internal bus. Each adapter has its own PowerPC processor which handles I/O operations independently from the CEC. Host adapters provide FCP connection to attached servers or FICON attached mainframe hosts. Device adapters provide connection to the disk enclosures and the CEC. Internally, the RIO-G bay is connected to the CEC on a high-speed internal bus. SPCN ports access the RIO-G bay for control and monitoring. The device adapter in each RIO-G is one half of a DA pair, and is connected through the disk enclosures to the other DA to form the FC-AL loop.

1-30 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 RIO-G Port: Layout Example I/O enclosure Processor Complex 0

I/O enclosure

Loop 0

Processor Complex 1

RIO-G ports

RIO-G ports

I/O enclosure

I/O enclosure

I/O enclosure

I/O enclosure

Up to 4 I/O Enclosures in the same RIO-G loop Upto to four 20 I/OI/O Enclosures to Up enclosures the P5-570 system.

in the same RIO-G loop Up to 20 I/O enclosures to the P5-570 system.

Loop 1 I/O enclosure

I/O enclosure

Each RIO-G port can operate at 1 GHz in bidirectional mode and is capable of passing data in each direction on each cycle of the port. Maximum data rate per I/O enclosure: 4 GB/s. It is designed as a high-performance self-healing interconnect. The p5-570 provides two external RIO-G ports, and an adapter card adds two more. Two ports on each processor complex form a loop. Figure shows an illustration of how the RIO-G cabling is laid out in a DS8000 that has eight I/O drawers. This would only occur if an expansion frame were installed. The DS8000 RIO-G cabling varies based on the model. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-24. DS8000 RIO-G Port: Layout Example

SS481.0

Notes: Each RIO-G port from the CEC connects to the I/O enclosure, and it connects to a second I/O enclosure, and then to the other CEC and back again. The 921 has one loop available, and the 922 and 9A2 have two loops available.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-31

Student Notebook

Bus Interconnect Performance Comparison Model 800 CPI/RIO (4) host bay, (4) host adapters per bay, (8) CPI buses CPI bus 32-bit/66 MHz, connects to EADS (3) EADS per cluster share (2) 66 MHz/64-bit PHBs PCI buses Connects to RIO bus (1 bi-di link in use per cluster @ 500 MHz 1-byte wide) Max effective bandwidth: 550 MB/SEC for box (275 MB/SEC bi-di on each RIO bus in each cluster)

DS8000 RIO-G (4) I/O Enclosures per RIO-G loop, (6) host/device adapters per drawer No CPI (2) EADS-X per I/O Enclosure with (2) 64-bit/133 MHz PHBs PCI-X buses Connects to RIO-G bus (4 bi-di links per RIO-G loop @ 1 GHz 1-byte wide) Max effective bandwidth: 2000 MB/SEC per RIO-G loop, 1 loop per 2-way SMP (500 MB/SEC bi-di on each of the 4 RIO-G links)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-25. Bus Interconnect Performance Comparison

SS481.0

Notes: The ESS employed a Common Parts Interconnect bus architecture which was a switch fabric that connected the HA to the processor bays. The ESS has one 500 Mhz link that can provide around 550 MB/sec bandwidth to the servers at maximum throughput. The RIO-G has no CPI switch, but uses 2 133 Mhz 64bit PCI-X buses and 4 -1 Ghz links to the CECs and provides 2000 MB/second per loop. Each 2-way can connect to a RIO-G loop and provide three times the performance and bandwidth of the ESS-800. With a 922 and 4-way processors the DS8300 Model 922 can provide six times the bandwidth of the ESS-800.

1-32 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 Host Adapters HA 2 Gbps Fibre Channel ports

HA

Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

RIO-G Module

PowerPC

Processor Complex

Server 0

Server 1

Memory

L3 Memory

L1,2 Memory

Processor

L1,2 Memory

Processor

RIO-G Interconnect

RIO-G Module

Processor

L1,2 Memory

Processor

L1,2 Memory

Memory

L3 Memory

RIO-G Module

POWER5 2-way SMP

POWER5 2-way SMP

Processor Complex

RIO-G Module

PowerPC

2 DAs I/O enclosure

Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

DA

2 Gbps Fibre Channel ports

4 HAs © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-26. DS8000 Host Adapters HA

SS481.0

Notes: The DS8000 supports two types of host adapters: ESCON and Fibre Channel/FICON. It does not support SCSI adapters. The ESCON adapter in the DS8000 is a dual ported host adapter for connection to older zSeries hosts that do not support FICON. The ports on the ESCON card use the MT-RJ type connector.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-33

Student Notebook

Host Adapter with Four Fibre Channel Ports

2 Gbps Fibre Channel ports

To host servers Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

Adapter

Memory

Processor

Storage server

Processor

Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

Adapter

Adapter

PowerPC

HA

Adapter

Configured as FCP or FICON each More FICON logical paths: ESS (1024) versus DS8000(2048) One FICON channel addresses 16384 devices One HA card covers all the 65,280 devices that an DS8000 supports Up to 16 HA into a DS8100 or 32 HA into a DS8300 16 FICON channel ports to each single device Current zSeries Channel subsystems limited to eight channel paths per device Front End of 128 ports for DS8300 (8 times ESS) 64 ports for DS8100 (4 times ESS)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-27. Host Adapter with Four Fibre Channel Ports

SS481.0

Notes: Each DS8000 Fibre Channel card offers four 2 Gbps Fibre Channel ports. The cable connector required to attach to this card is an LC type. Each port independently auto-negotiates to either 2 Gbps or 1 Gbps link speed. Each of the four ports on one DS8000 adapter can also independently be either Fibre Channel protocol (FCP) or FICON, though the ports are initially defined as switched point to point FCP. Each HA has four ports and each port can address 16384 devices so the card can address 4 X 16384 or 65280 devices which is the maximum a DS8000 can address. The DS8100 has 4 RIO-G bays with 4 HA cards each or 16 HAs, the 922 has 8 RIO-G bays X 4 cards each or 32 HAs.

1-34 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 FCP/FICON Host Adapters: HA Four LC 2 Gb FC ports Auto-negotiates to 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps Each port independently auto-negotiates to either 2 Gbps or 1 Gbps link speed. Can be independently configured to FCP or FICON protocols The personality of the port is changeable via the DS Storage Management tools (GUI or CLI). Ports cannot operate as FCP and FICON simultaneously FCP port can be long wave or short wave Short wave ports support a distance of 300 m (non-repeated) Long wave ports support a distance of 10 km (non-repeated)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-28. DS8000 FCP/FICON Host Adapters: HA

SS481.0

Notes: The definition of the I/O ports is done when the host connection is defined and a WWPN is assigned to the card. The WWPN is not detected from the SAN like it was from the ESS, so these must be entered by hand and errors could occur here.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-35

Student Notebook

DS8000 FICON/FCP Host Adapter Processor QDR

PPC 750GX

1 GHz

Fibre Channel Protocol Engine

Fibre Channel Protocol Engine

Protocol Chipset

Buffer

Data Protection Data Mover ASIC Flash

Data Mover QDR

PCI-X 64-bit 133 MHz

Four 2 Gbps Fibre Channel Ports New High Function/High Performance ASIC Metadata Creation/Checking Configured at port level Fibre or FICON SW or LW © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-29. DS8000 FICON/FCP Host Adapter

SS481.0

Notes: The card itself is PCI-X 64 Bit 133 MHz. The card is driven by a new high function, high performance ASIC. To ensure maximum data integrity, it supports metadata creation and checking. Each Fibre Channel port supports a maximum of 509 host login IDs. This allows for the creation of very large storage area networks (SANs).

1-36 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 Device Adapter DA 2 Gbps Fibre Channel ports

HA

Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

RIO-G Module

PowerPC

Processor Complex

Server 0

Server 1

Memory

L3 Memory

L1,2 Memory

Processor

L1,2 Memory

Processor

RIO-G Interconnect

RIO-G Module

Processor

L1,2 Memory

Processor

L1,2 Memory

Memory

L3 Memory

RIO-G Module

POWER5 2-way SMP

POWER5 2-way SMP

Processor Complex

RIO-G Module

PowerPC

2 DAs I/O enclosure

Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

DA

2 Gbps Fibre Channel ports

4 HAs © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-30. DS8000 Device Adapter DA

SS481.0

Notes: Each DS8000 device adapter (DA) card offers four 2 Gbps FC-AL ports. These ports are used to connect the processor complexes to the disk enclosures. The adapter is responsible for managing, monitoring, and rebuilding the RAID arrays. The adapter provides remarkable performance thanks to a new high-function/high-performance ASIC.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-37

Student Notebook

Fibre Channel Device Adapters with Two Gbps Ports

To host servers

DA perform RAID Logic Adapter

Adapter

DA

Adapter

Memory

PowerPC

Processor Storage server

Processor

Adapter Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

Fibre Channel Protocol Proc

Offload Servers of that workload Each port has up to five times the throughput of a previous SSA based DA ports DS8000 AAL (Array Across Loops) : RAID-5 or RAID-10 eight DDMs spread over two loops

2 Gbps Fibre Channel ports

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-31. Fibre Channel Device Adapters with Two Gbps Ports

SS481.0

Notes: Each DS8000 device adapter provide the RAID support for disk enclosures to support RAID 5 and RAID 10. The DAs have there own processors and much higher bandwidth than in the ESS. We also use AAL (Array Across Loops) to provide higher redundancy and throughput.

1-38 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 Device Adapters FC-AL Switched Fabric FC-AL dual ported drives are connected to FC switch in the Disk Enclosure backplane Two FC-AL loops connect Disk Enclosures to Device Adapters Array across loops is standard configuration option in DS8000 Two simultaneous I/O ops per FC-AL connection possible. Switched FC-AL or SBOD (switched bunch of disks) used for back-end access Device Adapters are attached to a FC Switch with the enclosure Four paths to each drive: 2 FC-AL loops X dual port access Device Adapters support RAID-5 or RAID-10

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-32. DS8000 Device Adapters

SS481.0

Notes: The DS8000 device adapters operate in a FC-AL loop connected to a switched disk enclosure. This provides a point-to-point connection for each DDM which are dual-ported drives.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-39

Student Notebook

DS8000 RAID Device Adapter PPC 750FX

Bridge

SDRAM

Fibre Channel Protocol Engine

NVRAM

Processor 500 MHz

Fibre Channel Protocol Engine

RAID Data Protection Data Mover ASIC

Buffer

Data Mover

Protocol Chipset

PCI-X 64 Bit 133 MHz

Four 2 Gbps Fibre Channel Ports New High Function/High Performance ASIC Metadata Checking

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-33. DS8000 RAID Device Adapter

SS481.0

Notes: The adapter provides remarkable performance thanks to a new high function/high performance ASIC. This ASIC is on each DA card and handles RAID functions and I/O requests. Each card has four FCP ports which connect either one or two loops to the RIO-G bays.

1-40 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

RAID and Logical Volume Comparison Model 800

DS8000

RAID-5 (7 or 8 DDMs) RAID-10 (6 or 8 DDMs) Logical volume on exactly 1 rank

RAID-5, RAID-10 (same as ESS 800) Logical volume segmentation allows for chunks of volumes to be spread across several ranks (Similar to AIX Logical Volume Manager large granularity striping improves IO load across arrays) Post GA: Homogeneous Multi-array ranks (similar to LVM small granularity striping - improves single stream sequential and IO load across arrays)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-34. RAID and Logical Volume Comparison

SS481.0

Notes: Each DS8000 supports RAID 5 or RAID 10 arrays, but in, addition, supports the individual creation and deletion of logical volumes. This means that now we can delete a single volume in a DS6000 or DS8000 and not have to re-format the entire array.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-41

Student Notebook

DS8000 Storage Enclosures Enclosure hold 16 DDMs Dual ported FC-AL DDMs 73, 146, or 300 GB DDMs 10 or 15 K RPM Drives can be added in groups of 8 drives by DS8000 storage enclosure Enclosures act as a FC switch connecting drive using point to point connections

The picture above depicts four simultaneous and independent switched connections, one from each device adapter port.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-35. DS8000 Storage Enclosures

SS481.0

Notes: Each DS8000 frame contains either 8 or 16 disk enclosures depending on whether it is a base or expansion frame. Half of the disk enclosures are accessed from the front of the frame, and half from the rear. Each DS8000 disk enclosure contains a total of 16 DDMs or dummy carriers.

1-42 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

16 Drive Disk Enclosure Backplane

Top Half of Disk Enclosure: 8 Disks in two rows of four disks each

Bottom Half of Disk Enclosure: 8 Disks in two rows of four disks each

Control card Disk

DS8000: Disk enclosures installed in pairs -> one in front & one in back

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-36. 16 Drive Disk Enclosure

SS481.0

Notes: Each DS8000 disk enclosure contains a total of 16 DDMs and a controller card to connect it to the DAs.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-43

Student Notebook

DS8000 Switched FC-AL Disk Subsystem

To host servers

Host server

Processor

Adapter

Adapter

Adapter

Adapter Processor

Memory

Processor

To storage servers Adapter

Storage server

Memory

Processor

Adapter

Fibre Channel switch ooo 16 DDM

Fibre Channel switch

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-37. DS8000 Switched FC-AL Disk Subsystem

SS481.0

Notes: Each DS8000 disk enclosure is a switch which accepts the DDMs and provides a switched bunch of disks or (SBOD) to the DA which connects to the enclosure using FC-AL protocol. The switched part of the disk enclosure allows for better fault isolation and diagnostic information to be gathered, and provides a high-speed connections to the disks using 2 Gb Fibre Channel technology instead of SSA160.

1-44 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 and DS6000 Switched FC-AL/FC-AL FC-AL Loop supports only one operation at a time Arbitration of competition Intermittent failure issues Increasing time as number of devices grows

Switched FC-AL

Switched connections

server 0 device adapter

Fibre channel switch

server 1 device adapter

Fibre channel switch

Drives attached in point-to-point connection Faster arbitration message processing 200 MB/sec external transfer rate Improved RAS Switch detects individual failures Intermittent / Permanent

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-38. DS8000 and DS6000 Switched FC-AL/FC-AL

SS481.0

Notes: The disk enclosures operate on a FC-AL loop, and normally that would give the impression that only one I/O at a time was possible. However, switched FC-AL provides better access and has faster arbitration since each connection is done as a point-to-point connection. Since only one disk is present, it wins the arbitration scheme by default, and then can provide a full 2 Gb/sec. The other benefit over FC-AL is the RAS characteristics for fault isolation. FC-AL is traditional difficult when it comes to detecting errors on the loop and which drive is responsible. With switched FC-AL and PtP connection it is relatively simple to isolate the failure when it occurs since there is only one drive connected per interface.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-45

Student Notebook

Switched FC-AL Advantages DS6000 and DS8000 use switched FC-AL technology to link the device adapter (DA) pairs and the DDMs. Switched FC-AL uses the standard FC-AL protocol, but the physical implementation is different The key features of switched FC-AL technology are: Standard FC-AL communication protocol from DA to DDMs Direct point to point links are established between DA and DDM : No arbitration and no performance degradation Isolation capabilities in case of DDM failures, provides easy problem determination Predictive failure statistics Simplified expansion: no cable rerouting required when adding another disk enclosure The DS8000 architecture employs dual redundant switched FC-AL access to each of the disk enclosures. The key benefits of doing this are: Two independent switched networks to access the disk enclosures Four access paths to each DDM Each device adapter port operates independently Double the bandwidth over traditional FC-AL loop implementations Each DDM is attached to two separate Fibre Channel switches. This means that with two device adapters, we have four 2 Gb/sec effective data paths to each disk. When a connection is made between the device adapter and a disk, the connection is a switched connection, that uses arbitrated loop protocol. This means that a mini-loop is created between the device adapter and the disk. Four simultaneous and independent connections, one from each device adapter port.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-39. Switched FC-AL Advantages

SS481.0

Notes: So the disk enclosure provides the switch and the switch provides better throughput, better fault isolation, higher speeds, and better redundancy.

1-46 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000: Storage Enclosure and DA Cabling

Memory

L3 Memory

L1,2 Memory

Processor

L1,2 Memory

Processor

RIO-G Interconnect

Processor

L1,2 Memory

Processor

L1,2 Memory

RIO-G Module

L3 Memory

RIO-G Module

POWER5 2-way SMP

DA

Memory

POWER5 2-way SMP

RIO-G Module

RIO-G Module

FC-AL Switched FC-AL dual ported drives 2 FC-AL Loops 2 I/Os per FC-AL connection 4 paths to each drive (2 loops x dual port access)

DA

20 port switch ooo 16 DDM

20 port switch

20 port switch ooo 16 DDM

20 port switch © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-40. DS8000: Storage Enclosure and DA Cabling

SS481.0

Notes: Each DS8000 disk enclosure is connected to a DA pair. The disk enclosures are attached in pairs with one mega-pack placed in front and one in the rear. Each DA pair receives four disk enclosures before the next DA pair is used. DA pairs are selected in sequence of installation, which is not numerical in order. DA pair 2 is installed first, then 0, then depending on the Model either 3,1 for a 921 or 6,4 for a 922. Cabling is also done differently on LPAR machines Model 9A2 because the RIO-G bays are split between the LPARs.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-47

Student Notebook

DS8000 Storage Enclosure and DA Cabling

Device Adapter pair

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-41. DS8000 Storage Enclosure and DA Cabling

SS481.0

Notes: For a more detailed look at how the switched disk architecture expands in the DS8000 you should refer to the figure above. It depicts how each DS8000 device adapter connects to two disk networks called loops. Expansion is achieved by adding enclosures to the expansion ports of each switch. Each loop can potentially have up to six enclosures, but this varies depending on machine model and DA pair number. The front enclosures are those that are physically located at the front of the machine. The rear enclosures are located at the rear of the machine.

1-48 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

1.3 DS8000 Architecture

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 1. DS8000 Hardware Components and Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-49

Student Notebook

Topic: DS8000 Architecture DS8000 Highlights DS8000 Hardware Components DS8000 Architecture DS8000 Cache Management DS8000 RAS Features

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 1-42. Topic: DS8000 Architecture

SS481.0

Notes: Let’s take a more detailed look at the architecture of the DS8000.

1-50 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000: Primary Frame Topology Standard 19in rack mounting space

Dense HDD Packaging 16 drives per pack 128 drives in rack

Dual FC-AL Loop Switches Point to Point Isolation Two Simultaneous Operations per loop

Storage Hardware Maintenance Console

Redundant Power

Configuration Guided Maintenance/Call Home Supports Multiple Systems

IBM eServer p5 570 Dual 2-way or Dual 4-way

4 I/O dscli Enter the primary management console IP address: 127.0.0.1 Enter the secondary management console IP address: 127.0.0.1 Enter your username: admin Enter your password: Date/Time: July 10, 2005 2:29:22 PM MDT IBM DSCLI Version: 5.0.3.194 IBM.2107-AZ00041

DS:

dscli> lssu Date/Time: July 10, 2005 2:29:36 PM MDT IBM DSCLI Version: 5.0.3.194 Name ID Model WWNN pw state ========================================================================== DS8300 Storage Facility3B IBM.2107-AZ00040 922 0000000000000000 On dscli>

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-17. DSCLI

SS481.0

Notes: Now normally, the DSCLI would not understand where the DS8000 or DS6000 is located or where the HMC is, so you must tell it. Enter the IP address of the HMC when prompted and the IP of the secondary S-HMC when prompted and the userid and password of the Network Interface server and your into the DSCLI. Now, that seems like a lot of things to input so there must be a better way. OK, so there is a profile called dscli.profile

3-22 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS CLI Configuration DS CLI profile Default: /opt/ibm/dscli/profile/dscli.profile C:\Program Files\IBM\dscli\profile\dscli.profile Created at installation Invoked at DSCLI startup Contains Address of S- HMC Storage Image ID User information Password files Encrypted userid and password Generated with mkuser command Stored in /opt/ibm/dscli/security// Note: -cfg flag can be used on dscli command to invoke profile other than default

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-18. DS CLI Configuration

SS481.0

Notes: The dscli.profile is located in the profile subdirectory of the DSCLI install directory. It may contain the HMC IP addresses and device ID as well as a password file or pwfile located in a local directory where it was created. The profile supplies input to the DSCLI so you don’t have too.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-23

Student Notebook

DSCLI Profile File DSCLI profile file is the place to specify values for flags that are needed for many commands HMC/SMC IP addresses hmc1 hmc2 Storage image ID devid Eliminates need to specify –dev on many commands Userid and password pwfile Profile points to password file (pwfile) containing encrypted userid and password Timeout for network interface client/server communication Timeout Default is 420 seconds Other values (see following charts) If a profile is in use, flag values included on a command can be used to override values from profile file © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-19. DSCLI Profile File

SS481.0

Notes: The dscli.profile provides input to the DSCLI in place of the user entering it manually.

3-24 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

dscli.profile # DS CLI Profile # # # Management Console/Node IP Address(es) # hmc1 and hmc2 are equivalent to -hmc1 and -hmc2 command options. #hmc1: 127.0.0.1 #hmc2: 127.0.0.1 # # Default target Storage Image ID # "devid" and "remotedevid" are equivalent to # "-dev storage_image_ID" and "-remotedev storeage_image_ID" command options, respectively. #devid: IBM.2107-AZ12341 #remotedevid: IBM.2107-AZ12341 # # locale # Default locale is based on user environment. #locale: en # Timeout value of client/server synchronous communication in second. # DSCLI command timeout value may be longer than client/server communication # timeout value since multiple requests may be made by one DSCLI command # The number of the requests made to server depends on DSCLI commands. # The default timeout value is 420 seconds. #timeout 420

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-20. DSCLI Profile File Example

SS481.0

Notes: This is the dscli.profile default profile. You can make other profiles too, but they will have different names. These can be called using the –cfg option of the DSCLI command.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-25

Student Notebook

3-26 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

3.3 DSCLI Modes

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-27

Student Notebook

Topic: DSCLI Modes DSCLI Introduction and Architecture DSCLI Installation DSCLI Modes Configuration Process using DSCLI DSCLI Commands

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-21. Topic: DSCLI Modes

SS481.0

Notes:

3-28 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Three Ways to Use DSCLI Single-Shot Mode: The user specifies the CLI program and command to execute at the shell prompt: shell> dscli lsvolgrp -dev IBM.2107-1300861 Interactive Mode:

The user starts the CLI program and then specifies commands at the program prompt. Script Mode:

The user starts the CLI program and specifies a file containing commands to run: shell> dscli -script ~/bin/volumegroupcreation

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-22. Three Ways to Use DSCLI

SS481.0

Notes: There are three modes of command input. There is single shot mode where control is returned to the command line. Interactive mode where control is returned to the DSCLI command mode and script mode which execute commands from a script.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-29

Student Notebook

DSCLI Interactive Mode

dscli command

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-23. DSCLI Interactive Mode

SS481.0

Notes: The DSCLI command starts the command-line interface (CLI) program. You can use this command to run DSCLI commands in interactive mode, to run a single command, or to run a set of commands from a script. Example This command invokes the CLI in interactive mode: >dscli The startup screen: Welcome to the DS Command-Line Interface Interactive program. Type help to retrieve a list of available program commands. Type quit to exit interactive mode. Tip: Use set output to set output options that will apply during the length of your session in interactive mode. Enter HMC IP Address: xxxxxx MC IP Address is set to xxxxx

3-30 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DSCLI “DSCLI Script” Mode DSCLI scripts are not shell scripts! DSCLI scripts are files with lists of DSCLI commands and comments (prefixed by #) only DSCLI scripts may be called by shell scripts Output is returned to screen, or may be piped to a file DSCLI reads script file one line at a time Exits DSCLI at completion of DSCLI script or on failure Use DSCLI profile file

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-24. DSCLI “DSCLI Script” Mode

SS481.0

Notes: These scripts are really just a set of DSCLI commands in a file and as such the DSCLI does not accept any shell script commands inside a script executed from the single shot or interactive mode. If you wish to return control to the shell script environment after the command completed, then you must execute the commands in single shot mode within the script.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-31

Student Notebook

3-32 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

3.4 Configuration Process using DSCLI

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-33

Student Notebook

Topic: Configuration Process Using DSCLI DSCLI Introduction and Architecture DSCLI Installation DSCLI Modes Configuration Process using DSCLI DSCLI Commands

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-25. Topic: Configuration Process using DSCLI

SS481.0

Notes:

3-34 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000/DS6000 Storage Virtualization Overview Extent Pool s

Rank {r}

Extent Pool

{r}. . .{r}

{[a]}

1-N Ranks in Extent Pool Associated with server0 or server1 All Extents are same Type CKD or FB Same RAID recommended Same DDM RPM recommended

{[a],[a],[a],[a]}

{r}

1,2*,4*,8* Arrays per Rank Rank Divided into N Fixed Sized Extents CKD (Mod1) or FB (1 GB)

Array [a]

[

] RAID 5 6+P+S 7+P

[

]

RAID 10 3x2+2S 4x2

DS8000/DS6000 – one Array Site used to construct one Array (8 DDMs) DS6000 (1Q05) – one 4 DDM Array Site used to construct one Array (4 DDMs) Spare Policy Enforced RAID5 or RAID10

Logical Grouping of 8 Disks of same speed and capacity (1Q05: 4 disks for DS6000)

Array Site Individual DDMs: 73, 146, 300 GB

Post GA For DS8000

Disk

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-26. DS8000/DS6000 - Storage Virtualization Overview

SS481.0

Notes: The constructs for DS8000 virtualization start at the physical disks which are grouped into array sites, then formed into arrays, formatted into extents placed into ranks, and finally, ranks grouped into extent pools. Volumes are allocated from extents from the extent pools and can be deleted. The extents are returned to the extent pool.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-35

Student Notebook

Storage Hierarchy Summary Volumes or LUNs Made up of extents from one extent pool Min size 0.1 GB or 1 cylinder Max size 2 TB (FB) 56 GB(CKD) Can be larger than one rank if more than one rank in pool Associated with LSS during configuration

Volume Group Contains LUNs and host attachments -- FB LUN masking One host attachment (one port or port group) can be member of only one volume group One volume can be member of multiple volume groups Multiple hosts (even different open systems server types) can be member of the same volume group

AIX host port

AIX host port

iSeries host port group

FB (i)

FB FB FB FB FB

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-27. Storage Hierarchy Summary

SS481.0

Notes: The volumes are logical volumes or LUNs made up of a group of extents from the extent pool. Extents are allocated contiguously from the first rank in the extent pool and if there is more than one rank, volumes can span across from one rank to the next. If there are not enough extents in the extent pool to satisfy the request, then it fails. The volume group is a set of volumes which are connected to a set of host attachments and form the volume group. This is the way in which the D8000 does LUN masking.

3-36 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Physical Infrastructure Hierarchy Storage Complex One or multiple physical storage subsystems Central management point Storage Unit (Storage facility) Single physical storage subsystem Storage Image (DS8000) Single logical storage subsystem

Storage Enclosure Storage Enclosure Storage Enclosure Storage Enclosure Shark Shark Image 0 CEC 0 Image 1 (LPAR 0) (LPAR 1)

Shark Shark Image 0 CEC 1 Image 1 (LPAR 0) (LPAR 1)

LPAR System Disks I/O Drawer RIO 1

I/O Drawer RIO 1

Storage Enclosure

Storage Enclosure

I/O Drawer RIO 0

I/O Drawer RIO 0

Storage Enclosure

Storage Enclosure

Storage Enclosure

Storage Enclosure

Storage Enclosure

Storage Enclosure

CEC 0

Shark Shark Image 0 CEC 0 Image 1 (LPAR 0) (LPAR 1)

CEC 1

Shark Shark Image 0 CEC 1 Image 1 (LPAR 0) (LPAR 1)

Single LPAR Resources

LPAR System Disks I/O Drawer RIO 1

I/O Drawer RIO 1

I/O Drawer RIO 1

I/O Drawer RIO 1

I/O Drawer RIO 0

I/O Drawer RIO 0

I/O Drawer RIO 0

I/O Drawer RIO 0

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-28. Physical Infrastructure Hierarchy

SS481.0

Notes: These are the high-level hardware terms. The complex is the set of storage units managed by an HMC; the storage image is a logical partition of the storage units.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-37

Student Notebook

Initial Configuration Prerequisites DS6000 Define users Assign Storage Unit Configure Storage Unit Apply Keys DS8000 Apply license keys

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-29. Initial Configuration Prerequisites

SS481.0

Notes: These are operations which must be done prior to defining the arrays and volumes.

3-38 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS CLI User Management Users are members of groups with different authorizations Only members of admin group can manage users Each user can have a password file CLI and SM users are identical CLI users are not S-HMC users

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-30. DS CLI User Management

SS481.0

Notes: The users of the DSCLI and the Storage Manager are defined to the Network Interface and authorized at logon. There are several groups of users with different authority levels.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-39

Student Notebook

DSCLI User Groups Groups define allowed functions No access Default if no other group specified monitor

List and show commands op_copy_services

Monitor plus copy services op_storage

Monitor and copy services plus storage complex, storage facility, storage image, array, rank, extent pools, ioports op_volume

Monitor plus logical volumes, hosts, host ports, logical subsystems and volume groups service (DS6000)

Monitor plus DS6000 service functions admin

User may be in multiple groups Separate groups by commas on mkuser, chuser © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-31. DSCLI User Groups

SS481.0

Notes: These are the user groups. Admin can do everything, monitor can just view things.

3-40 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

New DSCLI Password Rules Initial passwords expire immediately This applies to default userid (admin) as well as userids you create You can log on, but get an authorized message as soon as you try to issue a command

After three failed logon attempts, userid is locked out Showpass and chpass can be used to change defaults for expiration and failed login limits (for all passwords)

Initial password for admin userid is admin Need to change immediately to avoid lockout

Administrator can change a password, but cannot retrieve a password

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-32. New DSCLI Password Rules

SS481.0

Notes: Passwords expire the first time they are used the user must change their password before they can enter any command. The chuser command is used to perform that change. Password expires after three failed attempts. You can modify that with the chpass command. Password must be six characters minimum, five letters and one number which can not be at the beginning or end. The password passw0rd is a good example of what is a valid password.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-41

Student Notebook

3-42 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

3.5 DSCLI Commands

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-43

Student Notebook

Topic: DSCLI Commands DSCLI Introduction and Architecture DSCLI Installation DSCLI Modes Configuration Process using DSCLI DSCLI Commands

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-33. Topic: DSCLI Commands

SS481.0

Notes:

3-44 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DSCLI Command Considerations Case-insensitive Except for nicknames Multiple operations on single command Specify multiple IDs separated by blanks commas for volume group or host connections, keys, user groups Specify range IDs separated by hyphen Multiple ranges Separated by blanks Volume group or host connection ranges separated by commas

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-34. DSCLI Command Considerations

SS481.0

Notes: The commands are case sensitive. Ranges are allowed on many commands.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-45

Student Notebook

DSCLI Flag Parameters dscli command name –flag flag parameter command parameter Not positional Flag parameters required for all commands if not using profile file -hmc1 -hmc2 -user -passwd dscli mkextpool –hmc1 9.82.22.112 –hmc2 9.82.22.112 –user admin -passwd tucs0n -dev IBM.2107-7506571 –rankgrp 1 –stgtype fb … -hmc1, -hmc2, -user and -passwd are flag parameters required for all commands If not entered on command, DSCLI prompts for these Not required if specified in profile file

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-35. DSCLI Flag Parameters

SS481.0

Notes: The parms are entered with a keyword flag and the parm.

3-46 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Command Flag Parameters or Profile File

-fullid fully-qualified ID including storage image ID -hmc1 ip of HMC/SMC (or ESS 800 copy services server) -hmc2 ip of HMC/SMC (or ESS 800 copy services server) -user network interface userid -passwd network interface password for userid (pwfile in profile file) -dev Storage Image ID (devid in profile file) -remotedevfor Copy Services (remotedevid in profile file) -v verbose

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-36. Command Flag Parameters or Profile File

SS481.0

Notes: If you don’t have a profile defined or if it does not specify this DS8000, then you have to supply the parms for many things that are usually handled through the profile.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-47

Student Notebook

DS CLI Command Types Framework command CLI security and information commands Application key and version commands Storage complex configuration commands Storage unit configuration commands Storage image configuration commands Host connection configuration commands Storage configuration commands Copy services commands

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-37. DS CLI Command Types

SS481.0

Notes: These are types of commands. List, show are monitor commands, mk ch and rm are admin commands.

3-48 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

List and Show Considerations To see which volumes are on a rank: Display extent pool associated with a rank lsrank or showrank

Display volumes associated with this extent pool lsckdvol –extpool lsfbvol –extpool showckdvol showfbvol

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-38. List and Show Considerations

SS481.0

Notes: Examples of list and show commands.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-49

Student Notebook

Getting Help with DSCLI Error message and command syntax dscli commandname (or commandname in DSCLI interactive mode) “Man page” with syntax and examples dscli commandname –help (or –h or -?) or dscli help commandname Command with syntax information dscli help –l commandname List of DSCLI commands dscli help (or help in DSCLI interactive mode) Command with brief description dscli help –s commandname Help for DSCLI is also available in DS Storage Manager Info Center

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-39. Getting Help with DSCLI

SS481.0

Notes: This help command can be useful for the new user. Just type the command with no parms to get the syntax help.

3-50 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Object ID Considerations Object IDs are required as command input by DSCLI Some objects have IDs which are assigned depending on number of similar objects created/deleted “Order of creation” Extent pool Array Rank Hostconnection (definition of one Host Bus Adapter) Volume Group (with some IDs reserved) When an object is deleted, that ID is freed up and will be used for the next object created LCUs, volumes and port groups have IDs ‘as specified’

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-40. Object ID Considerations

SS481.0

Notes: The object IDs are used for many of the mk commands.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-51

Student Notebook

Infrastructure IDs Storage Complex Identified by SMC IP address (for example, 9.82.22.112) Storage Unit IBM.1750-13AAVCA Used on showsu command

Storage Enclosure Storage Enclosure Storage Enclosure Storage Enclosure Shark Image 0 (LPAR 0) Shark Image 0 (LPAR 0)

Storage Enclosure Storage Enclosure Storage Enclosure Storage Enclosure

CEC 0

Shark Image 1 (LPAR 1)

Shark Image 0 (LPAR 0)

CEC 0

Shark Image 1 (LPAR 1)

CEC 1

Shark Image 1 (LPAR 1)

Shark Image 0 (LPAR 0)

CEC 1

Shark Image 1 (LPAR 1)

LPAR System Disks

LPAR System Disks

I/O Drawer RIO 1

I/O Drawer RIO 1

I/O Drawer RIO 1

I/O Drawer RIO 1

I/O Drawer RIO 0

I/O Drawer RIO 0

I/O Drawer RIO 0

I/O Drawer RIO 0

Storage Image IBM.1750-13AAVCA (same as Storage Unit above) Used as –dev parameter in many commands Also required without the –dev flag in a few commands Signature a608-c4f3-0052-cd88 (2107 and 1750 have same format)

Storage Enclosure Storage Enclosure Storage Enclosure Storage Enclosure Shark Image 0 (LPAR 0)

CEC 0

Shark Image 1 (LPAR 1)

Shark Image 0 (LPAR 0)

CEC 1

Shark Image 1 (LPAR 1)

LPAR System Disks I/O Drawer RIO 1

I/O Drawer RIO 1

I/O Drawer RIO 0

I/O Drawer RIO 0

Storage Enclosure Storage Enclosure Storage Enclosure Storage Enclosure Shark Image 0 (LPAR 0)

CEC 0

Shark Image 1 (LPAR 1)

Shark Image 0 (LPAR 0)

CEC 1

Shark Image 1 (LPAR 1)

LPAR System Disks I/O Drawer RIO 1

I/O Drawer RIO 1

I/O Drawer RIO 0

I/O Drawer RIO 0

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-41. Infrastructure IDs

SS481.0

Notes: The Storage Unit has an ID which is the machine manufacturer IBM the Model 2107 and the serial 7516546. Serial is XXYYYYY, where XX is Manufacturing location and YYYYY is the serial number.

3-52 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Object IDs (1 of 5) Arraysite S1-Sx Extent Pool P0-Px (In order of creation) Array A0-Axxxx (In order of creation) Rank R0-Rx (In order of creation)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-42. Object IDs (1 of 5)

SS481.0

Notes: The object IDs are used to configure logical configuration components.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-53

Student Notebook

Object IDs (2 of 5) LCU/LSS 00-xy x = Address group DS8000 x = 0-7 DS6000 x = 0-1 2/25 GA y=x’0’-x’f’ LCU is CKD only LSS is FB only Even LSSs/LCUs are available for extent pools associated with Server0 Odd LSSs/LCUs are available for extent pools associated with Server1

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-43. Object IDs (2 of 5)

SS481.0

Notes: This is the LCU or LSS format. The LCU, or Logical Control Unit is a zSeries object used to identify the 3990 control unit and is required for zSeries addressing. The LSS is an object for Open Systems and defines the logical subsystem for the Open System host. LSS has association with the extent pool which ties it to a server of the DS8000.

3-54 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Object IDs (3 of 5) Volumes 0000-xyzz x=address group 0-7 (DS8000) 0-1 (DS6000) 2/25 GA y= x’0’ – x’f’ z=x’00’ – x’ff’ Volume IDs also apply to PAVs

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-44. Object IDs (3 of 5)

SS481.0

Notes: The Volume IDs are LSS and volume address. LSSs are divided into address groups of 0 to F, and LSS of 0 to F, and volumes are numbered from 00 to FF.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-55

Student Notebook

Object IDs (4 of 5) Host connections 0000-xxxx (In order of creation) Portgrp 0-very large (decimal 999,999,999) Volume group V11-Vxx (with the exception of V20 and V30) V0-V9 are reserved for 2/25 release V10, V20, V30 are default volume groups In order of creation

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-45. Object IDs (4 of 5)

SS481.0

Notes: Host connection ports have a 4-digit number to identify the port. Volume groups are from V11-Vxx but V0-V9 are reserved.

3-56 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Object IDs (5 of 5) I/O ports Iwxyz (RICT) w= frame 0-2 (DS8000) 0 (DS6000) x= enclosure 0-3 (DS8000) 0-1 (DS6000) y= card 0,1,3 or 4 (DS8000) 0-1 (DS6000) z= port 0-3 top to bottom (DS8000 FICON/FCP) 0-3 left to right (DS6000 FICON/FCP) 0-1 top to bottom (DS8000 ESCON) I0000-I2343 (DS8000) I0000-I0003 and I0100-I0103 (DS6000)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-46. Object IDs (5 of 5)

SS481.0

Notes: This is the I/O port definitions.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-57

Student Notebook

1750 Host IOPORT Port Numbers from DS CLI A port ID is prefixed with letter I Consists of four hexadecimal characters in the format EEAP: EE is Server number 00 – 01 for 1750

A is the adapter number

I0000

I0001

Port 0

Port 1

Specified as 0, 1, 2, 3 for 1750

I0002 Port 2

I0003 Port 3

Server 0

P is the port number (0 - 3)

I0100

I0101

Port 0

Port 1

I0102 Port 2

I0103 Port 3

Server 1

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-47. 1750 Host IOPORT Port Numbers from DS CLI

SS481.0

Notes: The 1750 has similar port definitions.

3-58 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Sample CLI Configuration Script (1 of 5) ## Description : # This CLI script creates, # 32 CKD volumes on LCU 02 # 32 CKD volumes on LCU 04 # 64 FB volumes on LSS 11 # 64 FB volumes on LSS 13 # 64 FB volumes on LSS 15 # 64 FB volumes on LSS 17 # # Prerequisite : # o CLI version ? # o ESSNIClient 0824 # o Initial Configuration # - The target storage facility image is "IBM.2107-921-9999999" # - No volumes exist # - No LCUs or LSSs exist # - No ranks exist # - No arrays exist # - No extent pools exist # - Array site S1 and S2 are unassigned#

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-48. Sample CLI Configuration Script (1 of 5)

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-59

Student Notebook

Sample CLI Configuration Script (2 of 5) # Created resources : # - 1 CKD extent pool named "ckd_ext_pool0" in rank group 0 : P0 # - 1 FB extent pool named "fb_ext_pool1" in rank group 1 : P1 # - 2 RAID 5 arrays : A0, A1 # - 2 ranks : R0, R1 # - 2 LCU : 02, 04 # - 4 LSS : 11, 13, 15, 17 # - 64 CKD volumes with 1000 cylinders in extent pool P0 :0200-021F, 0400-041F # - 256 FB volumes with 1000 cylinders in extent pool P1 :1100-113F, 1300-133F, 1500-153F, 1700-173F # - 1 SCSI-Map 256 volume group : V11? # - 5 SCSI host ports : # Reference : # - Section 12.0. Use Case Scenarios, "Command-Line User Interface Design for IBM TotalStorage 2107 Enterprise Storage server, Version 4.0"

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-49. Sample CLI Configuration Script (2 of 5)

SS481.0

Notes:

3-60 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Sample CLI Configuration Script (3 of 5) # FB Volumes # Make an FB extent pool (P1 will be created) mkextpool -dev IBM.2107-921-9999999 -rankgrp 1 -stgtype fb fb_ext_pool1 # Make an array (A1 will be created) mkarray -dev IBM.2107-921-9999999 -raidtype 5 S2 # Make a rank (R1 will be created) mkrank -dev IBM.2107-921-9999999 -array A1 -stgtype fb # Wait until the rank status becomes 'Unassigned'. (Issue "lsrank -dev IBM.2107-921-9999999" to get the rank status.) # Assign R1 to P1 chrank -extpool P1 -dev IBM.2107-921-9999999 R1

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-50. Sample CLI Configuration Script (3 of 5)

SS481.0

Notes: Make the extent pools and put the ranks into the pools.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-61

Student Notebook

Sample CLI Configuration Script (4 of 5) # Make 64 FB volumes (1100-113F will be created) mkfbvol -dev IBM.2107-921-9999999 -extpool P1 -cap 2097152 -name fb_vol_#h -qty 64 1100 # Make 64 FB volumes (1300-133F will be created) mkfbvol -dev IBM.2107-921-9999999 -extpool P1 -cap 2097152 -name fb_vol_#h -qty 64 1300 # Make 64 FB volumes (1500-153F will be created) mkfbvol -dev IBM.2107-921-9999999 -extpool P1 -cap 2097152 -name fb_vol_#h -qty 64 1500 # Make 64 FB volumes (1700-173F will be created) mkfbvol -dev IBM.2107-921-9999999 -extpool P1 -cap 2097152 -name fb_vol_#h -qty 64 1700 # Make a SCSI-Map 256 volume group and assign all the volumes to it (V11 is created?) mkvolgrp -dev IBM.2107-921-9999999 -lun256 -vol "1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 110A 110B 110C 110D 110E 110F 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 111A 111B 111C 111D 111E 111F 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 112A 112B 112C 112D 112E 112F 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 113A 113B 113C 113D 113E 113F 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 130A 130B 130C 130D 130E 130F 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 131A 131B 131C 131D 131E 131F 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 132A 132B 132C 132D 132E 132F 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 133A 133B 133C 133D 133E 133F 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 150A 150B 150C 150D 150E 150F 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 151A 151B 151C 151D 151E 151F 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 152A 152B 152C 152D 152E 152F 1530 1531 1532 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 153A 153B 153C 153D 153E 153F 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 170A 170B 170C 170D 170E 170F 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 171A 171B 171C 171D 171E 171F 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 172A 172B 172C 172D 172E 172F 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 173A 173B 173C 173D 173E 173F" fbvgname1

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-51. Sample CLI Configuration Script (4 of 5)

SS481.0

Notes: Make the volumes.

3-62 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Sample CLI Configuration Script (5 of 5) # Configure fibre channel I/O ports # Note: Issue "lsioport -dev IBM.2107-921-9999999" to get the I/O ports to configure. setioport -topology scsi-fcp IBM.2107-921-9999999/I0020 setioport -topology fc-al IBM.2107-921-9999999/I0021 # Make SCSI host ports and assign a volume group to them. # Note-1: These commands assume that V11 was created by mkvolgrp command above. # Note-2: 'prof0' should be replaced by a valid port profile name. mkhostconnect -dev IBM.2107-921-9999999 -lun256 -wwname 10000000C93742A7 -profile prof0 -volgrp V11 fcs0 mkhostconnect -dev IBM.2107-921-9999999 -lun256 -wwname 10000000C93743AA -profile prof0 -volgrp V11 fcs1 mkhostconnect -dev IBM.2107-921-9999999 -lun256 -wwname 10000000C9370261 -profile prof0 -volgrp V11 fcs2 mkhostconnect -dev IBM.2107-921-9999999 -lun256 -wwname 10000000C9374779 -profile prof0 -volgrp V11 fcs3 mkhostconnect -dev IBM.2107-921-9999999 -lun256 -wwname 10000000C93702CA -profile prof0 -volgrp V11 fcs4

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-52. Sample CLI Configuration Script (5 of 5)

SS481.0

Notes: Make the host connections and volume groups.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-63

Student Notebook

Checkpoint Exercise -- Unit 3 Checkpoint 1. T/F The DS8000 is a CLI interface that must be installed on a customer workstation or used from the DS8000 Master Console. 2. T/F The DS8000 CLI can be online or offline. 3. T/F The DS8000 CLI can create configuration files which can be downloaded to the DS8000 subsystem and used to configure the DS8000. 4. T/F The DS8000 CLI supports Copy Services commands to allow users to automate their FlashCopy or Metro Mirror copies. 5. T/F The DS8000 CLI can be used to configure a DS8000 or a DS6000

3-64 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit Summary Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Describe the IBM DS6000/DS8000 Command Line Interface Describe the installation of the DSCLI Describe how to access the DSCLI Describe the dscli.profile and how to use them Describe the userid and password definitions Describe the DSCLI commands and usage

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 3-53. Unit Summary

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 3. DS8000 Command Line Interface Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-65

Student Notebook

3-66 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture What This Unit Is About The DS6000 storage subsystem is the next generation of storage, and provides RAID-5 or RAID-10 storage arrays attached to a scalable state-of-the art processor with variable cache memory and persistent fast-write cache. The user can configure the storage subsystem using a GUI-based interface or a DSCLI interface, and configuration can be handled online or offline, with import and export capabilities for configuration files created in the offline configuration simulator. This unit introduces the DS6000 and its hardware components and architecture. We look at the physical hardware and discuss the installation and cabling of the unit by the customer.

What You Should Be Able to Do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Describe the components of the DS6000 model 1750 and 1750 EX1 • Describe the disk drive packaging that can be installed into DS6000 • Identify the types of host adapters that can be used with the DS6000 • Identify the back-end switched FC-AL interface that are used with the DS6000 • Identify the size of cache and persistent memory that is used with the DS6000 • Identify the redundancy options and failover capabilities used with DS6000

How You Will Check Your Progress Accountability: • Checkpoint

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-1

Student Notebook

References

4-2

SG24-6471

IBM TotalStorage DS6000 Series Architecture and Concepts

SC24-7623

IBM TotalStorage: DS6000 User's Guide

GC26-7679

IBM TotalStorage DS6000 Introduction and Planning Guide

GC27-7678

IBM TotalStorage DS6000 Installation, Troubleshooting and Recovery Guide

GC26-7680

IBM TotalStorage DS6000 Host Attachment Guide

GC26-7681

IBM TotalStorage DS6000 Command Line User's Guide

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you should be able to: Identify the components and features of the IBM TotalStorage DS6000 Storage Server Understand the IBM TotalStorage DS6000 architecture Explain the IBM TotalStorage DS6000 reliability, availability, and serviceability Identify the IBM TotalStorage DS6000 installation process Explain the IBM TotalStorage DS6000 licenses

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-1. Unit Objectives

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-3

Student Notebook

4-4

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

4.1 DS6000 Highlights

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-5

Student Notebook

Topic: DS6000 Highlights DS6000 Highlights DS6000 Architecture DS6000 Reliability, Availability, Serviceability DS6000 Installation

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-2. Topic: DS6000 Highlights

SS481.0

Notes:

4-6

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS6000 Highlights Connects to multiple platforms AIX, Windows, SUN, HP, Linux, SGI, z/OS, zLinux, OS/400, Solaris, and so forth

Built with latest technology Switched FC-AL disk, PowerPC processors Linux kernel, no LPAR capabilities Two PowerPC 750GX 1 GHz symmetric multiprocessors One PowerPC 750FX processor per RAID adapter 2 Gb SW FCP or FICON adapters

2 GB Cache per controller High availability via automatic failover IBM TotalStorage DS Copy Services FlashCopy Metro Mirror - Peer-to-peer remote copy Global Copy - PPRC-XD Global Mirror - Async PPRC

IBM TotalStorage DS Storage Manager IBM TotalStorage TPC Four year warranty © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-3. DS6000 Highlights

SS481.0

Notes: IBM TotalStorage systems are based on a server architecture. At the core of the DS6800 controller unit are two active/active RAID controllers based on IBM’s industry leading PowerPC architecture. By employing a server architecture with standard hardware components, IBM’s storage division can always take advantage of the best of breed components developed by other IBM divisions. The customer gets the benefit of a very cost efficient and high performing storage system. The DS6800 utilizes two 64-bit PowerPC 750GX 1 GHz processors for the storage server and the host adapters, respectively, and another PowerPC 750FX 500 MHz processor for the device adapter on each controller card. The DS6800 is equipped with 2 GB memory in each controller card, adding up to 4 GB. Some part of the memory is used for the operating system and another part in each controller card acts as persistent memory but most of the memory is used as cache. This design to use processor memory makes cache accesses very fast.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-7

Student Notebook

DS6000 Rear View

Upper RAID Controller

Rear Display Panel Power Supply

Power Supply

Lower RAID Controller

Battery backup Units

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-4. DS6000 Rear View

SS481.0

Notes: DS6800 (Model 1750-511) The DS6800 offer the following features: • • • • • •

Two FC controller cards Linux Kernel OS PowerPC 750GX 1 GHz processor v 4 GB of cache Two battery backup units (one per each controller card) Two AC/DC power supplies with imbedded enclosure cooling units Eight 2 Gb/sec. device ports

Connectivity with the availability of two to eight fibre channel/FICON host ports. The host ports auto-negotiate to either 2 Gbps or 1 Gbps link speeds. The two in ports on the left are the switch ports that connect either to the server enclosure (to either the disk exp loop or the disk control loop) or to the out ports of a previous expansion enclosure.

4-8

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

The two out ports on the right (in light blue boxes) are the switch ports that attach to the in ports of the next expansion enclosure. If there are no extra expansion enclosures then they are not used.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-9

Student Notebook

DS6000 Model EX1 Hardware Structure

Model EX1 – Expansion Enclosure Four 16 FC-AL DDMs Expansion Enclosures First expansion enclosure has eight SFPs shipped standard with it (four for control unit and four for expansion enclosure) Expansion enclosure has eight SFPs shipped standard with it (four for current expansion unit and four for new expansion unit) Shortwave connectivity Expansion enclosure ships with eight SFPs

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-5. DS6000 Model EX1 Hardware Structure

SS481.0

Notes: The Model EX1 contains four 16 DDMs and connects to the 1750-511 using SFPs and FC cables. The expansion unit has eight SFPs shipped standard with it, four SFPs for the control unit and four for the expansion enclosure. The two controllers provide two FC-AL loops, and the first disk enclosure is in the 1750-511 itself and is located on Loop 0. The first Expansion unit connects to the control unit on Loop 1 and the third also on Loop 1, and then alternates between Loop 0 and Loop 1. The ports to connect Loop 0 are expansion enclosure ports and just extend the FC-AL loop, because there is already an internal enclosure on Loop 0. The expansion enclosures are also shipped with eight SFPs and has an internal FC switch to implement the switched FC-AL attachment the same as the DS8000. Four SFPs are inputs from the controller or a previous EX1, and the other four SFPs are four out ports to the next EX1. You can connect six EX1 SBOD units to Loop 0, and seven EX1s to Loop 1 for a total of 14 enclosures of 16 DDMs or 224 DDMs. This gives the user a maximum of 67.2 TB of storage with 300 GB DDMs.

4-10 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Disk Enclosure Rear View

4 x 2Gb/s ports

Two expansion controller cards including: One FC switch / controller 4x2 Gb/s ports/controller Up to 16 DDMs

Server enclosure or previous expansion enclosure

4 x 2Gb/s ports

IN

OUT

Next expansion enclosure

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-6. Disk Enclosure Rear View

SS481.0

Notes: DS6000 expansion enclosure (Model 1750-EX1) The DS6000 expansion enclosure contains the following features: • Two expansion controller cards. • Each controller card provides the following: - Two 2 Gb/sec. inbound ports - Two 2 Gb/sec. outbound ports • One FC switch per controller card • Controller disk enclosure that holds up to 16 FC DDMs or dummy carriers. • Two AC/DC power supplies with imbedded enclosure cooling units • Supports attachment to DS6800 Model 1750-511

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-11

Student Notebook

The DS6000 expansion enclosure is a 3 EIA self-contained unit that can be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The front of the enclosure contains the docking sites where you can install up to 16 DDMs.

4-12 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS6800 - Model 1750-EX1 to 16 DDMs Dummycarriers carriers 4 to4 16 DDMs ororDummy 1 Front One FrontDisplay Displaypanel panel Same 511 EX1 Same forfor 511 ororEX1 Front View

2 RAID controllers + expansion ports

EX1

Two RAID controllers + expansion 2 Power Supplies ports Two Power supplies

EX1

Two RAID controllers + expansion 2 Power Supplies ports Two Power supplies

511

2 RAID controllers + Host ports 1 ethernet + Two RAIDport controllers + Host ports 4 device expansion ports One Ethernet port + 2 Power Supplies

2 RAID controllers + expansion ports

Rear Views

Four Device expansion ports Two Power supplies © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-7. DS6800 – Model 1750-EX1

SS481.0

Notes: The DS6000s all look the same from the front, however from the back the 1750-511 has the controller cards where the EX1 just have the SBOD cards. Each EX1 or 511 have two power supplies and require two power cords. Also Ethernet connections to the 511 are required for access by the SMC.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-13

Student Notebook

Disk Capacities Model 1750-511 (16 DDMs) 1750-511+ 6 EX1 (112 DDMs)

1750-511 + 13 EX1 (224 DDMs)

With 73 GB DDMs 1.17 TB

with 146 GB DDMs 2.34 TB

with 300 GB DDMs 4.80 TB

8.18 TB

16.35 TB

33.60 TB

16.35 TB

32.70 TB

67.20 TB

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-8. Disk Capacities

SS481.0

Notes: The capacities of the storage on the DS6000 are shown above. Storage capacity from 1.17 TB up to 67.2 TB is possible.

4-14 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

4.2 DS6000 Architecture

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-15

Student Notebook

Topic: DS6000 Architecture DS6000 Highlights DS6000 Architecture DS6000 Reliability, Availability, Serviceability DS6000 Installation

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-9. Topic: DS6000 Architecture

SS481.0

Notes:

4-16 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS6000 8 2Gbit FCP/FICON Ports 8 2Gb FC-AL Ports 4 GB Cache Attaches up to 224 disks 13 expansion drawers

QDR

Fibre Channel Protocol Engine

Fibre Channel Protocol Engine

QDR

QDR

Fibre Channel Protocol Engine

Fibre Channel Protocol Engine

PPC

PPC

750GX PPC 750GX

SDRAM

Data Protection Data Mover ASIC

Comp Flash

Enet

Hint Bridge

PPC 750FX

Bridge

750GX

SDRAM

Data Protection Data Mover ASIC Flash

NVRAM

QDR

RAID Data Protection Data Mover ASIC

Buffer

Enet

Comp Flash

PPC 750GX

Flash

Hint Bridge

PPC 750FX Buffer

RAID Data Protection Data Mover ASIC

SDRAM

Bridge

NVRAM

SDRAM

Fibre Channel Protocol Engine

Fibre Channel Protocol Engine

Fibre Channel Protocol Engine

Switch

Fibre Channel Protocol Engine

Switch

SES

SES

Midplane

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-10. DS6000

SS481.0

Notes: When a host performs a read I/O, the controllers fetch the data from the disk arrays via the high-performance switched disk architecture. The data is then cached in volatile memory in case it is required again. Part of the cache is reserved for use as persistent memory and is used to store write data from the alternate controller and is backed by batteries in case of power failure or controller failover. Persistent memory takes the place of NVS card used in the ESS-800. The controllers attempt to anticipate future reads by the SARC caching algorithm (sequential prefetching in adaptive replacement cache). Data is held in cache as long as possible using this smart algorithm. If a cache hit occurs where requested data is already in cache, then the host does not have to wait for it to be read from the disks. The DS6800 has 4 GB of cache memory.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-17

Student Notebook

DS6800 with One Expansion Enclosure 2 Gbps Fibre Channel ports

2 Gbps Fibre Channel ports

Host adapter chipset

Power PC chipset

Controller Card 1

Controller Card 0

Server 0

Host adapter

Server 1

Processor memory

Interconnect

Processor memory

Volatile

Volatile

Persistent

Persistent

Power PC chipset Device adapter

Device adapter chipset

chipset

chipset

2 Gbps Fibre Channel ports

2 Gbps Fibre Channel ports

Fibre Channel switch To next switch

Four 2Gb/sec ports to switched FC attached devices Base Enclosure with 4 -16 DDMs 0-13 Expansion Enclosures with 4-16 DDMs

2 x 1 - 4 2Gb HA ports

ooo

16 DDM

Fibre Channel switch

2 FC Controller Cards (DAs)

Server enclosure

LW / SW 1 or 2 Gb/sec auto-negotiate

Fibre Channel switch ooo

16 DDM

Fibre Channel switch

Expansion enclosure

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-11. DS6800 with One Expansion Enclosure

SS481.0

Notes: The DS6800 controller is only half the DS68000 frame. On the other side of the mid-plane are a FC Switched disk enclosure and 16 DDMs. These are internally attached to the controllers on FC-AL Loop 0 and cross-connected to each controller for redundancy and failover capabilities. Additional disk enclosures can be attached to either Loop 0 or Loop 1 via the device adapter ports on the controllers. Up to six disk enclosure EX1 expansion frames can be added to Loop 0 and seven disk enclosure EX1 expansion frames can be attached to Loop 1.

4-18 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS6000 Code

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-12. DS6000 Code

SS481.0

Notes: The code used to implement the DS6000 is similar in many ways to the DS8000. The major differences are that no LPAR function is implemented and the operating system is an imbedded Linux instead of AIX for the DS8000. The DS6000 Storage Manager GUI uses the ICAT Standard and although similar does have additional functions for customer maintenance. Although similar in look and feel it is a different product from the DS8000 Storage manager and the two product cannot be installed together on one workstation. Also, for Windows XP, Service pack 2 is required for the DS6000 Storage manager and only SP1 is required for the DS8000 Storage Manager. It may be easier to place the DS6000 Storage Manager on a Windows 2000 workstation with SP4 installed. The DSCLI code is also similar but a different package, and although the DSCLI for the DS8000 works for most of the configuration commands, it lacks some specialized DS6000 commands.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-19

Student Notebook

Sequential Prefetching in Adaptive Replacement Cache (SARC) SARC basically attempts to determine four things: When data is copied into the cache. Which data is copied into the cache. Which data is evicted when the cache becomes full. How does the algorithm dynamically adapt to different workloads SARC uses: Demand paging for all standard disk I/O Sequential pre-fetch for sequential I/O patterns

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-13. Sequential Prefetching in Adaptive Replacement Cache (SARC)

SS481.0

Notes: DS8000/DS6000 Caching Considerations The self-tuning, low-overhead, scan-resistant adaptive replacement cache algorithm outperforms the least recently used algorithm by dynamically responding to changing access patterns and continually balancing between workload currency and frequency features. The adaptive replacement cache is a self-tuning, low-overhead algorithm that responds online to changing access patterns. ARC continually balances between the currency and frequency features of the workload, demonstrating that adaptation eliminates the need for the workload-specific pretuning that plagued many previous proposals to improve LRU. ARC’s online adaptation likely has benefits for real-life workloads due to their richness and variability with time. These workloads can contain long sequential I/Os or moving hot spots, changing frequency and scale of temporal locality and fluctuating between stable, repeating access patterns and patterns with transient clustered references.

4-20 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Like LRU, ARC is easy to implement, and its running time per request is essentially independent of the cache size. A real-life implementation revealed that ARC has a low space overhead—0.75 percent of the cache size. Also, unlike LRU, ARC is scan resistant in that it allows one-time sequential requests to pass through without polluting the cache or flushing pages that have temporal locality. Likewise, ARC also effectively handles long periods of low temporal locality. ARC leads to substantial performance gains in terms of an improved hit ratio compared with LRU for a wide range of cache sizes. ARC replacement policy functions online and is completely self-tuning. Because ARC maintains no frequency counts, unlike LFU and FBR, it does not suffer from periodic rescaling requirements. Also, unlike LIRS, ARC does not require potentially unbounded space overhead. Finally, ARC, 2Q, LIRS, and FBR have constant-time implementation complexity while LFU, LRU-2, and LRFU have logarithmic implementation complexity.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-21

Student Notebook

Disk Enclosure

Dual ported drives 4 Paths to each drive Uses switched FC-AL protocol to access to DDMs Direct point-to-point connection from DA to each DDM Improved RAS and error detection Easy problem determination Easier expansion capabilities Base Enclosure with 4 -16 DDMs 0-13 Expansion Enclosures with 4-16 DDMs

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-14. Disk Enclosure

SS481.0

Notes: In the DS6000, the switch chipset is completely integrated into the controllers. Each controller contains one switch. Note, however, that the switch chipset itself is completely separate from the controller chipset. In the picture above each DDM is depicted as being attached to two separate Fibre Channel switches. This means that with two RAID controllers, we have four effective data paths to each disk, each path operating at 2 Gb/sec. When a connection is made between the device adapter and a disk, the connection is a switched connection that uses arbitrated loop protocol. This means that a mini-loop is created between the device adapter and the disk.

4-22 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Four Data Paths to Every Disk Multiple Storage Ports Connections RAID Controller Card has connections to each Fibre Channel switch Fibre Channel Switches FC Switch 1 Connects RAID Controller 1 and 2 to Disk Port 1 FC switch 2 Connects RAID Controller 1 and 2 to Disk Port 2 Protects against single or multiple failures Cable RAID Controller Card Fibre Channel switch Port Or, combination of failures Use alternate path

RAID Controller Card 1

Path 3

Fibre Channel Switch 1 Path 1

RAID Controller Card 2

Path 2

Fibre Channel Switch 2 Path 4

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-15. Four Data Paths To Every Disk

SS481.0

Notes: The main problems with standard FC-AL access to DDMs are: • The full loop is required to participate in data transfer. Full discovery of the loop via LIP (loop initialization protocol) is required before any data transfer. Loop stability can be affected by DDM failures. • In the event of a disk failure, it can be difficult to identify the cause of a loop breakage, leading to complex problem determination. • There is a performance drop off when the number of devices in the loop increases. To expand the loop it is normally necessary to partially open it. If mistakes are made, a complete loop outage can result.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-23

Student Notebook

Components Architecture (1 of 2)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-16. Components Architecture (1 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: When a host performs a read I/O, the controllers fetch the data from the disk arrays via the high-performance switched disk architecture. The data is then cached in volatile memory in case it is required again. The controllers attempt to anticipate future reads by an algorithm known as SARC (sequential prefetching in adaptive replacement cache). Data is held in cache as long as possible using this smart algorithm. If a cache hit occurs where requested data is already in cache, then the host does not have to wait for it to be read from the disks.

4-24 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Components Architecture (2 of 2)

1

FC switch

16

1

Up to 16 DDMs per enclosure

RAID controller DISK EXP ports

FC switch

FC switch

Server enclosure

16

FC switch

Second expansion enclosure

Loop 0 Seven enclosures maximum per loop

OUT ports to next enclosure

Internal connections through midplane

Controller 1

Controller 0

16

1

16

FC switch

1

Raid controller DISK CONTROL ports Cables between enclosures

FC switch

Third expansion enclosure

FC switch

First expansion enclosure

FC switch

16+2+2 switch

Loop 1 Seven enclosures maximum per loop

Uempty

Fibre channel switches

OUT ports to next enclosure © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-17. Components Architecture (2 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: The DS6000 has an internal disk enclosure, so the internal connection to the two controllers has already been made. When attaching new disk enclosures to Loop 0 shown above on the top of the diagram, you just need to directly connect out to in ports to the second enclosure on loop 0. On Loop 1, however, see the bottom of the chart. The initial connection must be cross-connected to the two controllers for redundancy and pathing.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-25

Student Notebook

DS6000 Host and Device Adapter Ports Controller 0 LOOP 0

LOOP 1

host ports

expansion ports

Controller 1

host ports

expansion ports Ethernet ports Power and Fault indicators

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-18. DS6000 Host and Device Adapter Ports

SS481.0

Notes: The DS6800 controller card is pictured above. On the left-hand side, surrounded by light and dark blue boxes (for readers seeing this in black and white, they appear to be light and dark grey), are the disk expansion and disk control ports respectively. These ports are used to attach up to a total of 13 expansion enclosures to the server enclosure.

4-26 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS6000 Device Adapter Ports for Disk Enclosure EX1

Server enclosure or previous expansion enclosure

IN

OUT

Next expansion enclosure

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-19. DS6000 Device Adapter Ports for Disk Enclosure EX1

SS481.0

Notes: Above, the server enclosure has two expansion enclosures attached to the disk expansion loop (loop 0). The server enclosure itself is the first enclosure on loop 0. The upper controller in the server enclosure is cabled to the upper SBOD card in the expansion enclosure. The lower controller is cabled to the lower SBOD card. In each case cables run from the disk expansion ports to the in ports of the SBOD card. A second expansion enclosure has been added by running cables from the out ports on the first expansion enclosure to the in ports on the second expansion enclosure. At the bottom of the diagram, dotted lines indicate the potential cabling to add more expansion enclosures to that loop.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-27

Student Notebook

16

1

16

1

Cables between enclosures

Up to 16 DDMs per enclosure

FC switch

1

Raid controller disk exp ports

FC switch

16

FC switch FC switch

Loop 0

Second expansion enclosure

FC switch

Fourth expansion enclosure

FC switch

DS6000 Switched Disk Expansion (13 Max)

Server enclosure

FC switch

Fifth expansion enclosure

16

1

16

1

16

FC switch

1

FC switch

FC switch FC switch

Third expansion enclosure

Loop 1

First expansion enclosure

FC switch

Controller 1

Controller 0

Raid controller disk control ports EXP 1 73 GB, 15k rpm DDMs EXP 3 145 GB, 10k rpm DDMs

You can configure an intermix configuration in a DS6800

EXP 5 300 GB, 10k rpm DDMs

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-20. DS6000 Switched Disk Expansion (13 Max)

SS481.0

Notes: For a more detailed look at how the switched disk architecture expands in the DS6000, refer to the figure above. It depicts how the DS6000 is divided into two disk loops. The server enclosure (which contains the first 16 DDMs) is on loop 0. The first expansion enclosure is placed on loop 1. This allows for the best performance since we are now using all four ports on the device adapter chipset. Expansion is achieved by adding expansion enclosures onto each loop, until each loop has seven enclosures (for a total of 224 DDMs). The server enclosure is the first enclosure on loop 0, which is why we can only add a total of 13 expansion enclosures.

4-28 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS6000 RAID Array Supported Configurations Controller A or B – Loop0 RAID5 using four DDMs Arrays Array Site1 (drives 1-4) 2+P+S Array Site2 (drives 5-8) 2+P+S Array Site3 (drives 9-12) 3+P Array Site4 (drives 13-16) 3+P All other Loop0 Array Sites are 3+P for the same drive size and speed. If the drive size or speed changes the DS6000 creates two spares for the new drives. RAID5 using eight DDMs Arrays Array Site1 + Array Site2 (drives 1-8) 6+P+S Array Site3 + Array Site4 (drives 9-16) 6+P+S All other Loop0 Array Sites are 7+P for the same drive size and speed. If the drive size or speed changes the DS6000 creates two spares for the new drives. RAID10 using four DDMs Arrays Array Site1 (drives 1-4) 1+1+2S - Still treated by DS6000 as RAID10 All other Loop0 Array Sites are 2+2 for the same drive size and speed. If the drive size or speed changes the DS6000 creates two spares for the new drives. RAID10 using eight DDMs Arrays Array Site1 (drives 1-8) 3+3+2S All other Loop0 Array Sites are 4+2 for the same drive size and speed. If the drive size or4 speed changes the DS6000 creates two spares for the new drives. Controller A or B – Loop1 Same rules as Loop 0 above © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-21. DS6000 RAID Array Supported Configurations

SS481.0

Notes: RAID-5 Implementation in the DS6000 In a DS6000, the array site is a group of four disks instead of eight disks as in the DS8000. A RAID-5 array built on one array site contains either three disks or four disks, depending on whether the array site chosen had a pre-allocated spare. A three-disk array effectively uses one disk for parity, so it is referred to as a 2+P array (where the P stands for parity). The reason only three disks are available to a 2+P array is that the fourth disk in the array site used to build the array, was used as a spare. This can be referred to as a 2+P+S array site (where the S stands for spare). A four-disk array also effectively uses one disk for parity, so it is referred to as a 3+P array. In a DS6000, a RAID-5 array built on two array sites contains either seven disks or eight disks, again depending on whether the array sites chosen had pre-allocated spares. A seven-disk array effectively uses one disk for parity, so it is referred to as a 6+P array (where the P stands for parity). The reason only seven-disks are available to a 6+P array is that the eighth disk in the two array sites used to build an array was already a spare. This is referred to as a 6+P+S array site (where the S stands for spare). An eight-disk array also effectively uses one disk for parity, so it is referred to as a 7+P array. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-29

Student Notebook

Preferred Path - What Is It? Storage Management Attributes of System Affinity of Logical Storage Management Data Storage primarily managed by owning Cluster Node Host IO requests are managed by the owning cluster node

System Hardware Architecture Host Adapter is tightly integrated with Cluster Node Server Function Processor Host Adapter Function Processor Cache Memory

Host IO Requests To Owning Cluster Node Managed Locally The Preferred Path

To Non Owning Cluster Node Require Traversal of Internal Fabric (PCI-X Bus)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-22. Preferred Path – What Is It?

SS481.0

Notes: Unlike the DS8000 or the ESS 800, the DS6800 uses the concept of preferred path, since the host adapters are integrated into the controller hardware rather than in separate I/O bays. What this means is that the attached host systems must be aware that it is preferential to direct I/O to a particular controller. If an I/O request for a particular LUN is delivered to a host adapter located in the non-owning controller, that controller uses an internal data bus to route the request to the owning controller. This reroute of the I/O request has a performance cost, but does not affect the reliability or availability of the DS6800.

4-30 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS6800 LSS Dual Pathed Host (Recommended)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-23. DS6800 LSS Dual Pathed Host (Recommended)

SS481.0

Notes: For best reliability and performance, it is recommended that each attached host has two connections, one to each controller as depicted in the figure above. This allows it to maintain connection to the DS6800 through both controller failure and HBA or HA (host adapter) failure.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-31

Student Notebook

DS6800 LSS Single Pathed Host

Single pathed host HBA

HP

HP

HP

HP

Controller 0 DA

HP

Even LSS Logical Volumes

Odd LSS Logical Volumes

HP

HP

HP

Controller 1 DA

Inter controller data path

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-24. DS6800 LSS Single Pathed Host

SS481.0

Notes: If a host were to only have a single path to a DS6800, as depicted above, then it would still be able to access volumes belonging to all LSSs, but I/O for odd LSS volumes would use the internal data path between the controllers. However, if controller 0 were to have a hardware failure, then all connectivity would be lost. Within the figure itself, an HP is a host port (a fibre port located in the DS6800 controller card), a DA is two device adapter ports (also located on the DS6800 controller card), and an HBA is a host bus adapter (a Fibre Channel card located in the attached host).

4-32 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

4.3 DS6000 Reliability, Availability Serviceability

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-33

Student Notebook

Topic: DS6000 Reliability, Availability, Serviceability DS6000 Highlights DS6000 Architecture DS6000 Reliability, Availability, Serviceability DS6000 Installation

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-25. Topic: DS6000 Reliability, Availability, Serviceability

SS481.0

Notes:

4-34 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

High Availability and Scalability Redundant and hot-swappable components Non-disruptive upgrades and configuration changes Switch fabric in disk expansion units Four data paths to each drive Preferred path I/O End to end data checking Predictive failure analysis for HDDs Designed for dynamic configuration changes Add disk drives Add storage expansion units Scale capacity to over 67 TBs Note: At GA the minimum configuration is eight HDDs and upgrades can be ordered in eight drive increments. Four HDD minimum configuration and increments are targeted to be available in 1Q05.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-26. High Availability and Scalability

SS481.0

Notes: Every four or eight drives form a RAID array and you can choose between RAID-5 and RAID-10. The configuration process enforces that at least two spare drives are defined on each loop. In case of a disk drive failure or even when the DS6000’s predictive failure analysis comes to the conclusion that a disk drive might fail soon, the data of the failing disk is reconstructed on the spare disk. More spare drives might be assigned if you have drives of mixed capacity and speed. The mix of different capacities and speeds is not available at general availability, but at a later time. There are four paths to each disk drive. Using Predictive Failure Analysis, the DS6000 can identify a failing drive and replace it with a spare drive without customer interaction. Spare drives The configuration process when forming RAID-5 or RAID-10 arrays requires that two global spares are defined in the DS6800 controller enclosure. If you have expansion enclosures, the first enclosure has another two global spares. More spares could be assigned when drive groups with larger capacity drives are added.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-35

Student Notebook

Predictive Failure Analysis The DS6800 uses the well-known (xSeries and ESS) Predictive Failure Analysis (PFA) to monitor the operations of its drives. PFA takes preemptive and automatic actions before critical drive failures occur. This functionality is based on a policy-based disk responsiveness threshold and takes the disk drive offline. The content of the failing drive is reconstructed from data and parity information of the other RAID array drives on the global spare disk drive. While doing so, service alerts are invoked, the failed disk is identified with Light Path indicators and an alert message pop-up occurs on the management server. The first and the third array sites created on each loop, each contribute one DDM to be a spare. So at least two spares are created per loop, which serve up to seven enclosures, depending on the disk intermix. Spare creation There are four array sites in each enclosure of the DS6000. The first and third array sites created on each loop are used to supply spares. This normally means that two spares are created in the server enclosure and two spares in the first expansion enclosure. Spares are created as the array sites are created, which occurs when the DDMs are installed. After four spares have been created for the entire storage unit, no more spares are normally needed. Where DDMs with different sizes, but the same RPM, exist in the complex, the spares are taken from the array sites with the larger sized DDMs. This means in most cases the DS6000 continues to have only four spares for the entire complex regardless of DDM size intermix. Disk scrubbing The DS6000 periodically reads all sectors on a disk. This is designed to occur without any interference to application performance. If ECC-correctable bad bits are identified, the bits are corrected immediately by the DS6000. This reduces the possibility of multiple bad bits accumulating in a sector beyond the ability of ECC to correct them. If a sector contains data that is beyond ECC's ability to correct, then RAID is used to regenerate the data and write a new copy onto a spare sector on the disk. The scrubbing process applies to both array members and spare DDMs.

4-36 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Server Failover and Failback

Failover

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-27. Server Failover and Failback

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-37

Student Notebook

NVS Recovery After Complete Power Loss DS6000

DS8000 Batteries Backup Units (BBUs) Both power supplies stopped Batteries not used to keep disks spinning Scenario at power off All HA I/O blocked Each server fcopies NVS data to internal disk Two copies per server When copy process complete, each server shuts down AIX When AIX shutdown completes for both servers (or time out expires), the DS8000 is powered down Scenario at power on Processor complexes power-on and perform power on self test Each server boots up During Boot, server detects NVS data on its disks and destage it to FC-AL disks When battery units reach a certain level of charge, the servers come online.

Batteries Backup Units (BBUs) Preserves contents of controller memory for at least 72 hours Designed to be replaced every four years Both power supplies stopped Batteries not used to keep disks spinning Preserve all data in memory while input power is not available When power becomes available again DS6800 controllers boot up But leave the NVS portion of controller memory untouched During init process, NVS data area examined If any undestaged write data is found, it is destaged to disk prior to the controller coming online NVS contents preserved 72 hours (like ESS)

NVS contents preserved indefinitely

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-28. NVS Recovery After Complete Power Loss

SS481.0

Notes: The DS6000 is equipped with two BBUs and two power supplies. This provides redundancy in case of either an external power failure or an internal power subsystem failure. The DS6000 is able to control the state of the power supplies in the expansion enclosures via in-band commands sent through the device adapter Fibre Channel connections. In the event of a BBU failure, the RAID controller that relies on that BBU for data protection will remove itself from service and go offline until its BBU is fully charged. If both BBUs were to fail, then the entire system would have to go offline until the problem is corrected. This possibility is highly unlikely. All power components are hot pluggable and can usually be replaced without employing the DS Storage Manager GUI.

4-38 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Major Components - BBUs

Battery BackUp Units (BBUs) – Battery Units provide power in event of loss of AC Power Affinity to specific RAID Controller Card Capacity Designed to Holdup All Memory on Each RAID Controller Card 72-Hour Backup Window

Guaranteed during 4th year of operation New Design Architecture similar to ESS model 800 NVS battery units © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-29. Major Components – BBUs

SS481.0

Notes: The BBUs provides battery backup for the cache-persistent memory for 72 hours in case of power failure.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-39

Student Notebook

Serviceability Intuitive status indicators on front and rear panels Light Path Diagnostics Call home Remote management Customer replaceable components Manage multiple IBM TotalStorage products through IBM TotalStorage Productivity Center (TPC)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-30. Serviceability

SS481.0

Notes: The DS6000 uses a light path guidance strategy that allows the user in many cases to both detect and repair a failure without using a GUI. However, if desired, guided maintenance in the form of a GUI with animation is also available. This is done by using the DS Storage Manager GUI. Most parts can be replaced without this GUI, though this may not always be the case depending on what parts have failed and the failure mode of those parts.

4-40 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS6000 Diagnostics

Front View IBM

Rear Display Panel RAID Controller Battery RAID Controller Service Card Power Supply and Cooling

Front Display Panel

Rear View

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-31. DS6000 Diagnostics

SS481.0

Notes: Within all IBM machines, spare parts are divided into two categories: CRU parts (customer replaceable units) and FRU parts (field replaceable units). If a part is designated a CRU, this implies that it can be safely and easily replaced by an end user with few or no tools. If a part is designated a FRU, then this implies that the spare part needs to be replaced by an IBM Service Representative. Within CRU parts, there are currently two tiers: Tier 1 CRUs are relatively easy to replace, while Tier 2 CRUs are generally more expensive parts or parts that require more skill to replace. Tier 1 CRU parts: • • • • • • •

Battery backup units Cables - Ethernet, serial, fibre optic, and power Disk drive modules Operator panels - front and rear display Power supplies RAID controller and SBOD controller cards SFPs (2 Gbps small form factor pluggable fibre optic

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-41

Student Notebook

Light Path Diagnostics in MR 1750 Front Display Panel

Front Display Panel Rear Display Panel

System Power

Primary and Secondary Indicators

System Identity

Condition indicators and CRU location

System Alert

Identify Blue Light - Identify all elements, enclosures group together to form in one system Blue Beacon – Summary rack-level identification System Alert

System Attention

Data in Cache on Battery Fault on Rear

System Attention Consistent with xSeries light path

Fault in External Enclosure

Many CRUs can be replaced using light path only (no GUI)

Rear Display Panel

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-32. Light Path Diagnostics In MR 1750

SS481.0

Notes: An example of the use of the light path guided repair is a disk failure. The user sees that the System Alert Indicator is on, and that a DDM fault indicator is also lit. They refer to the Service Card shipped with the DS6000 (refer to location of Service Card on previous slide), and using the simple replacement instructions detailed there, they remove and replace the failed DDM with a new one. After replacing the DDM, the System Alert Indicator is turned off automatically.

4-42 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS6000 Rear Panel

System Information (amber): Normally off. If it is on solid, then an error has occurred that cannot be fixed by light path diagnostics. To turn this light off you need to use the GUI to correct the error condition. This may be as little as to just view the error log. Lightpath IDENTIFY Switch (blue): The lower of the two blue buttons, you push this button to activate the system identify indicator. Lightpath REMIND Switch (blue): The upper of the two blue buttons; you push this button to reactivate the light path remind. This allows you to identify a failed component that requires replacement. Rack identify connector: Allow a user to attach the enclosure to eServer rack identifier hardware. This allows you to identify in which rack a particular DS6000 storage or expansion enclosure is located. CRU Fault on Rear/Front (amber): Normally off. If it is on solid then a fault has occurred within a CRU in the rear /front of the enclosure and can be repaired using the light path indicators. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-33. DS6000 Rear Panel

SS481.0

Notes: System Information (amber): Normally off. If it is on solid, then an error has occurred that cannot be fixed by light path diagnostics. To turn this light off you need to use the GUI to correct the error condition. This may be as little as to just view the error log. Lightpath IDENTIFY Switch (blue): The lower of the two blue buttons you push this button to activate the system identify indicator Lightpath REMIND Switch (blue): The upper of the two blue buttons; you push this button to re-activate the light path remind. This allows you to identify a failed component that requires replacement. Rack identify connector: Allow a user to attach the enclosure to SServer rack identifier hardware. This allows you to identify in which rack a particular DS6000 storage or expansion enclosure is located. CRU Fault on Rear/Front (amber): Normally off. If it is on solid then a fault has occurred within a CRU in the rear /front of the enclosure and can be repaired using the light path indicators. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-43

Student Notebook

Rear Panel Indicators Enclosure panel RAID controller card Expansion Port Activity / Service Fault

Power Status

Device Port Activity / Service Fault

Service Fault

Host Port Activity / Service Fault

Ethernet Port Status / Activity

Server Enclosure – Rear

Light Path Diagnostics for a disk: System Alert Indicator and DDM Fault indicator © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-34. Rear Panel Indicators

SS481.0

Notes: The DS6000 controller cards have fault and power indicators to alert the user to a fault in the controller or a power problem or Ethernet connectivity.

4-44 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS6000 Maintenance and Support: Call Home and Remote Support Call home Enables IBM to have accurate system configuration information

DS6000

Mail Server

Weekly heartbeat Configuration data stored for support assistance (State save, PE Package)

DS6000 Management Server Firewall

Internet

Remote support Immediate problem notification to IBM Interactive problem assistance Parts ordering Software updates

Firewall

Mail Server

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-35. DS6000 Maintenance and Support: Call Home and Remote Support

SS481.0

Notes: Remote support Problem notification: • Light Path Diagnostics and Controls, or Alert Message on the Management Server • Message sent to IBM technical support IBM can: • Contact customer to provide assistance • Remotely access management server - If customer allows access through firewall, customer initiates remote support from Management GUI Assistance is provided by: • Service technicians provide the resolution procedures for customer execution • Service personnel remotely login to the customer’s management server - Interacts with the storage system through the management GUI and takes appropriate actions to resolve system issue © Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-45

Student Notebook

Logs: Real-time

Severity All Attention Event Heartbeat Problem Test

Status All Open Closed

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-36. Logs: Realtime

SS481.0

Notes: The DS6000 Storage Manager provides access using the GUI and users can view several logs for alerts, audit trails, events and user access.

4-46 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Log Display: Example

Select Action View Details Close Create test

Table Actions Show Filter Row Clear all filters Edit sort Clears all sorts

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-37. Log Display: Example

SS481.0

Notes: The Logs on the DS6000 can be view from the DS6000 Storage Manager. From the System Information Panel various logs can be selected and viewed.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-47

Student Notebook

4-48 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

4.4 DS6000 Installation

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-49

Student Notebook

Topic: DS6000 Installation DS6000 Highlights DS6000 Architecture DS6000 Reliability, Availability, Serviceability DS6000 Installation

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-38. Topic: DS6000 Installation

SS481.0

Notes:

4-50 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS6000 Installability Designed for customer install Simplified GUI Remote configuration Easy installation wizards

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-39. DS6000 Installability

SS481.0

Notes: The successful installation of a DS6000 requires careful planning. The main considerations when planning for the physical installation of a new DS6000 are the following: • • • • • • • •

Floor loading Floor space Electrical power Operating environment Cooling Management console Host attachment and cabling Network and SAN considerations

Always refer to the most recent information for physical planning in the IBM TotalStorage DS6000 Introduction and Planning Guide, GC26-7679.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-51

Student Notebook

Installation Planning

Administrator accessing DS Storage Manager

DS Storage Manager software on user provided DS management console

IP-3

User provided Ethernet switch Internet call home

Intranet

IP-1 (server0)

IP-2 (server1)

DS6800

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-40. Installation Planning

SS481.0

Notes: To install a DS6000 in your environment you have to plan for the Ethernet infrastructure that the DS6000 has to be connected to. You have to provide some TCP/IP addresses and you need an Ethernet switch or some free ports on a existing switch. This following settings are required connect the DS6000 series to a network: • Controller card IP address • You must provide a dotted decimal address that you assign to each storage server controller card in the DS6800. Since there are two controllers, you need two TCP/IP addresses. • DS Storage Manager IP address • You need another TCP/IP address for the computer where you run the DS Storage Manager. • Gateway

4-52 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

• Provide the dotted decimal or symbolic name address of the gateway (for example, 9.123.123.123 or sanjosegate). • Subnet mask • Provide the dotted decimal address of the subnet (network) mask. • Primary domain name server (DNS) • Provide the Host name and IP address if you are using a domain name server. • Alternate domain name server (DNS) • You can optionally provide an alternate DNS. • Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) destination

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-53

Student Notebook

Storage Management Console (SMC) Customer supplied PC 1.4 GHz Pentium 4 256 KB cache 256 MB Memory 1 GB disk space for the storage management software 1 GB work space per managed Integrated TAID Controller (IRC) IP Network connectivity to each RAID Controller Card IP Network connectivity to external network (Call Home and Remote Support) Serial connectivity to your storage unit Supported Browsers Internet Explorer 6.x Opera 7.23 Netscape 6.2 Netscape 7.x DS Storage Manager is web-based (HTML) graphical user interface (GUI) Online configuration management support. Online configuration, copy services, and CLI are available via a Web browser interface installed on the DS storage management console Required for configuration, problem reporting, and maintenance Supports multiple DS6000s Customer Download Code to SMC Customer Uses SMC GUI to push code to the DS6000 Customer Activates code on DS6000 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-41. Storage Management Console (SMC)

SS481.0

Notes: Network considerations: • MC is a firewall/proxy for incoming traffic • No IP forwarding, no gateway functionality • Many standard services (telnet, ftp, …) do not exist • VPN (point-to-point) from MC to IBM over internet, or modem. If Internet, firewall ports to open: -

500 udp 500 esp (VPN) 4500 udp Destination 207.25.252.196 192.42.160.16 207.25.252.198

• No TCPIP connection from the outside into the MC, except via the VPN • ASCII Modem dial-in can be used to initiate VPN TCPIP call back

4-54 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS Storage Manager Supported Operating Systems RedHat Advanced Server 2.1 on Intel (DS8000 only) Windows 2000 Server SP4 Windows 2000 Advanced Server SP4 Windows 2000 Professional SP4 Windows XP Professional SP1, SP1a (Offline only) Windows XP Professional SP2 Windows 2003 Server Standard and Enterprise

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-42. DS Storage Manager Supported Operating Systems

SS481.0

Notes: The support for the Storage Manager is as shown above. Windows XP requires SP2 which may not be readily available.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-55

Student Notebook

DS6000 SMC - Network Topology

Client's Ethernet switch

Customer network

DS6000 series

Firewall Internet

SMC To IBM Remote Support © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-43. DS6000 SMC – Network Topology

SS481.0

Notes: In order to use remote service support, the user must allow a VPN connection. If the user decides to ask IBM for help, and IBM needs to access the DS6000 remotely, then the user must provide connectivity from the DS Management Console to an IBM service support center. The DS Management Console must be connected to the DS6000 to enable IBM to access the DS6000 over this network to analyze the error condition.

4-56 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

HA with Storage Management Console (SMC)

Alternate Ethernet switch Secondary DS6000 series Alternate DS Management Console

inter-switch link

Ethernet switch

DS Management Console Primary DS6000 series

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-44. HA with Storage Management Console (SMC)

SS481.0

Notes: Connectivity to the DS6000 series from the DS Management Console is needed to perform configuration updates to the DS6000 series. Connectivity to both DS6800 controllers is required to activate updates. The figure above illustrates the DS Management console, optionally connected to the DS6000 by redundant Ethernet switches, but redundant switches are not a requirement. The switches must be part of the same subnet so that the controllers in the DS6000 can communicate with each other through the Ethernet.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-57

Student Notebook

Installing Storage and Server Enclosures in a Rack Position the rack Airflow is front to back Install the support rails Remove the CRUs and front display panel Disk drive modules Power Supplies Rear display panel Battery backup units Servers cards Install server enclosure and storage enclosures in the rack Replace the CRUs and front display panel Install the host systems and I/O adapters Supported host adapters and drivers, go to the interoperability matrix. http://www-1.ibm.com/servers/storage/disk/ds6000/interop.html Fibre Channel host bus adapters supported fibre channel HBAs, firmware and device information. http://knowledge.storage.ibm.com/HBA/HBASearchTool. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-45. Installing Storage and Server Enclosures in a Rack

SS481.0

Notes: Remove the hardware resources. This section provides resource removal instructions. The purpose of resource removal is to minimize the weight of the DS6000 before you install it in the rack. However, if you have three people available to lift and install the DS6000 in a rack, you might not find it necessary to remove the resources before installation. If this is the case, you can skip the resource removal instructions provided in this section.

4-58 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS6000 Server Enclosure Connection Diagram Power supply connector Power control switch Disk Exp Port 0 Disk Exp Port 1 Disk Ctlr Port 0 Disk Ctlr Port 1 Ethernet port SES serial port SMP serial port Host Port 0 Host Port 1 Host Port 2 Host Port 3

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-46. DS6000 Server Enclosure Connection Diagram

SS481.0

Notes: This graphic shows an overview of all of the connections in the server enclosure.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-59

Student Notebook

Connect Power Cords Each IRC or SBOD uses two standard power cords Right and left power cord to different PDUs To maintain power redundancy, make sure that each rack PDU is connected to separate independent external power circuit Your power cords are you on/off switch

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-47. Connect Power Cords

SS481.0

Notes: The power supplies are redundant and requires two separate power sources for redundancy. A UPS is recommended for area where power fluctuations are typical.

4-60 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Connect Hosts Install an SFP in a host port on the 511 processor card In pairs by type (LW or SW)

Server 0

Server 1

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-48. Connect Hosts

SS481.0

Notes: The host connections are FCP LC connectors and can be routed to a SAN switch or directly connected to a host.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-61

Student Notebook

Connect Storage Enclosures Recommended sequence for adding storage enclosures is to alternate each storage enclosure between Loop 0 and Loop 1, starting with Loop 1. First storage enclosure would be on Loop 1 (up to 7 Enclosures) Second storage enclosure would be on Loop 0 (Up to six EX1s) Total of 13 storage enclosures Loop 0 and Loop1 have different physical cabling connections from IRC to SBOD 16 Internal Disks

EX1 #1

EX1 #2

EX1 #3

EX1 #4

EX1 #5

EX1 #12

EX1 #13

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-49. Connect Storage Enclosures

SS481.0

Notes: The storage disk enclosures can be connected to increase the amount of storage available. The are two FC-AL loops and Loop 0 begins internally with the 16 DDMs in the 1750-511 and can be connected to six more expansion disk enclosures. Loop 1 is a separate FC-AL loop and can be connected to seven disk enclosures.

4-62 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Setting the IP Address Use a terminal emulator to connect to the server enclosure through the serial port located on the processor card. Remote connection setting Remote connection value Bits per second 38400 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control Hardware Logon: Guest Password: Guest Select: Configure network parameters from the Main Menu To set the IP address: Use static IP address Set the IP address for this node Set the IP address for other node Set Network mask for this node Set network mask for other node Select Back to Network Configuration. Select Back to Main Menu. Select Apply changes and exit

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-50. Setting the IP Address

SS481.0

Notes: The initial network IP address is set using a serial port and a Null modem cable to a workstation and using Netterm or hyperterm to access the DS6000 and set the IP address.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-63

Student Notebook

Disk Storage Feature Activation (DSFA) is a Customer Web Application Management of Licensed Features and Activation is a customer function DSFA is designed to help customers accomplish this Access is at http://www.ibm.com/storage/dsfa Used to retrieve 32-digit Feature Activation Code for DS6000 and DS8000 licensed functions

That is, OEL, PTC, RMC, RMZ, or PAV xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx Used to manage Licensed Functions on DS6000 and DS8000 Examples of when Feature Activation codes are needed

Prior to first configuration –or… When capacity is added to the license –or… When deactivating a license –or… If reallocation of function authorizations between images of LPAR models

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-51. Disk Storage Feature Activation (DSFA) is a Customer Web Application

SS481.0

Notes: The DFSA Web site is used to obtain license keys.

4-64 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Starting DSFA Three pieces of information needed from DS Storage Manager From Manage Hardware => Storage Unit => Properties => General Model Number (921,922,9A2,511) Machine Serial Number (Last seven digits of MTS field) Machine Signature (all 16 digits) xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx

Connect to the DSFA Application at http://www.ibm.com/storage/dsfa DS6000 Always provide the DS6000 Order Confirmation Code from the Product Order Reference Document shipped with the product or MES

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-52. Starting DSFA

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-65

Student Notebook

License Activation (Enter 32-Digit Code) Activation Code can be imported into DS Manager Downloaded to PC from DSFA Web Application Uploaded to DS Manager From hard drive or diskette (or whatever)

Manage Hardware => Storage Images => Apply Activation Codes => Import Codes; then select file Activation Code can be entered into DS Manager xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-53. License Activation (Enter 32-Digit Code)

SS481.0

Notes:

4-66 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS6000 - Select DS6000 Series Machine

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-54. DS6000 - Select DS6000 Series Machine

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-67

Student Notebook

DS6000 - View Feature Activation Details

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-55. DS6000 - View Feature Activation Details

SS481.0

Notes:

4-68 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Storage Complex Real-time Functions

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-56. Storage Complex Real-Time Functions

SS481.0

Notes: This Select Action box displays the function which are available in the Real-time Storage Manager GUI for the DS6000. These functions are not seen in the DS80000 GUI because most of these functions are part of the HMC function performed by the CE, but for a DS6000, the customer would be handling the maintenance of the DS6000. The Setup of the Storage Complex, which is the SMC and its connected DS6000 Storage Units and the assignment of the DS6000 Storage Unit are required to get the Storage Unit machine signatures from the GUI using the Storage Unit Properties. This data is needed to get the License Keys from the DFSA Web site.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-69

Student Notebook

Storage Unit - Real-time Functions

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-57. Storage Unit - Real-time Functions

SS481.0

Notes: This Select Action box displays the function which are available in the Real-time Storage Manager GUI for the DS6000. These functions are not seen in the DS80000 GUI because most of these functions are part of the HMC function performed by the CE, but for a DS6000, the customer would be handling the maintenance of the DS6000. There are many functions in the Storage Unit screen to assist the customer in maintaining the DS6000. A performance measure, a contact info setup, problem determination info, status and firmware updates.

4-70 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Assign the Storage Unit

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-58. Assign the Storage Unit

SS481.0

Notes: This Assign Storage Unit is something that needs to be done to get to the Storage Unit Properties. The Properties is where the Storage Unit machine Signature is located. This field is required to access the DFSA Web site for license keys.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-71

Student Notebook

Storage Unit Properties

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-59. Storage Unit Properties

SS481.0

Notes: The Storage Unit Properties is where the Storage Unit machine Signature is located. This field is required to access the DFSA Web site for license keys.

4-72 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DFSA Feature Activation Web Site

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-60. DFSA Feature Activation Web Site

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-73

Student Notebook

Update Activation Codes

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-61. Update Activation Codes

SS481.0

Notes: The DFSA Web site is access for the license keys. These can be copied or downloaded and placed into the field of the screen shown above. Each field activate one of the features purchased. OEL, is for configuration, PTC is for FlashCopy, Remote Copy is PPRC and PAV is for z/OS Parallel Access Volume support.

4-74 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Enter Customer Account Information

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-62. Enter Customer Account Information

SS481.0

Notes: This screen is allows the customer to enter contact information needed for IBM Support to work with the customer.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-75

Student Notebook

Enter Customer Shipping Information

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-63. Enter Customer Shipping Information

SS481.0

Notes: This screen allows the customer to enter contact information needed for IBM Support to work with the customer.

4-76 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Enter Customer Contact Information

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-64. Enter Customer Contact Information

SS481.0

Notes: This screen allows the customer to enter contact information needed for IBM Support to work with the customer.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-77

Student Notebook

Set up Call Home Function

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-65. Set up Call Home Function

SS481.0

Notes: This is the Call home function setup.

4-78 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Update DS6000 Firmware

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-66. Update DS6000 Firmware

SS481.0

Notes: This is the firmware update function setup.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-79

Student Notebook

Activate Remote Support

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-67. Activate Remote Support

SS481.0

Notes: This is the remote support connection setup.

4-80 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

View Performance Reports

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-68. View Performance Reports

SS481.0

Notes: This is the Performance Reports function of the DS6000 GUI.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-81

Student Notebook

Volume Performance Reports

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-69. Volume Performance Reports

SS481.0

Notes: This is the Volume Performance Reports are displayed as part of the DS6000 GUI.

4-82 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Checkpoint Exercise -- Unit 4 Checkpoint 1. T/F The DS6000 is equipped with a pair of 2-way PowerPC processors and provides redundant control of the storage arrays 2. T/F The DS6000 Model 9511 provides the capability to divide the cluster into Logical Partitions called LPARs which divides the hardware components into two separate controller which can operate independently. 3. T/F The DS6000 System uses switched FC-AL disk enclosures which improves disk performance and error detection capabilities. 4. The DS6000 System supports the following disk devices. a. b. c. d.

2 Gb 73 GB 15,000 disk drives 2 Gb 146 GB 10,000 disk drives 2 Gb 300 GB 10,000 disk drives All of the above

5. T/F The DS6000 System can be configured offline using a Simulated DS6000 Storage Manager interface.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 4. DS6000 Hardware Architecture Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-83

Student Notebook

Unit Summary Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Identify the components and features of the IBM TotalStorage DS6000 Storage Server Understand the IBM TotalStorage DS6000 architecture Explain the IBM TotalStorage DS6000 reliability, availability, and serviceability Identify the IBM TotalStorage DS6000 installation process Explain the IBM TotalStorage DS6000 licenses

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 4-70. Unit Summary

SS481.0

Notes:

4-84 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit 5. DS8000 Hardware Management Console What This Unit Is About The DS8000 Hardware Manager Console is the focal point of external communications with the DS8000 subsystem. This unit discusses the setup and use of the HMC or external S-HMC.

What You Should Be Able to Do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Describe the DS8000 Hardware Management Console • Describe Network configuration setup • Understand how use the VPN connections to the HMC

How You Will Check Your Progress Accountability: • Checkpoint

References SG24-6452

IBM TotalStorage DS8000 Series Architecture and Concepts

SC24-7623

IBM TotalStorage: DS8000 User's Guide

GC26-0495

IBM TotalStorage DS8000 Introduction and Planning Guide

SY27-7641

IBM TotalStorage DS8000 Installation Guide

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 5. DS8000 Hardware Management Console Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

5-1

Student Notebook

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you should be able to: Describe the DS6000/DS8000 Storage Manager installation Describe how to access the Storage Manager Describe the simulated mode of the Storage Manager Describe how to define the physical hardware using the simulated manager Describe how to define arrays, ranks and extent pools Describe how to define volumes, host connections and volume groups

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 5-1. Unit Objectives

SS481.0

Notes:

5-2

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

5.1 DS8000 Storage Management Console

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 5. DS8000 Hardware Management Console Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

5-3

Student Notebook

DS8000 Management Console Overview TotalStorage Management Console : MC Other possible names : HMC or S-HMC On DS6000 : SMC Storage Management Console is the focal point for configuration, copy services management, and maintenance activities. Dedicated workstation physically located (installed) inside your DS8100 and DS8300 and can automatically monitor the state of your system, notifying you and IBM when service is required. The Management Console can also be connected to your network to enable centralized management of your system using the IBM TotalStorage DS Command-Line Interface or storage management software that uses the IBM TotalStorage DS Open API. An external Management Console is available as a optional feature and can be used as a redundant management console for environments with high-availability requirements. Internal Management Console feature code :1100 External Management Console feature code 1110

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 5-2. DS8000 Management Console Overview

SS481.0

Notes: The S-HMC feature looks similar to a laptop. It consists of a workstation processor, keyboard, monitor, modem, and Ethernet cables. The S-HMC is a closed system appliance.

5-4

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 Management Console Features DS8000 Management Console Multiple Functions: Local Service Interface for local service personnel Remote Service Call home and call back Storage Facility Configuration LPAR Management (HMC) Supports logical storage configuration via preinstalled TotalStorage DS Storage Manager in online mode only Network Interface Server for logical configuration and invocation of advanced Copy Services functions Service appliance (closed system) Connection to Storage Facility (DS8000) through redundant private Ethernet networks only

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 5-3. DS8000 Management Console Features

SS481.0

Notes: IBM Service personnel located outside of the customer facility log in to the S-HMC to provide service and support. The methods available for IBM to connect to the S-HMC are configured by the IBM SSR at the direction of the customer, and may include dial-up only access or access through the high-speed Internet connection. The DS Storage Manager on the internal S-HMC provides only real-time configuration, as opposed to offline configuration. The user may also opt to install an additional DS Storage Manager on the user’s own workstation. With this DS Management Console, the user is able to perform both online and offline configurations. In order to perform online configuration the user’s workstation must be connected to the S-HMC that is connected to the DS8000.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 5. DS8000 Hardware Management Console Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

5-5

Student Notebook

Hardware Management Console HMC Status Command/Response Virtual Consoles

AIX

AIX

Partition 1

Partition 2

Unassigned Resources

Ethernet

POWER5 Hypervisor

Non-Volatile RAM

P5 HMC Features:

Processors Mem Regions I/O Slots

Service Processor LPAR Allocation Tables

Perm

Temp

Logical partition configuration Dynamic logical partitioning Capacity and resource management System status HMC management Service functions (microcode update,…) Remote HMC interface

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 5-4. Hardware Management Console

SS481.0

Notes: The S-HMC is a closed system appliance. Each DS8000 has an internal S-HMC (feature code 1100) in the base frame, together with a pair of Ethernet switches installed and cabled to the processor complex or external S-HMC, or both. It is a focal point with multiple functions such as: • • • • •

5-6

Storage configuration LPAR management Advanced Copy Services invocations Interface for local service personnel Remote service and support

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 MC - Network Configuration Storage Management Console network consists of: Redundant private Ethernet networks for connection to the Storage Facilities Customer network configured to allow access from the HMC to IBM through a secure Virtual Private Network (VPN) Call home to IBM Services is possible through Dial-up or Internet connections VPNs Dial-up or Internet connection VPNs is also available for IBM service to provide Remote Service and Support Recommended configuration is to connect MC to customer’s public network for support Support will use WebSM GUI for all service actions Downloading of problem determination data favors the use of a high speed network Network connectivity and remote support is managed by the HMC

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 5-5. DS8000 MC – Network Configuration

SS481.0

Notes: The customer Ethernet port indicated is the primary port to be used to connect to the customer network. The empty Ethernet port is normally not used. Corresponding private Ethernet ports of the external S-HMC (FC1110) would be plugged into port 2 of the switches.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 5. DS8000 Hardware Management Console Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

5-7

Student Notebook

DS8000 MC and a Pair of Ethernet Switches Every DS8000 base frame comes with a pair of Ethernet switches installed and cabled to the processor complex. The MC has: Two built-in Ethernet ports - the MC private Ethernet ports shown are configured into Port 1 of each Ethernet switch to form the private DS8000 networks One dual-port Ethernet PCI adapter One PCI modem for asynchronous call home support The customer Ethernet port indicated is the primary port to be used to connect to the customer network. The empty Ethernet port is normally not used. Corresponding private Ethernet ports of the external MC (FC1110) would be plugged into port 2 of the switches as shown into next foil. To interconnect two DS8000 base frames, FC1190 would provide a pair of 31 meter Ethernet cables to connect from port 16 of each switch in the second base frame into port 15 of the first frame. If the second MC is installed in the second DS8000, it would remain plugged into port 1 of its Ethernet switches.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 5-6. DS8000 MC and a Pair of Ethernet Switches

SS481.0

Notes:

5-8

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 MC and Ethernet Switches Plugging (Back View)

PCI Modem

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 5-7. DS8000 MC and Ethernet Switches Plugging (Back View)

SS481.0

Notes: Shown is the back of a single SMC and a pair of Ethernet switches. • Every DS8000 base frame comes with a pair of Ethernet switches installed and cabled to the processor complex. • The SMC has two built-in Ethernet ports, one dual-port Ethernet PCI adapter, and one PCI modem for asynchronous call home support. • The SMC private Ethernet ports shown are configured into Port 1 of each Ethernet switch to form the private DS8000 networks. • The customer Ethernet port indicated is the primary port to be used to connect to the customer network. • The empty Ethernet port is normally not used.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 5. DS8000 Hardware Management Console Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

5-9

Student Notebook

DS8000 MC Network Topology

DS8000 Subsystems

Customer Customer Network Network

DMZ VPN

MC

Redundant Ethernet Fabric

eth

eth

eth

modem

Opt. Firewall provided by customer

Integrated Firewall Proxy

Internet Internet

VPN

DMZ

MC : DMZ: VPN: eth:

Hardware Management Console Demilitarized Zone Virtual Private Network Ethernet Port

IBM IBM Network Network IBM Remote Support Infrastructure

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 5-8. DS8000 MC Network Topology

SS481.0

Notes: The diagram above shows a typical redundant S-HMC configuration. In this configuration, we have DS8000 Subsystems with internal S-HMC and, via the customer network (external S-HMC), connected to the network. These two networks are the private Ethernet networks of the DS8000. MC are also connected to the customer’s network by way of the customer Ethernet ports on the pair of Ethernet switches that are installed at installation time. Remote access via VPN may also be set up for IBM Remote support access if required.

5-10 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 and DS6000 Remote Access Features Call Home : Automatic Problem Reporting IBM DS6000 and DS8000 are designed with a Call Home function In the event of a failure, the Call Home function generates a trouble ticket with the IBM support organization IBM support determines the failing component and dispatches a customer engineer with the replacement part Remote Service and Support With remote support enabled, IBM technical support can log into the management console to troubleshoot a problem, view logs, dumps, and traces interactively This can reduce lag time to send such information to IBM and can shorten problem determination time In the case of complex problems, IBM technical support teams can engage a specialist quickly to resolve the problems as quickly as possible

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 5-9. DS8000 and DS6000 Remote Access Features

SS481.0

Notes: Call home is the capability of the S-HMC to contact IBM support services to report a problem. This is referred to as call home for service. The S-HMC also provides machine-reported product data (MRPD) information to IBM by way of the call home facility. The MRPD information includes installed hardware, configurations, and features. The storage plex uses the call home method to send heartbeat information to IBM and by doing this, ensures that the S-HMC is able to initiate a call home to IBM in the case of an error. Remote access is required when the local service personnel cannot correct problems with the storage plex, and IBM product engineer assistance is required to resolve the problems. In this case, the S-HMC initiates a call home for service, and IBM support service initiates a remote access session.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 5. DS8000 Hardware Management Console Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

5-11

Student Notebook

DS8000 MC Network Topology To connect the MC, need following network information One IP address per MC With external MC, need two IP-addresses

Host names for the MCs: « MC1 and MC2 » Domain name for the MC: « us.ibm.com » Whether you use local time or a different time zone TCP/IP interface network mask: « 255.255.254.0 » With Domain Name Server (DNS) - more than one DNS allowed IP address of your DNS Name of your DNS

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 5-10. DS8000 MC Network Topology

SS481.0

Notes: In order to connect the S-HMC to your network, you need the following network information: • One IP address per S-HMC. With an external S-HMC, you need two IP addresses. • Host names for the S-HMCs (for example, MC1 and MC2). • Domain name for the S-HMC (for example, us.ibm.com®). • Whether you use local time or a different time zone. • TCP/IP interface network mask (for example, 255.255.254.0). • If you plan to use a Domain Name Server (DNS) to resolve network names, you need the IP address of your DNS server and the name of your DNS. You may have more than one DNS.

5-12 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 MC - Network Considerations MC is a firewall/proxy for incoming traffic No IP forwarding, no gateway functionality Many standard services (telnet, ftp, …) do not exist VPN (point-to-point) from MC to IBM over Internet or modem VPN employs IPSec with triple DES Encryption algorithm (164-bit) If Internet, firewall ports to open: 500 udp 500 esp (VPN) 4500 udp Destination 207.25.252.196 192.42.160.16 207.25.252.198 No TCP/IP connection from the outside into the MC ASCII Modem dial-in can be used to initiate VPN TCPIP call back

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 5-11. DS8000 MC – Network Considerations

SS481.0

Notes: Allowing access between the Internet and computers in a customer network brings valid security concerns which need to be addressed. IBM has taken the steps necessary to provide secure network access for the S-HMC. Even after securing access to the S-HMC, there are additional levels of security built into the Service applications available on the S-HMC. In the following sections we discuss the security protection securing access to the S-HMC from the Internet, and then we describe the internal security of the S-HMC itself.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 5. DS8000 Hardware Management Console Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

5-13

Student Notebook

Redundant DS8000 MC Redundant MCs are recommended to avoid a potential single point of failure MC is the only service interface available MC is the interface for performing configuration changes and for supporting Open Copy Services operations Option 1: FC1100 (Internal MC) and FC1110 (External MC) FC1110 ships with 31 meter Ethernet cables External MC is equivalent hardware to the Internal MC and is to be installed in customer-supplied 19-inch rack (1U server/1U display) Option 2: FC1100 in each of two separate DS8000 base frames, along with one FC1190 (31 meter Ethernet cables) to interconnect the frames At GA, a single MC (or a pair in a redundant configuration) supports a maximum of two DS8000s

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 5-12. Redundant DS8000 MC

SS481.0

Notes: The best option is to have a redundant SMC for maintenance and configuration. The HMC or external SMC is the only interface for service and configuration. If there is a problem with the HMC, then no access is possible unless a remote SMC is set up.

5-14 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 MC - User Management Predefined users, no new users can be added User passwords can be changed by IBM support personnel Users with higher privileges are protected by a challenge authentication scheme User root is locked User activity logging Auditing

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 5-13. DS8000 MC – User Management

SS481.0

Notes: The HMC has predefined userids and new IDs can not be added. User password can be changed by IBM support personnel, but the HMC is not intended for customer access or use. Users are authenticated for use. User root is locked so that access level is not allowed. User activity is logged and logs can be viewed with the DS8000 Storage Manager.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 5. DS8000 Hardware Management Console Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

5-15

Student Notebook

DS6000 and DS8000 Remote Support through VPN IBM DS family of storage products is designed to reduce TCO Automatic problem reporting to IBM support organizations capability to troubleshoot failures remotely. To accomplish this, IBM has implemented a Virtual Private Network (VPN) capability intended to provide customers with a secure link The DS8000 allows for call home and remote support by Internet or dial up It is faster and easier for IBM service to support the DS8000 if the Internet connection is used IBM has taken many measures to provide a secure link using a Virtual Private Network (VPN) We would like our customers to use the Internet connection as much as possible The DS6000 allows for call home and remote support by Internet connection only The same measures used for the DS8000 have been implemented in the DS6000 as well We should encourage our customers to use this connection to help IBM provide excellent support

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 5-14. DS6000 and DS8000 Remote Support through VPN

SS481.0

Notes: Remote access is allowed via internet or dial-up. Internet VPN connection is preferred for obvious reasons of speed and access.

5-16 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

How Virtual Private Network (VPN) Operates The VPN server is located behind IBM firewall, which is designed to be secure The VPN client is located behind the customer firewall The customer has control over opening a connection to access the client Neither IBM technical support nor non-authorized personnel can access the client without customer’s permission The VPN Server security complies with IBM corporate security standards ITCS104 This is an IBM internal security measure for all IBM secure data.

Remote support

VPN Gateway

VPN Tunnel DS-6000 SMC

RS3

Firewall

Firewall

IBM Support

Call home

Customer Site

IBM Site

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 5-15. How Virtual Private Network (VPN) Operates

SS481.0

Notes: This connection is through a high-speed Ethernet connection that can be configured through a secure virtual private network (VPN) Internet connection to ensure authentication and data encryption. IBM has chosen to use a graphical interface (WebSM) for servicing the storage facility, and for the problem determination activity logs, error logs, and diagnostic dumps that may be required for effective problem resolution. These logs can be significant in size. For this reason, a high-speed connection would be the ideal infrastructure for effective support services. A remote connection can be configured to meet the following customer requirements: • Allow call on error (machine-detected) • Allow connection for a few days (customer-initiated) • Allow remote error investigation (Service-initiated)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 5. DS8000 Hardware Management Console Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

5-17

Student Notebook

DS8000 MC - Remote Service Security (1 of 2) WebSM (AIX) over VPN for graphical user interface Server authentication via private/public key : Each MC generates a certificate based on the private key that the MC will use for Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) based encryption and decryption. The IBM SSR transmit the certificate for the installed MC to a database maintained within the IBM secure network. IBM personnel then retrieve the MC-specific certificate from the database and use this key to establish the communication session with the MC needed service. SSH over VPN for command line access : Secure Shell (SSH) is used for command line access from a remote IBM location. The SSH daemon on the MC accepts client connections only if an IBM VPN is up, and a Product Engineer is currently logged on to the MC. SSH client authentication is done through a private/public key algorithm. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005 Figure 5-16. DS8000 MC – Remote Service Security (1 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: During the installation process at the customer site, the IBM SSR connects to the IBM Service organization, by way of modem, Internet connection, or the SSRs MOST portable console, and transmits the public key for the installed console to a database maintained within the IBM secure network. Whenever IBM Service requires access to the console located at the customer site, the IBM personnel have to retrieve the console-specific public key from the database and use this key to establish the communication session needed for service.

5-18 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 MC - Remote Service Security (2 of 2) VPN sessions initiated from the MC : No application listening on TCP/IP ports on the MC If a session is needed from the MC to enable a service action, an IBM Service representative may initiate this session by dialing into the MC via the modem, and requesting that the MC establish the session. MC always establishes that session to the defined IBM TCP/IP addresses, not to another server or workstation Only active when specific conditions are met Except for SSH, no other standard services over remote connection Remote connection options can be configured to meet customer requirements Allow call on error (machine detected) Allow connection for a few days (customer initiated) Allow remote error investigation (Service initiated)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 5-17. DS8000 MC – Remote Service Security (2 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: The first security measure that is employed to protect the console is to only allow network sessions or conversations to be initiated from the console itself. This means that there are no applications running on the console that are listening on TCP/IP ports to establish a session. If a session is needed from the console to enable a service action, an IBM Service representative may initiate this session by dialing into the console using the modem, and requesting that the console establish the session. This session is only initiated to one of the defined TCP/IP addresses which represent the IBM Service centers.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 5. DS8000 Hardware Management Console Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

5-19

Student Notebook

MC - Network Topology Customer Customer network network

Storage Facility #1

firewall FSP

Processor Complex 0

SFI Complex 0 SFI Complex 1

Storage Facility #2

Storage Facility Image (SFI)

firewall

FSP

VPN over modem SFI Complex 0 SFI Complex 1

FSP

IBM IBM network network

IBM eCare •Call Home •Remote Support

Ne

Processor Complex 1

firewall

SMC 2

Processor Complex 0

Customer Network

FSP

Ne

Processor Complex 1

Internet Internet

SMC 1

Storage Facility Image (SFI)

FSP: Functional Service Processor

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 5-18. MC – Network Topology

SS481.0

Notes: The figure above shows a typical redundant S-HMC configuration. In this configuration, we have MC1 (internal S-HMC) and MC2 (external S-HMC) connected to the 172.16-BLACK network and the 172.16-GRAY network. These two networks are the private Ethernet networks of the DS8000. MC1 and MC2 are also connected to the customer’s network by way of the customer Ethernet ports on the pair of Ethernet switches that are installed at installation time.

5-20 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 MC Summary The Storage Management Console is the central point of control for service, configuration, and Advanced Copy Services functions At least one MC is required for each Storage Plex Two MCs are recommended to eliminate a potential single point of failure

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 5-19. DS8000 MC Summary

SS481.0

Notes: The SMC is the central point of control and at least one HMC is required for each DS8000. The DS6000 has no internal HMC so a SMC is required for DS6000 management.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 5. DS8000 Hardware Management Console Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

5-21

Student Notebook

Checkpoint Exercise -- Unit 5 Checkpoint 1. T/F The DS6000 is equipped with a pair of 2-way PowerPC processors and provides redundant control of the storage arrays. 2. T/F The DS6000 Model 9511 provides the capability to divide the cluster into logical partitions called LPARs which divides the hardware components into two separate controllers which can operate independently. 3. T/F The DS6000 system uses switched FC-AL disk enclosures which improves disk performance and error-detection capabilities.

5-22 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit Summary Having completing this unit, you should be able to: Describe the DS6000/DS8000 Storage Manager installation Describe how to access the Storage Manager Describe the simulated mode of the Storage Manager Describe how to define the physical hardware using the simulated manager Describe how to define arrays, ranks and extent pools Describe how to define volumes, host connections and volume groups

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 5-20. Unit Summary

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 5. DS8000 Hardware Management Console Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

5-23

Student Notebook

5-24 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI What This Unit Is About The DS8000 Storage Manager is customer-installable software used for configuration of the DS8000 Storage Subsystem.

What You Should Be Able to Do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Describe the installation of the DS8000 Storage Manager • Describe real-time mode and simulation mode • Understand how to access the DS Storage Manager GUI • Describe configuring the storage units, images and complexes • Describe configuring arrays sites, arrays, ranks, and extent pools • Describe the configuration of FB logical volumes and volume groups • Describe configuring host attachments • Describe the use of the DS Information Center

How You Will Check Your Progress Accountability: • Checkpoint questions • Lab Exercises

References SG24-6452

IBM TotalStorage DS8000 Series Architecture and Concepts

SC24-7623

IBM TotalStorage: DS8000 User's Guide

GC26-0495

IBM TotalStorage DS8000 Introduction and Planning Guide

SY27-7641

IBM TotalStorage DS8000 Installation Guide

SC26-7625

IBM TotalStorage DS8000 Command Line User's

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-1

Student Notebook

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you should be able to: Describe the DS6000/DS8000 Hardware Management Console Describe the internal Ethernet switches in the DS8000 storage unit Describe how to access the setup of the HMC Describe the network topology Describe the VPN consideration and setup Describe the network restrictions when access the HMC or the DS8000 storage servers

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-1. Unit Objectives

SS481.0

Notes:

6-2

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

6.1 DS Storage Manager GUI

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-3

Student Notebook

Topic: DS Storage Manager GUI DS Storage Manager GUI DS Storage Manager Installation Requirements DS Storage Manager GUI Activating Keys and Storage Unit DS Storage Manager Architecture and Logical Configuration Steps Summary of Logical Configuration Differences

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-2. Topic: DS Storage Manager GUI

SS481.0

Notes:

6-4

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS Storage Manager Two interfaces/modes of operation Realtime (online) Internal DS MC (DS8000 only) Customer DS MC (DS6000 only) External customer workstation (DS8000 and DS6000)

Simulated (offline) Customer DS MC (DS6000 only) External customer workstation (DS8000 and DS6000)

Can be independently installed Can install one, or the other, or both on customer or workstation If both are installed, they are integrated into the same interface

DS8000 Internal DS MC supports realtime manager only DS6000 Customer DS MC supports both realtime and simulated managers Both realtime and simulated interfaces have same look and feel DS6000 and DS8000 Storage Managers have same look and feel © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-3. DS Storage Manager

SS481.0

Notes: The DS8000 Storage Manager comes in two parts. A Real-time Manager which talks directly to the DS8000 and runs on the HMC. To run in real-time mode from a customer workstation, use a Web browser to access the DS Storage Manager GUI through the DS Network Interface Server. The DS8000 Storage Manager also offers a Simulated Mode GUI which can be run from an External SMC or customer workstation. This allows the user to create an offline configuration and EXPORT it as an XML file or apply it to the Real-Time SM. You can also IMPORT the real-time configuration to the Simulated Mode GUI to add hosts or volume groups and then apply that to the DS8000.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-5

Student Notebook

DS8000 Management Console ESS Master Console

IBM TotalStorage DS Storage Manager Customer UI

Customer UI Remote

pSeries HMC

DS8000 Internal Management Console

Remote Services DS Storage Mgr

Services System and Partition Management

ESS (AIX )

System and Partition Management

Service ESS RAS

Service Storage

ESS Configuration

Facility RAS Network Interface Server

Copy Services

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-4. DS8000 Management Console

SS481.0

Notes: The DS8000 comes with an internal HMC which in located just above the processor complex in the base frame. It consists of a monitor, keyboard and HMC server which is connected directly to the processor complex through two internal network Ethernet switches. The HMC has two connections, one to each network switch, and they in turn connect to p5 570 servers. There are two Ethernet connections from each Ethernet switch to each server, and on a 9A2 if the server is LPARed, then there is a connection for each LPAR. The Internal Management Console is the same as the pSeries Management Console, and you can run the Real-Time DS Storage Manager directly from the HMC or you can run it remotely using a Web browser. To run the DS Storage Manager directly, log on to the HMC with the default user hscroot and password abc23. The user can change this password and add user accounts. Right-click the HMC screen and select Net then browser to access the DS Storage Manager. Log in using admin/admin and you are required to change the password before you can use the DS Storage Manager interface. Supports logical storage configuration via preinstalled TotalStorage DS Storage Manager in online mode only.

6-6

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

• Network Interface Server for logical storage configuration and invocation of Advanced Copy Services functions • Service appliance (closed system) • Connection to DS8000 through Ethernet only This graphic shows the function of the ESS interfaces and how they have been applied to the DS8000. The ESS Specialist used a browser interface directly to an internal web server that ran in the cluster under the AIX OS. This function has been replaced by a DS Network Interface Server. This runs as part of the DS Storage Manager.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-7

Student Notebook

DS Storage Manager Architecture

Browser 1

DS Storage Manager : WebSphere Application Server + DS Storage Manager GUI + Network client

GUI Server Network Client

DS Network Interface Server

Network Server

Storage

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-5. DS Storage Manager Architecture

SS481.0

Notes: The IBM TotalStorage DS Storage Manager is a program interface that is used to perform logical configuration and copy services management functions of the DS6000 and DS8000 It can be accessed from any location that has a network access using a Web browser. Enter the URL of the DS Management Console: http://”DS MC IP Addr”:8451/DS8000 for a DS8000 https://”DS MC IP Addr”:8452/DS8000 for a DS8000 or http://”DS MC IP Addr”:8451/DS6000 for a DS6000 https://”DS MC IP Addr”:8452/DS6000 for a DS6000

6-8

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS Storage Manager Realtime Manager - DS8000 Internal DS Management Console (DS8000 only) Customer Workstation (to Realtime Manager on DS8000 Internal DS MC)

Browser 2

Browser 1

Browser 3

GUI Server

GUI Server

Network Client To use the Realtime configurator, you need to have access to the Internal Management Console

Customer Workstation with Realtime Manager

Network Client

Network Server

Storage © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-6. DS Storage Manager Realtime Manager - DS8000

SS481.0

Notes: The real-time manager runs in the internal Management Console via an internal browser, and can be run remotely using only a browser. The real-time manager talks directly to the DS8000 server using the DS Storage Manager Server, and is connected to the servers from the HMC by Ethernet connections using internal Ethernet Switches located in the DS8000 base frame. External users of the DS Storage Manager connect to this network on an Ethernet port on the HMC server, and do not connect to the internal switches. A secondary Management Console can connect to the internal switches, or a second DS8000’s internal HMC can cross connect to these switches to provide redundant HMCs, which is recommended. The HMC is the focal point for all service and customer access for configuration and setup.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-9

Student Notebook

DS Storage Manager Realtime Manager - DS8000 Internal DS MC (DS8000 only)

Customer Workstation with Simulated Manager

Browser

GUI Server Network 1

Network

Client

Network

Server

Server

Local Copy of Configuration (database)

2 Storage © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-7. DS Storage Manager Simulated Manager – DS8000

SS481.0

Notes: The DS8000 Storage Manager has two modes of operation. To run the Simulated Manager the user must install the DS8000 Storage Manager Simulated Mode Console on their workstation. The Internal HMC does not have a simulated mode manager to access. If an external HMC is installed, the user has the option of installing the real-time and simulated mode function on this console. Then either function can be accessed using a Web browser. Using the Simulated Manager it is possible to import a configuration from the DS8000, modify it, and then apply these changes back to the DS8000. This may be easier than trying to perform these changes in real-time mode, especially if mistakes are made during the process.

6-10 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS Storage Manager Realtime and Simulated Managers - DS6000 Customer DS MC With Both Managers

Browser GUI Server

Browser

Network Client

Local Copy of Configuration (database)

Network Server Import/Apply Configuration

Storage © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-8. DS Storage Manager Realtime and Simulated Managers – DS6000

SS481.0

Notes: Both the Real-time and Simulated mode Storage Managers can be installed, but only the HMC on an external SMC connected to the DS8000 Internal switches can communicate directly to the DS8000.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-11

Student Notebook

DS Storage Manager and DS CLI DS Management Console Customer Workstation

Browser 1

DSCLI

GUI Server

Network

Network

Interface

Client

Client

Network Server

Storage

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-9. DS Storage Manager and DS CLI

SS481.0

Notes: The DSCLI is the command line interface and it can be installed on any customer workstation or laptop. It just requires access to the network and the HMC to run CLI commands to configure the DS8000. The DS8000 CLI can be installed together with the ESS CLI, but not with the DS6000 CLI. The DS600 CLI and the DS8000 CLI are different software programs, but very similar. In many cases one of these interfaces can be used to configure either the DS6000 or the DS8000, but some commands for the DS6000 for customer maintenance and troubleshooting are not present in the DS8000 DSCLI, so this program should be available from some workstation if needed.

6-12 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Realtime versus Simulated Configuration Options Realtime Manager only Add/Remove Storage Complex (DS8000) Apply Activation Keys to Storage Image (DS8000) Assign Storage Unit (DS6000) – DS MC to DS6000 communication Configure Storage Unit (DS6000)-- date/time and license keys Define Peer (DS6000) – Redundant DS MC User Administration Systems Management (DS6000) Simulated Manager only Manage Configuration Files Import/Create/Delete Storage Complex Import/Create/Delete Storage Unit Apply Configuration Copy/Paste Storage Unit, Storage Image (DS8000)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-10. Realtime versus Simulated Configuration Options

SS481.0

Notes: The DS Storage Manager is required to add DS8000 or DS6000 Storage Units to the Storage Complex. The Storage Complex is the group of DS units being managed by one DS Storage Manager. Until a unit is added to the complex, you can not issue commands to this unit. You also need to use the DS Storage Manager to apply the license keys for the features you ordered. Once these things are complete you can use the DS Storage Manager or the DSCLI to configure the physical or logical storage on the DS8000 or DS6000. The Simulated Manager allows you to import configurations from: • • • •

The DS8000 hardware The DS6000 hardware An exported XML file An e-Config .crf file from the IBM sales e-Config tool

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-13

Student Notebook

Exporting Logical Configuration Information DS Storage Manager functions include an option to: Print Download in spreadsheet format Invoke the browser’s ‘save as’ dialogue

Physical and logical configuration created in simulated mode or imported (retrieved) from the storage unit can be used for Backup Cloning

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-11. Exporting Logical Configuration Information

SS481.0

Notes:

6-14 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unlock Admin Password After three unsuccessful attempts with the wrong password, the account is locked. If the Admin account is involved, the administrator must use the security recovery utility tool. The script resides in the following directories, depending on where the DS Storage Manager is installed: On an HMC, the directory is: /opt/essni/bin/ On a Windows operating system, the directory is: C:\Program Files\ IBM\dsniserver\bin\

Type the script name, securityRecoveryUtility.bat -r and press the Enter key. The script runs and the Admin account is unlocked.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-12. Unlock Admin Password

SS481.0

Notes: If you lock the password of the admin account or other user account, you have to unlock that account before you can log in. You have to sign on with the new admin account password that was created. The DSCLI program asks you to change this password the first time you log on. This does not work if admin is the only userid you have defined. You can also run the securityRecoveryUtility.bat -r in the c:\Program Files\IBM\dsniserver\bin directory to reset the admin password back to the default of ‘admin’. The DS Network Server must be stopped to run this command.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-15

Student Notebook

6-16 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

6.2 Installation Requirements

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-17

Student Notebook

Topic: Installation Requirements DS Storage Manager GUI DS Storage Manager Installation Requirements DS Storage Manager GUI Activating Keys and Storage Unit DS Storage Manager Architecture and Logical Configuration Steps Summary of Logical Configuration Differences

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-13. Topic: Installation Requirements

SS481.0

Notes:

6-18 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS Storage Manager Supported Operating Systems RedHat Advanced Server 2.1 on Intel (DS8000 only) Windows 2000 Server SP4 Windows 2000 Advanced Server SP4 Windows 2000 Professional SP4 Windows XP Professional SP1, SP1a (Offline only) Windows XP Professional SP2 Windows 2003 Server Standard and Enterprise

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-14. DS Storage Manager Supported Operating Systems

SS481.0

Notes: These are the supported platforms for the DS8000 Storage Manager. If you are running Windows XP SP1, that works but you cannot run the real-time monitor from that workstation; only the browser is supported.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-19

Student Notebook

DS Storage Manager Supported Client Browsers Microsoft IE 6 Netscape 6.2 Netscape 7

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-15. DS Storage Manager Supported Client Browsers

SS481.0

Notes: These are the supported browsers. Others may work, but are not supported if you have problems.

6-20 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 Storage Manager Installation Process (1 of 7) Installation by a wizard

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-16. DS8000 Storage Manager Installation Process (1 of 7)

SS481.0

Notes: The DS Storage Manager can be installed on a customer workstation but is not required to run the configuration tool. You may want to have the offline simulated mode for practice. This is what we use in class for labs.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-21

Student Notebook

DS8000 Storage Manager Installation Process (2 of 7) Specify the destination directory : Accept default location : C:\Program Files\IBM\DS8000StorageManager Specify Hostname and TCP ports for the server Accept default values.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-17. DS8000 Storage Manager Installation Process (2 of 7)

SS481.0

Notes: The ports are listed. You can change them if they conflict with something you already are using.

6-22 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 Storage Manager Installation Process (3 of 7) Specify Key file and Trust File password

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-18. DS8000 Storage Manager Installation Process (3 of 7)

SS481.0

Notes: This panel requires some passwords for key and trust file authorization. Just select a password. You are never asked to enter it so it does not matter what it is.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-23

Student Notebook

DS8000 Storage Manager Installation Process (4 of 7) Specify other information for certificates generation

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-19. DS8000 Storage Manager Installation Process (4 of 7)

SS481.0

Notes: Enter location and company information.

6-24 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 Storage Manager Installation Process (5 of 7) Once all information has been provided, installation can start

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-20. DS8000 Storage Manager Installation Process (5 of 7)

SS481.0

Notes: Verify and click Next.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-25

Student Notebook

DS8000 Storage Manager Installation Process (6 of 7) At the and of the installation, verify that the following services have been started: IBM DS Network Interface server IBM WebSphere Application Server V5 – DS Storage Manager

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-21. DS8000 Storage Manager Installation Process (6 of 7)

SS481.0

Notes: The DS Network Interface and DS Storage Manager are installed as services. Verify that they start.

6-26 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 Storage Manager Installation Process (7 of 7) At the end of the installation, check the postinstallation.txt file : To stop or restart the DS Network Interface servers from the Windows Programs list: From the windows system where you installed the DS Storage Manager : 1. Click Start. 2. Select Programs to display the programs list. 3. Open IBM TotalStorage DS Network Interface Server menu 4. Click Stop or Start for the action that you want to complete. Starting the DS8000 Storage Manager from Windows system where you installed the DS Storage Manager : 1. Click Start. 2. Click Programs. 3. Open IBM TotalStorage Manager DS Storage Manager Server menu: 4. Click Stop or Start for the action you want to complete. Then, you can start DS8000 Storage Manager GUI from your default browser : URL : http://localhost:8451/DS8000 or : https://localhost:8452/DS8000 When you start the DS8000 Storage Manager, the IBM TotalStorage DS8000 Signon window is displayed. Enter the user name and password to access the program. The default user name and password is admin

Browser 1 GUI Server Network Client

Network Server

Storage

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-22. DS8000 Storage Manager Installation Process (7 of 7)

SS481.0

Notes: OK, it’s installed, let’s start it. The DSNI and DSSM should be running, but if not you can start them from the Start - Programs - DS Network Interface Server and DS Storage Manager Server.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-27

Student Notebook

6-28 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

6.3 Activating Keys and Storage Unit

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-29

Student Notebook

Topic: Activating Keys and Storage Unit DS Storage Manager GUI DS Storage Manager Installation Requirements DS Storage Manager GUI Activating Keys and Storage Unit DS Storage Manager Architecture and Logical Configuration Steps Summary of Logical Configuration Differences

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-23. Topic: Activating Keys and Storage Unit

SS481.0

Notes:

6-30 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Storage Image (DS8000*) Apply Activation Keys

Realtime mode only Next step -- enter keys for operating environment and advanced functions, or import .xml file previously downloaded from DSFA Web site *For DS6000, apply keys to Storage Unit (Configure Storage Unit) © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-24. Storage Image (DS8000*) – Apply Activation Keys

SS481.0

Notes: The DS8000 must have its activation keys downloaded and installed in order to use any of the features that were ordered by the user. This is done a little differently in the DS6000 GUI than here as there is no storage image concept in the DS6000.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-31

Student Notebook

Storage Image (DS8000*) Apply Configuration

Simulated mode only Logical configuration created offline is applied via the network *For DS6000, apply configuration to Storage Unit © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-25. Storage Image (DS8000*) - Apply Configuration

SS481.0

Notes: To apply a configuration from the DS8000 SM, use the Storage Images panel and select Apply Configuration from the Actions menu.

6-32 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Apply Configuration Select Application Method

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-26. Apply Configuration – Select Application Method

SS481.0

Notes: This is how to apply a configuration from an outside source, or you can just create it real-time using the GUI. We do that next.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-33

Student Notebook

Apply Configuration - Select Storage Complex

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-27. Apply Configuration – Select Storage Complex

SS481.0

Notes: Here is a list of the storage complexes if we have more than one. Select it and click Next.

6-34 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Apply Configuration - Authenticate

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-28. Apply Configuration - Authenticate

SS481.0

Notes: Enter the IP address of the HMC for the storage complex and the current admin userid and password and click Next.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-35

Student Notebook

Apply Configuration – Select Storage Unit

Next step -- select storage image (DS8000)

Logical configuration activation is complete!

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-29. Apply Configuration – Select Storage Unit

SS481.0

Notes: Select the storage unit to download the code to, then click Next. You get to verify what you are about to do and click Finish.

6-36 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Manage Configuration Files

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-30. Manage Configuration Files

SS481.0

Notes: This is the panel for configuration file management. You can IMPORT files or EXPORT files from this panel. EXPORTED files are in XML format and can be viewed with a browser and edited, but be cautious about editing the files. You could cause the configuration not to work at all.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-37

Student Notebook

User Administration

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-31. User Administration

SS481.0

Notes: This is the User administration screen. You can create new users for admin, configuration, copy services or just monitor operations.

6-38 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Add User

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-32. Add User

SS481.0

Notes: This is where you can create a new user from the GUI. There are several levels of authorization including admin, configuration, backup, copy services, and monitor. Each user is created with a temporary one-time password that must be changed the first time you log into the DS Storage Manager. The new passwords have several requirements. They must have five alpha letters and one or more numbers, but numbers can not be at the beginning or the end. So, something like passw0rd would be valid, but mike01 would not.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-39

Student Notebook

6-40 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

6.4 Architecture and Logical Configuration Steps

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-41

Student Notebook

Topic: Logical Configuration Steps DS Storage Manager GUI DS Storage Manager Installation Requirements DS Storage Manager GUI Activating Keys and Storage Unit DS Storage Manager Architecture and Logical Configuration Steps Summary of Logical Configuration Differences

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-33. Topic: Logical Configuration Steps

SS481.0

Notes:

6-42 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Recommended Logical Configuration Steps

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-34. Recommended Logical Configuration Steps

SS481.0

Notes: Here is the logical configuration steps process. When you run in simulated mode you must define the hardware you want to work with as you have no way to determine hardware configuration unless you import a configuration from a real DS8000. So, we define the Storage Complex and Storage Units and the number of DDMs or disk enclosures.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-43

Student Notebook

DS Storage Manager Signon

URL : http://localhost:8451/DS8000 or : https://localhost:8452/DS8000 Log as admin/admin (default password has to be changed at fist login). Same look and feel for Real-time and Simulated Managers Same look and feel for DS6000 and DS8000 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-35. DS Storage Manager Signon

SS481.0

Notes: This is the logon screen for the GUI.

6-44 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS Storage Manager Welcome Panel

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-36. DS Storage Manager Welcome Panel

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-45

Student Notebook

Import Configuration File

Imports xml file from a previously created configuration

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-37. Import Configuration File

SS481.0

Notes: This simulated mode GUI allows the user to IMPORT a configuration from the real-time manager.

6-46 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create Storage Complex (DS8000)

Simulated mode only Central management point Settings can affect all subsystems in complex Not required for realtime management from SMC Optional

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-38. Create Storage Complex (DS8000)

SS481.0

Notes: When you work with a simulated configuration, unless you IMPORT an existing configuration, you are not aware of any hardware, so you must create it yourself. The simulated mode GUI allows you to create the hardware configuration you wish to work with. If you are trying to emulate a DS8000 you have ordered, then it is very important to do this step accurately. If you are loading a configuration for practice, then it does not matter what you select.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-47

Student Notebook

Create Storage Complex - Define Properties

Nickname Description Select or create storage unit

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-39. Create Storage Complex – Define Properties

SS481.0

Notes: The name is optional, but it is a good idea to name the complex and give it a short description. There is no storage unit yet, so click the button at the bottom to create it.

6-48 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create Storage Unit - General Information

Simulated mode only Select machine type/model; enter nickname and description Creates storage image (DS8000) © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-40. Create Storage Unit – General Information

SS481.0

Notes: Here you actually get to select the hardware. Select the model and give it a nickname. There is no Storage Complex yet, because we did not finish it, so just click Next at this point.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-49

Student Notebook

Create Storage Unit - Specify DDMs

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-41. Create Storage Unit - Specify DDMs

SS481.0

Notes: This selects the number of DDM packs and the size. These are the 16 disk storage enclosures. You must select and even number and click Add to add them to the storage unit.

6-50 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create Storage Unit Define Licensed Function

Licensed function by capacity © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-42. Create Storage Unit - Define Licensed Function

SS481.0

Notes: If you have ordered features for FlashCopy or PPRC, you must select the size of the licenses you have or specify everything if you are just practicing.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-51

Student Notebook

Create Storage Unit Define Licensed Function (Details)

Licensed function by storage type (FB, CKD or All) © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-43. Create Storage Unit - Define Licensed Function (Details)

SS481.0

Notes: The features don’t have to be for all storage. If they are not, select the storage they apply to. Click OK.

6-52 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create Storage Unit Specify I/O Adapters (DS8000*)

If necessary, FICON/FCP adapter protocol is configured during host definition Storage image automatically created (DS8000) *Storage unit adapter specification unnecessary for DS6000 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-44. Create Storage Unit - Specify I/O Adapters (DS8000*)

SS481.0

Notes: Select the number of host adapters you have ordered or wish to work with.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-53

Student Notebook

Verification

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-45. Verification

SS481.0

Notes: Verify the storage hardware you have defined. Click Finish to define the storage unit. But you are not done; see next slide.

6-54 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Finish Creating the Storage Complex

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-46. Finish Creating the Storage Complex

SS481.0

Notes: The GUI returns you to the Storage Complex Creation panel. Add the storage unit to the storage complex, click next verify the storage complex information and click Finish to define the storage complex. Now you can start creating arrays and ranks and volumes.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-55

Student Notebook

Import Storage Unit

Simulated mode only Import order data file (cfg file from econfig) Next step -- browse for local file on workstation Creates storage image (DS8000) © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-47. Import Storage Unit

SS481.0

Notes: The other way you can do hardware definition is to import a configuration from an existing DS8000 or an econfig .crf file from a sales order.

6-56 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Add Imported Storage Unit to Complex (DS8000)

MODIFY complex to add imported storage unit © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-48. Add Imported Storage Unit to Complex (DS8000)

SS481.0

Notes: Add this storage unit to the complex and click Next.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-57

Student Notebook

Long Running Task Monitor

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-49. Long Running Task Monitor

SS481.0

Notes: Some tasks take a long time to run. You can monitor these tasks with the long-running task monitor screen.

6-58 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create Host System

Server with one or more HBA/WWPN attachments Default definition for Anonymous ESCON Host allows ESCON access (DS8000 only) One user-created host definition is required for FICON access © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-50. Create Host System

SS481.0

Notes: Now that you have a hardware configuration, you can create hosts and volumes to use. Start by creating a host system you wish to attach.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-59

Student Notebook

Create Host System - General Information

Select type, enter nickname and description © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-51. Create Host System – General Information

SS481.0

Notes: Select the host type and give it a nickname and description.

6-60 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create Host System - Define Host Ports

Enter quantity, select protocol Options to group and to define WWPNs Iterative for multiple ports © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-52. Create Host System – Define Host Ports

SS481.0

Notes: Specify the number of ports that are used to connect the system. These can be grouped if they are always used together. This makes them into a port group which can be added to a host attachment. You can also select the box to identify the WWPNs for the ports.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-61

Student Notebook

Host Attachment Identifier Example Host_6|pSeries|FcSf(2)_0 Host_6 - Nickname (default) pSeries - host type FcSf - FC-Switched (2) - two HBAs in a port group _0 - first definition with these characteristics This identifier represents one host attachment Limited to a single volume group

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-53. Host Attachment Identifier Example

SS481.0

Notes: The host attachment IDs created.

6-62 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create Host System - Specify WWPN

Optional – WWPNs can be selected later using the real-time manager

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-54. Create Host System - Specify WWPN

SS481.0

Notes: The WWPNs can be added in this panel. The DS8000 does not discover WWPNs that are attached, so it is best to display the WWPN from the host or FC switch GUI and paste it into the box.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-63

Student Notebook

Create Host System Specify Storage Image (DS8000*)

Iterative for multiple storage images (DS8000) Single host definition can be applied to multiple subsystems Note: Storage image actions apply to the storage unit for DS6000 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-55. Create Host System - Specify Storage Image (DS8000*)

SS481.0

Notes: Add the storage image to the host definition. Single host definitions can be applied to multiple subsystems. *Note: Storage image actions applies to the storage unit for DS6000.

6-64 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create Host System Specify Storage Image Parameters

If ports unconfigured must configure before assignment to host attachment Select host attachment and allow access to storage I/O ports Option to select or create volume group for host attachment

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-56. Create Host System – Specify Storage Image Parameters

SS481.0

Notes: The port must be configured to be used in a host attachment, so select the Configure I/O ports and set them to Scsi_Fcp for Open systems. The host attachment can be used as part of a volume group, if volumes exist, but at this point we have not defined the volumes yet, so just select the configured ports and apply them to the host attachment definition.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-65

Student Notebook

Format I/O Ports

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-57. Format I/O Ports

SS481.0

Notes: Select the ports you wish to configure and the type of FcSf for switched fabric.

6-66 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Warning

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-58. Warning

SS481.0

Notes: Click Continue.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-67

Student Notebook

Host Attachment Selection

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-59. Host Attachment Selection

SS481.0

Notes: Verify that the ports you selected have been configured with the correct attachment type.

6-68 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create Array

Eight DDMs in a RAID5 or RAID10 array DS8000 – one array site (eight DDMs) DS6000 – two array sites (four DDMs each)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-60. Create Array

SS481.0

Notes: OK, so now we can create an array. Select Configure Storage and Arrays. If there are none displayed, go to the Actions menu and select Create, and click Go.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-69

Student Notebook

Create Array – Definition Method

Two methods – auto or custom

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-61. Create Array – Definition Method

SS481.0

Notes: You can do this manually or automatically. If all the arrays are to be the same then use automatic. You are asked to select the quantity of arrays you wish to create. An array is created from an array site which already exists. They are groups of eight disks selected from two different disk enclosures, one from the front on one FC-AL loop and one from the rear on the other FC-AL loop. Arrays are therefore configured as arrays across loops or AAL by default. You do not have a choice in the drives that are selected as the array site.

6-70 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create Array - Auto

Specify quantity of arrays by drive types Select RAID type Algorithm chooses array site © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-62. Create Array - Auto

SS481.0

Notes: Choose the RAID type for the array. This is all that is set at this time. The format of the array, FB or CKD comes later. Click Next. You can choose RAID 5 or RAID 10.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-71

Student Notebook

Add Arrays to Ranks

One RAID array becomes one CKD or FB rank Optional – ranks can be created at another time

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-63. Add Arrays to Ranks

SS481.0

Notes: This is where you can choose the format. The arrays are placed in ranks. This is a new step, because in the ESS the format was done at the same time. Check the box and click Next. Verify the option and click Finish, and your arrays and ranks are created. If you don’t check the box then the create ranks step must be done separately.

6-72 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create Array - Custom

Select RAID type Select array sites Next step -- option to add arrays to ranks © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-64. Create Array - Custom

SS481.0

Notes: Back at the Custom array creation, you have to choose your arrays sites manually. Click Next.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-73

Student Notebook

Create Extent Pool

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-65. Create Extent Pool

SS481.0

Notes: The extent pool is where we get server affinity. In the ESS, server affinity was already established by the hardware location. Even arrays were served by Cluster 1 and odd arrays were served by Cluster 2. In the DS8000, any array can be serviced by any server, so be careful. It is possible to configure the DS8000 so that all arrays are being accessed by only one of the servers and the other server is idle. This is not a good idea.

6-74 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create Extent Pool - Auto (1 of 2)

Two methods – auto or custom Auto User specifies storage type, RAID type and amount of space Algorithm selects ranks and server © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-66. Create Extent Pool – Auto (1 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: The extent pool definition has two methods as well. The automatic method creates two extent pools and place even ranks in extent pool 0 and odd ranks in extent pool 1. This may have a negative result when defining volumes as many ranks are not used unless all the storage is defined. We recommend that the extent pools be defined manually for this reason. Also, when using the GUI, the ranks are selected and assigned to the extent pool as part of the creation of the extent pool. If you configure using the DSCLI the process is different from that once the extent pools are created. You must assign the ranks to them using a different command called chrank.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-75

Student Notebook

Create Extent Pool - Auto (2 of 2)

Specify nickname, storage type, RAID type, amount of storage © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-67. Create Extent Pool - Auto (2 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: This is where you can define the parameters for your extent pool. An extent pool name is optional, but gives you a better idea what kind of storage it contains if you work out a naming convention. Storage type, RAID type, and RPM may be factors that you would want to be aware of when selecting a pool to allocate a volume. You may want to select the specific ranks to place in the extent pool, so leave the box unchecked at the bottom of the screen.

6-76 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create Extent Pool - Reserve Storage

Option to reserve a percentage of storage in the extent pool

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-68. Create Extent Pool – Reserve Storage

SS481.0

Notes: The reserved storage is an optional parameter that reserves a percentage of the extent pool.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-77

Student Notebook

Create Extent Pool - Verification

All tasks allows verification before committing changes

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-69. Create Extent Pool - Verification

SS481.0

Notes: Verify that the extent pool is set up the way you desire. Click Finish to complete the definition.

6-78 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create Extent Pool - Custom Define Properties

Custom Select Server 0 or Server 1 Select ranks (on next panel) © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-70. Create Extent Pool - Custom Define Properties

SS481.0

Notes: This is the custom define. Select the other server. You want to make sure you have extent pools for both servers to distribute the workload.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-79

Student Notebook

Create Extent Pool - Custom Select Ranks

Next step -- option to reserve storage

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-71. Create Extent Pool – Custom Select Ranks

SS481.0

Notes: This panel allows you to select the ranks you want to use in each extent pool.

6-80 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create FB Volume

Min LUN size 0.1 GB Min allocation remains one extent Max LUN size 2 TB LUN can be larger than rank size if multiple ranks in extent pool iSeries -- 8.56, 17.54, 35.1, 70.56, 141.12, 282.25

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-72. Create FB Volume

SS481.0

Notes: This panel is for defining volumes. The minimum LUN size is 1 GB, but the storage manager allocates an extent for the volume. To keep from wasting space, allocate volumes of even GB boundaries to use an even number of extents.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-81

Student Notebook

Create FB Volume – Select Extent Pool

Only odd or even LSSs are available depending on extent pool selection (due to extent pool server affinity)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-73. Create FB Volume – Select Extent Pool

SS481.0

Notes: Under the Simulated Manager, expand the Open Systems section and click Volumes. Click Create from the Select Action pull-down and click Go. Follow the panel directions with each advancing window. Choose the extent pool from which you wish to configure the volumes and click Next.

6-82 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create FB Volume Define Volume Characteristics

Volume type Open systems, iSeries protected, iSeries unprotected Optionally select volume group or create new group © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-74. Create FB Volume – Define Volume Characteristics

SS481.0

Notes: You can select the volume RAID type and storage type and even add the volume to a volume group if one exists. Click Next when you are ready to continue.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-83

Student Notebook

Create FB Volume - Define Volume Properties

Quantity and size Only odd LSSs shown due to extent pool association with server 1 LSS selection creates FB LSS and determines addressing © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-75. Create FB Volume – Define Volume Properties

SS481.0

Notes: The volume can be made in any LSS. Even LSS requires an extent pool from server 0 and odd LSS requires Server 1. Select the quantity and size of the volumes. The volume is created in binary GB and can be any valid size from .1 GB to 2 TBs, depending on host requirements. Volume can only be made as large as the number of extents in the FB extent pool, however, you can place multiple ranks into an extent pool to provide enough extent for a large volume. Extents are currently not striped across multiple ranks in an extent pool, but allocated sequentially from the first rank to the last rank.

6-84 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create FB Volume - Create Volume Nicknames

Optionally generate sequence based on prefix and/or suffix

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-76. Create FB Volume – Create Volume Nicknames

SS481.0

Notes: This panel allows the user to define a set of nicknames for the volumes. This is for reporting purposes and to help identify the volume use. Nicknames could have associations with the applications that run on them.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-85

Student Notebook

Create FB Volume Group

New method of LUN masking Maps LUNs and host attachments (HBAs)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-77. Create FB Volume Group

SS481.0

Notes: Many times a set of volumes is defined for a particular host or application. When using these volumes, they are always connected together to the same host or group of hosts. Leaving out a volume would cause problems, so it is desired to keep this group of volumes together at all times. The volume group is used to achieve this in the configuration of the DS8000. Create a volume group and add volumes to the group. Optionally add the host connection to the same group, and you have a performed what has also been called LUN masking or LUN/Host partitioning.

6-86 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create FB Volume Group - Define Properties

Limits allowed host types Same blocksize and addressing mode © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-78. Create FB Volume Group – Define Properties

SS481.0

Notes: This panel lets you define the volume group properties and host type.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-87

Student Notebook

Create FB Volume Group Select Host Attachments

Limited by allowed host types specified in previous step and host definitions created earlier Optional – may be defined later © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-79. Create FB Volume Group – Select Host Attachments

SS481.0

Notes: The host attachment can be defined to be associated with the group of volumes which attach to it. This creates an association with the volumes and the host ports connecting them together.

6-88 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create FB Volume Group - Select Volumes

Compatible with host types specified in volume group properties (Status information available in realtime mode only)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-80. Create FB Volume Group – Select Volumes

SS481.0

Notes: In this panel you get to select the volumes that are part of the volume group.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-89

Student Notebook

Help for Arrays

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-81. Help for Arrays

SS481.0

Notes: This is the DS8000 Information Center GUI. It can be launched separately and is very detailed. It has many of the user manuals in full text in the contents.

6-90 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS Storage Manager Summary

Easy-to-use, powerful and flexible Wizards, Filters, Sorts, Hyperlinks, Copy/Paste

Includes optional automated methods Similar look and feel for both DS6000 and DS8000 Similar look and feel for both realtime and simulated modes

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-82. DS Storage Manager Summary

SS481.0

Notes: This is the Welcome screen and entry panel for the DS8000 Storage Manager, although the DS6000 Storage Manager would look the same and has the same look and feel.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-91

Student Notebook

6-92 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

6.5 Summary of Logical Configuration Differences

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-93

Student Notebook

Topic: Summary of Logical Configuration Differences DS Storage Manager GUI DS Storage Manager Installation Requirements DS Storage Manager Architecture and Logical Configuration Steps Summary of Logical Configuration Differences

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-83. Topic: Summary of Logical Configuration Differences

SS481.0

Notes:

6-94 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Summary of Logical Configuration Differences (1 of 2) IBM TotalStorage DS8000 Storage Manager only Internal DS MC ESCON Storage Image (LPAR) Storage I/O adapter specification (for example, SW, LW, ESCON) during Create Storage Unit User-defined storage complex Storage complex nickname

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-84. Summary of Logical Configuration Differences (1 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: These are the major difference between the DS8000 and DS6000 Storage Manager functions.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-95

Student Notebook

Summary of Logical Configuration Differences (2 of 2) IBM TotalStorage DS6000 Storage Manager only Assign Storage Unit Set up communication between DS MC and DS6000

Define peer Redundant DS MC

Express Configuration Open systems, iSeries, zSeries

Mirrored write cache Enabled by default Can be disabled during standard open systems LUN creation Required for iSeries LUNs (enabled by default and can’t be disabled)

Configure date/time and notifications

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-85. Summary of Logical Configuration Differences (2 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: The DS6000 must have the Storage unit assigned to be able to retrieve the Machine signature and activate the license keys required to install the unit and get thing working. This function can only be done using the GUI, the DSCLI has no command for this operation. The DS6000 has no internal management console, so the SMC software must be installed on an external workstation and if redundancy is required, then it should be installed on two workstations and you can define an alternate SMC. The DS6000 has an express configuration mode that simplifies the configuration of storage and LUNs if the customer wants to get up and running quickly and has no particular requirements other than to define some LUNs to use for hosts. The DS6000 has two controllers and you can mirror the cache from server0 to server 1.

6-96 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000/DS6000 and ESS Differences LSS changes Increased numbers of LSSs No predetermined relation to ranks Extent pools (Ranks, LSSs, volumes) Server affinity (Server0 or Server1) Can include both 3380s and 3390s Volume changes Increased numbers of volumes Increased volume size (can be larger than a rank) Dynamic Volume Deletion Nicknames Volume groups (Host attachments, volumes) LUN masking LUN sharing Host port grouping Offline configuration (initial configuration and modifications) Configuration backup and cloning Multiple Storage Images in a single Storage Unit User roles

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-86. DS8000/DS6000 and ESS Differences

SS481.0

Notes: These are is some of the differences between the ESS and the DS8000. The obvious things are the increased number of LSS and volume addressing and the new terms such as ranks and extent pools. Users can delete volumes dynamically, which was not possible with the ESS. Also, you can mix 3380 and 3390 volumes in a CKD extent pool. That’s huge, because in the ESS you had to define a entire array to the 3380 devices. You can also group ports together and have that as one unit to deal with a host. The other major difference is the graphical interface is not as graphical as the ESS Specialist. The newness of the interface and for those familiar with the ESS Specialist, it may not seem as intuitive. There is offline configuration and upload and download of configuration files. This is not available in the ESS Copy Services, although not as graphical in nature it has a much more productive set of commands and functions.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-97

Student Notebook

DS Storage Manager Logical Configuration Summary New capabilities Increased number of logical volumes More LSSs/LCUs -- no longer tied to single rank

Increased logical volume size Not limited by rank size

Volumes can be individually deleted Configuration can be downloaded in spreadsheet format More granularity of user roles Nicknames Realtime and Simulated Important planning considerations LSSs Extent Pools Volume sizes Volume Groups

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-87. DS Storage Manager Logical Configuration Summary

SS481.0

Notes: These are some of the new capabilities.

6-98 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Express Configuration (DS6000)

Create volumes and volume groups Open systems iSeries zSeries – includes LCU

Define hosts and assign to volume groups Arrays, ranks, extent pools will be automatically created

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-88. Express Configuration (DS6000)

SS481.0

Notes: This is the Express Configuration wizard that saves you a lot of time.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-99

Student Notebook

Express Configuration Volume Creation - Open Systems Select RAID type Either 5 or 10 Amount of Unused Storage to Configure A pull-down list: 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%. User Defined: users specifies GBs to configure Volume Size The user selects the size they would like each volume to be, and the system computes the number of volumes The smallest volume size is one GB Volume Quantity When selected, the user can type in the number of volumes they wish to create System can automatically calculate quantity based upon previous selections Create Host (optional) Checkbox, if selected, takes the user to the Host Creation Wizard after Volume Creation is complete © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-89. Express Configuration Volume Creation – Open Systems

SS481.0

Notes: Select RAID type • Either 5 or 10 Amount of Unused Storage to Configure • A pull-down list: 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%. • User Defined: users specifies GBs to configure Volume Size • The user selects the size they would like each volume to be, and the system computes the number of volumes • The smallest volume size is one GB Volume Quantity • When selected, the user can type in the number of volumes they wish to create • System can automatically calculate quantity based upon previous selections

6-100 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create Host (optional) • Checkbox, if selected, takes the user to the Host Creation Wizard after volume creation is complete.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-101

Student Notebook

Express Configuration - Volume Naming

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-90. Express Configuration - Volume Naming

SS481.0

Notes: Set the nicknames for the volumes to be created.

6-102 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Express Configuration - Volume Group

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-91. Express Configuration - Volume Group

SS481.0

Notes: Add the volumes to the volume groups.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-103

Student Notebook

Express Configuration - Host Creation

Host type Nickname Description © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-92. Express Configuration - Host Creation

SS481.0

Notes: Define the host attachments.

6-104 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Express Configuration - Host Ports

HBA quantity HBA protocol Fibre channel switched Fibre channel arbitrated loop

Option to group ports © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-93. Express Configuration - Host Ports

SS481.0

Notes: Define the host ports.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-105

Student Notebook

Express Configuration - Host WWPNs

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-94. Express Configuration -- Host WWPNs

SS481.0

Notes: Define the WWPNs for the host ports.

6-106 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Express Configuration Assign Host to Volume Group

Open and iSeries hosts only Allows host mapping to previously defined volume group © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-95. Express Configuration -- Assign Host to Volume Group

SS481.0

Notes: This panel has Open and iSeries-only volume input controls which allow the user to map the earlier defined volume group to the newly created host attachment. The user needs to select the option to map the host attachment to volume group, then select Next. Volume and host attachment information is given.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-107

Student Notebook

Other Configuration Tasks License activation keys (obtained from DSFA Web site) Apply configuration from simulated configurator User administration

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-96. Other Configuration Tasks

SS481.0

Notes:

6-108 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Storage Image (DS8000*) Apply Activation Keys

Real-time mode only Next step -- enter keys for operating environment and advanced functions, or import .xml file previously downloaded from DSFA Web site *For DS6000, apply keys to Storage Unit (Configure Storage Unit) © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-97. Storage Image (DS8000*) – Apply Activation Keys

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-109

Student Notebook

Storage Image (DS8000*) Apply Configuration

Simulated mode only Logical configuration created offline is applied via the network *For DS6000, apply configuration to Storage Unit © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-98. Storage Image (DS8000*) - Apply Configuration

SS481.0

Notes:

6-110 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Apply Configuration Select Application Method

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-99. Apply Configuration – Select Application Method

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-111

Student Notebook

Apply Configuration - Select Storage Complex

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-100. Apply Configuration – Select Storage Complex

SS481.0

Notes:

6-112 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Apply Configuration - Authenticate

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-101. Apply Configuration - Authenticate

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-113

Student Notebook

Apply Configuration - Select Storage Unit

Next step -- select storage image (DS8000) Logical configuration activation is complete! © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-102. Apply Configuration – Select Storage Unit

SS481.0

Notes:

6-114 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Manage Configuration Files

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-103. Manage Configuration Files

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-115

Student Notebook

User Administration

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-104. User Administration

SS481.0

Notes:

6-116 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Add User

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-105. Add User

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-117

Student Notebook

Help for Arrays

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-106. Help for Arrays

SS481.0

Notes:

6-118 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Checkpoint Exercise -- Unit 6 - Checkpoint 1. T/F The DS8000 is a GUI interface that must be installed on a customer workstation to use the 0DS800 Storage Manager 2. T/F The DS8000 Storage Manager can be online or offline. 3. T/F The DS8000 Storage Manager can create configuration files which can be downloaded to the DS8000 subsystem and used to configure the DS8000. 4. T/F The DS8000 Storage manager is the only way available to configure the DS8000. 5. T/F The DS8000 Storage Manager is a common software package for both the DS6000 and the DS8000 Storage Subsystems.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 6. DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-119

Student Notebook

Unit Summary Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Describe the DS6000/DS8000 Hardware Management Console Describe the internal Ethernet switches in the DS8000 storage unit Describe how to access the setup of the HMC Describe the network topology Describe the VPN consideration and setup Describe the network restrictions when access the HMC or the DS8000 storage servers

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 6-107. Unit Summary

SS481.0

Notes:

6-120 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Center Utility What This Unit Is About The throughput provided by the new DS8000 series is intended to enable customers to configure large storage systems without limited throughput capabilities. As a point of comparison, the DS8100 can provide up to three times the throughput of the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server (ESS) Model 800, and the DS8300 can provide up to seven times the Model 800' throughput, depending on workload. This can enable customers to consider consolidating as many as 16 Model 800, or similar, storage systems into a single storage system. For customers who have concerns about running both test and production applications in the same system, or perhaps z/OS and open systems applications together, certain configurations of the DS8300 offer the capability to partition the storage system into two Storage System LPARs. This can allow isolation and protection of mission-critical workloads within the same physical DS8300. Previously, the only way to accomplish this was through the implementation of multiple physical storage arrays, raising the possibility of significantly greater costs.

What You Should Be Able to Do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Describe the current measured DS8000 performance charts • Describe the purpose of the TotalStorage Productivity Center TPC 2.3 • Be able to install and use the PDCU Data Collection Utility - Performance Data Collection Utility (PDCU) - Installation and use - Reports

How You Will Check Your Progress Accountability: • Checkpoint

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-1

Student Notebook

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you should be able to understand: Current measured DS8000 performance charts Current measured DS6000 performance charts The TotalStorage Productivity Center TPC 2.3 Performance Data Collection Utility (PDCU) Installation and use Reports

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-1. Unit Objectives

SS481.0

Notes: The objectives unit gives you an overview of the performance numbers for a DS8000 and DS6000 and a look at how to collect performance information using a PDCU data collection tool for TPC.

7-2

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

7.1 DS8000 Performance

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-3

Student Notebook

Topic: DS8000 Performance DS8000 Performance DS6000 Performance TotalStorage Productivity Center (TPC) and Productivity Data Center Utility (PDCU)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-2. Topic: DS8000 Performance

SS481.0

Notes:

7-4

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Host Adapter Performance - Single Port - Near linear scaling to four ports / host adapter 4 K ops/sec per host port

Sequential throughput per host port

38000

40

250

206

200

30

145 ESS 800 DS8300 DS8100

17500 20

10

MB/sec

Thousands

Uempty

150

ESS 800 DS8100

100 50

0

0

Figure 2

Figure 1

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-3. Host Adapter Performance - Single Port

SS481.0

Notes: Each of the hardware components was designed or selected to support dramatically improved bandwidth. For example, the improvement in single port random throughput is demonstrated above. The Fibre Channel per-port random throughput doubles that of the ESS 800. Note that in today's marketplace, many enterprise disk storage systems handle only 17,000 to 18,000 ops/sec, whereas a single port with the new DS8300 can handle 38,000.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-5

Student Notebook

Maximum Total System IOPS/sec, Open and z/OS Max IOPS/sec open 4

Max IOPS/sec zOS 236500

250

3400000

200

ESS 800 DS8300

2

1

Thousands

Millions

3 150 100

ESS 800 DS8300

68500

50

105000 0

0 Figure 4

Figure 3

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-4. Maximum Total System IOPS/sec, Open and z/OS

SS481.0

Notes: Recognizing that 100% cache read hits is not a real-life production workload, it can still be a useful indicator of overheads, front-end and cache efficiency. The DS8300 scales up to 128 Fibre Channel or FICON ports, yielding total box maximum throughput of 3.4 million IOPS/sec; in the graph above. This is roughly a 34-fold increase for open systems attachment over the ESS 800. Consider Figure 3, which shows maximum RAID array bandwidth for simultaneous multiple open sequential streams. Figure 4 shows maximum RAID array bandwidth for simultaneous multiple z/OS sequential streams.

7-6

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Sequential Bandwidth -- 4X array bandwidth improvement! Single stream bandwidth

Single array bandwidth

z/OS QSAM Bufno=5 Read

Multiple streams 250 200

M800 no AAL M800 AAL DS8100

150 100

Seq Write

0

Seq Read

50

Throughput (MB/sec)

300

MB/sec

Uempty

142

150 100

ESS 800 DS8100

43 50 0

Figure 6

Figure 5

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-5. Sequential Bandwidth

SS481.0

Notes: The maximum RAID array bandwidth nearly touches 250 MB/sec, which is a threefold increase compared to the ESS Model 800 and its competitors. So, the DS8000 can provide substantially greater throughput for a single logical volume or LUN, meaning that a single logical volume or LUN can sustain far greater demand while maintaining good performance. In Figure 6 the z/OS single stream bandwidth is also three times that of the ESS Model 800.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-7

Student Notebook

Total Disk System Sequential Bandwidth

2000

MB/sec

1500

1000

500

0

Read BW

ESS 800

Write BW

DS8100

Figure 7 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-6. Total Disk System Sequential Bandwidth

SS481.0

Notes: Figure 7 indicates total disk system sequential bandwidth for the DS8100, the two-way model, compared to its predecessor the ESS 800. The DS8100 achieves essentially 2 GB/sec, a more than threefold increase compared to the ESS 800. Sequential bandwidth is the most frequent limit to growing a disk system' capacity, and this robust throughput enables a user to configure a DS8100 with 20 TB of physical disk capacity and potentially much more with proper workload evaluation and capacity planning. The hardware infrastructure for the DS8300 doubles most of the components for the DS8100, with two switched fibre interconnects rather than one. This supports double the total system sequential throughput. A rule of thumb for the DS8000 is that the sequential bandwidth is the same number in GB/sec as the number of the processors; that is, the 2-way delivers 2 GB/sec, the 4-way 4 GB/sec, and so forth. IBM has previewed plans to introduce an 8-way machine with 8 GB/sec total sequential throughput in 2005. Since IBM currently delivers a 64-way POWER5 processor, IBM can scale these machines far greater than the current customer demand for throughput in a single footprint.

7-8

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

z/OS Cache Standard Workload 15

Response Time (ms)

Uempty

10 ESS 800 128 15K DS8100 128 10K DS8300 256 10K

5

0 0

10000

20000

30000

40000

50000

60000

SIOs/sec Figure 8

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-7. z/OS Cache Standard Workload

SS481.0

Notes: For many customers database workloads are their most important, representing their most critical data vital to their business operations. For understanding the performance of such workloads with the DS8000 we present the cache standard workload for z/OS and 70/30/50, an open systems OLTP benchmark. Those workloads are described below. Figure 8 compares the performance of the ESS 800 with turbo 2 option implemented, the DS8100, and the DS8300 for the cache standard workload. Cache standard workloads in this example are 73% read hit ratio with around a 3:1 read-to-write ratio, and a 4 KB average transfer size.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-9

Student Notebook

Open Systems 70/30/50 Workload ESS 800 and DS8100

Response Time (ms)

15

10

ESS 800 128 10K ESS 800 128 15K DS8100 128 10K 5

0 0

10000

20000

30000

40000

Throughput (IO/sec) Figure 9 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-8. Open Systems 70/30/50 Workload ESS 800 and DS8100

SS481.0

Notes: Figure 9 shows a graph of a similar study, the 70/30/50 workload run in an AIX (that is, UNIX-based) environment. Workload is again 30% write and but only 50% RHR.

7-10 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Global Mirror Write Overhead for Transfer 4 K write hit 6

5.5 Disc time (ms)

Uempty

4

4

2

1.3

1.15

0 RAMAC

0.8

0.53

0.38

ESS F20 ESCON ESS 800 ESCON DS8100 RVA ESS F20 FICON ESS 800 FICON Figure 13 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-9. Global Mirror Write Overhead for Transfer

SS481.0

Notes: Figure 13 demonstrates how IBM has improved PPRC overheads over successive generations of disk storage system. The bars represent PPRC write overhead added in (as disconnect time) for the transfer to secondary at campus distances. This quite simply yields synchronous remote copy performance second to none. Even with the ESS 800, some Metro Mirror customers experience average response time for production database workloads of 800 microseconds (0.8 ms). With the DS8000 that has the potential to improve more, yielding even faster transaction response time.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-11

Student Notebook

ESS 800 PPRC versus DS8000 Global Mirror z/OS Cache Standard Workload

14 Turbo II Base (No PPRC) Turbo II (2) FCP Links, 0 km Turbo II (2) FCP Links, 303 km DS8100 (2) FCP Links, 0 km DS8100 Base (No PPRC) DS8100 (2) FCP CN2000, 303 km

Response Time (ms)

12 10 8 6 4 2 0 0

8000

16000

24000

32000

40000

48000

Throughput (IO/sec) 8 FICON Express 2 Gb/sec Host Attach Cache Standard Workload: R/W = 3, RHR = 0.74, Dstg. = 11.6%, Xfer = 4 KB 128 DDMs RAID 5 - 3 PAV Aliases/Base

Figure 14 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-10. ESS 800 PPRC versus DS8000 Global Mirror

SS481.0

Notes: The Global Mirror performance has always been a hindering factor to customers because of the potential performance hit that would be taken to implement the Metro Mirror function also called PPRC-Sync into the production workload. Figure 14 compares the performance response times of the ESS-800 Turbo with FCP links to the DS8100 with FCP links at 0 km and 303 km. Truly, the lines on this chart would indicate that the differences are minimal and running this type of function in production environments is not going to severely hold up production workloads as have previous implementations of this technology.

7-12 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

FlashCopy Performance Improvements with DS8000 Background Copy Datarate Single Volume Copy

Elapsed Time Establish 256 3390-3 vols 8

120

7

7

104

100

6 5

FC V1 FC V2 DS8100

4 3

80 MB/sec

Elapsed Time (Sec)

Uempty

60 34.5

40 1.2

2

15.7

0.6

20

1 0

0 Figure 16

Figure 15 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-11. FlashCopy Performance Improvements with DS8000

SS481.0

Notes: Faster microprocessors in the device adapters and greater back-end bandwidth contribute to significant FlashCopy performance improvements. Establish times, already quick with the ESS 800, are cut in half migrating to the DS8100, and the background copy data rate is nearly tripled.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-13

Student Notebook

7-14 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

7.2 DS6000 Performance

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-15

Student Notebook

Topic: DS6000 Performance DS8000 Performance DS6000 Performance TotalStorage Productivity Center (TPC) and Productivity Data Center Utility (PDCU)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-12. Topic: DS6000 Performance

SS481.0

Notes:

7-16 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

How Migrating to DS6800 Might Affect Hit Ratios ESS 800 RHR 16 GB cache 0.95 0.90 0.80 0.70

Configuration: num of drives * 32 * 146 32GB * 73 GB

DS6800 RHR 4 GB cache 0.90 0.80 0.60 0.40

Cache-to-backstore ratio .0007 .0014 .0028

16 * 73 GB

Hit Ratio / Max IO (Lim) 22% 8.4 K 43% 10.2 K (HDD) (HDD) 59% 5.8 K (HDD)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-13. How Migrating to DS6800 Might Affect Hit Ratios

SS481.0

Notes: One possible consequence of migrating to the DS6800 from an ESS-800 would be a lower cache hit ratio, especially if the cache size in the ESS-800 is much larger than the 4 GB in the DS6800. The chart above shows the drop in cache hit ratios if the ESS-800 had 16 GB of cache and the workload was migrated to the DS6800.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-17

Student Notebook

Cache Read Hit Performance - 512 Byte 350 300

Throughput (KIOPs)

250 DS6800 ESS 750 DS4500 EMC CX700

200 150 100 50 0 Cached Reads - 512 bytes © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-14. Cache Read Hit Performance - 512 Byte

SS481.0

Notes: The cache hit performance of the DS6800 displays exceptionally good performance in comparison to several other subsystems of similar size and configuration. In the chart above, the DS6800 is compared to an EMC CX700 and a DS4500 or FastT900, and an ESS-750 when doing small block I/Os. The DS6800 is five-fold better than the ESS, three times that of the DS4500, and almost twice the performance of the EMC CX700.

7-18 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Cache Read Hit Performance - 64 KB 2000

Throughput (MB/sec)

Uempty

1500 DS6800 ESS 750 DS4500 EMC CX700

1000

500

0 Cached Reads - 64 KB

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-15. Cache Read Hit Performance - 64 KB

SS481.0

Notes: For larger blocks the DS6800 still displays the best performance, but the others subsystems, particularly the EMC, much better. This is a true throughput chart. Unlike the last, this is big block, 64 KB transfers, and we are measuring throughput of cached reads of these large data blocks so we get to see how the DS6800 stacks up against the ESS and DS4500.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-19

Student Notebook

DS6800 Cache Read Hit Performance (Max IOPs) 350000 322724

319910

300000 275925

Throughput (IO/sec)

250000 1 Port 2 Port 4 Port 8 Port

200000 150000 100000 50000 0 512 byte

2KB

4KB

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-16. DS6800 Cache Read Hit Performance (Max IOPs)

SS481.0

Notes:

7-20 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

DS6800 Cache Read Hit Response Time 1.2 1

1

Response Time (ms)

Uempty

0.8 0.68

ESS 750 DS6800

0.6 0.4

0.34

0.3

0.23

0.2

0.2 0

512 byte

4KB

64KB

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-17. DS6800 Cache Read Hit Response Time

SS481.0

Notes: The chart above shows the DS6800 does get a little better response time for small or large blocks than the ESS.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-21

Student Notebook

DS6800 OLTP Workloads (RAID5)

Response Time (ms)

64 x 73 GB 15 KRPM Disks (8 Ranks) 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ESS 750 70/30/50 DS6800 70/30/50

0

2000

4000

6000

8000

10000

12000

Throughput (IO/sec) Note: ESS 750 results used 72.8 GB 15 KRPM disks for comparison purposes only. This is not a supported configuration on the ESS 750.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-18. DS6800 OLTP Workloads (RAID5)

SS481.0

Notes: The response time of the ESS 750 is compared to the DS6800 for OLTP processing a typical 70/30/50 workload. The systems are pretty similar until about 7000 I/Os per second and then the ESS gets lower response times.

7-22 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

DS6800 4 KB Read Miss Performance

60 5271

50 Response Time (ms)

Uempty

40

3486

7092

1886

30 20

1 Rank 2 Ranks 3 Ranks 4 ranks

10 0 0

1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 Throughput (IO/sec)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-19. DS6800 4 KB Read Miss Performance

SS481.0

Notes: The chart above supports the idea that more is better. More ranks, more disks, better performance. Somewhat predictable, but the chart does illustrate the point.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-23

Student Notebook

Full Box 64 KB Sequential Performance 600

Throughput (MB/sec)

500 400 300

DS6800 (16 disks) ESS 750 (56 disks) DS4500 (96 disks)

200 100 0 Seq. Rd from Disk

Seq. Wr. to Disk

Notes: All writes are mirrored in cache Number of disks listed does not include spare disks

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-20. Full Box 64 KB Sequential Performance

SS481.0

Notes: Again, more is better. The DS4500 with 96 disks does better than the DS6800 with 16. However, the DS6800 does outperform the ESS-750 with seven 8-packs or 56 DDMs. The internal bandwidth of the DS6800 does well on big blocks and sequential workloads.

7-24 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Single Stream 64 KB Sequential Performance 90 80 70 Throughput (MB/sec)

Uempty

60 50

DS6800 ESS 750 DS4500

40 30 20 10 0 Seq. Rd from Disk - 1 Stream

Seq. Wr. to Disk - 1 Stream

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-21. Single Stream 64 KB Sequential Performance

SS481.0

Notes: Now the single stream rate shows the effect of the switched FC DDMs over SSA in the ESS-750 or FC-AL in the DS4500. Sequential read is over 80 MB/sec from a single disk and 50 MB/sec on writes.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-25

Student Notebook

7-26 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

7.3 TotalStorage Productivity Center (TPC) and Productivity Data Center Utility (PDCU)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-27

Student Notebook

Topic: TotalStorage Productivity Center (TPC) and Productivity Data Center Utility (PDCU) DS8000 Performance DS6000 Performance TotalStorage Productivity Center (TPC) and Productivity Data Center Utility (PDCU)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-22. Topic: TotalStorage Productivity Center (TPC) and Productivity Data Center Utility (PDCU)

SS481.0

Notes: The TotalStorage Productivity Center is in the process of being upgraded to support the DS8000. In the interim, there is a utility which can be used to manually collect performance data and produce report to help measure the performance of the DS8000.

7-28 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Storage Infrastructure Management Managing IBM TotalStorage DS Family Productivity Center for Fabric

ESS Expert

Productivity Center for

Productivity Center for Data

Disk

TotalStorage Productivity Center Standard Edition Version 2 Release 3

ESS

ESS

DS8000 DS6000

DS4000

SVC

Integrating storage management to provide a single point of control © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-23. Storage Infrastructure Management

SS481.0

Notes: The TPC product is an IBM product which is designed to help manage the storage and SAN infrastructure and provide reporting and monitoring capability for users of IBM and non-IBM products. The diagram above gives us an idea of the three major components of TPC which the Productivity Center for Data is the replacement for the current ESS Expert.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-29

Student Notebook

Overview of TPC V2R3 Theme 1: Provide management support for DS8000 and DS6000 Productivity center for data Discovery and asset/capacity reporting

Productivity center for fabric Unique ICONs for DS8000 and DS6000 Launch DS Storage Manager UI Topology views for SAN fabric, LUNs, hosts

Productivity center for disk Discovery and performance management Device management

Theme 2: Productivity center for replication support for TotalStorage Significant improvements in scalability, removal of current limitations Ability to manage ESS model 800 attached to z/OS Support for ESS model 800 and SAN volume controller FlashCopy and Metro Mirror – administration and management of copy sessions

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-24. Overview of TPC V2R3

SS481.0

Notes: The Productivity Center for Data is the replacement for the TotalStorage ESS Expert. This product has been in development and, support for the ESS, and is currently being developed for the DS6000 and DS8000. During the interim to its release a component of TPC is being used to collect data from DS6000 and DS8000 for performance reporting. We look at this utility called PDCU in this section.

7-30 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

The Performance Data Collection Utility (PDCU) A tactical offering for early adopters of DS8000 and DS6000 Collects performance metrics for offline analysis Quickly available for customer usage during DS8000 and DS6000 implementation and rollouts Sample Excel macro provided to map the data Strategic solution is TPC standard edition Productivity center for disk Graphical performance management (gauges, thresholds) Supports ESS model 800, DS8000, DS6000 and SVC Storage configuration (including zoning, LUN allocation)

Productivity center for data Asset and capacity reporting File systems and database management Chargeback capability

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-25. The Performance Data Collection Utility (PDCU)

SS481.0

Notes: The Performance Data Collection Utility (PDCU) can be used to gather and output basic configuration information and performance statistics for the IBM DS8000 and DS6000 model storage devices. This information is gathered by connecting to the DS Network Interface running on the DS8000 HMC or DS6000.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-31

Student Notebook

PDCU Scope Performance data collection utility for DS8000 and DS6000 Support one DS8000 and DS6000 at a time Can run multiple instances of the utility to allow monitoring of multiple (at least three fully configured) DS8000 and DS6000 devices Parameters and documentation supports multiple data files PDCU has a command line interface Consistent with the SSG command line interface guidelines, Allows output to be written or piped to a file or another process Provides the following command line features: Comma separated value output (to standard out only) Interval between retrievals (default being only one retrieval) Duration over which retrievals should be performed Header lines preceding each set of lines for an element Element type code as first item in each output line Support for z/OS - and open- attached DS8000 and DS6000 Designed to support a future migration tool that allows the collected data to be imported into the TPC performance database. This implies the data format is consistent with the MDM PM data.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-26. PDCU Scope

SS481.0

Notes: PDCU is used to collect data for performance report for one DS6000 or one DS8000 at a time.

7-32 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

PDCU - Supported Platforms and Storage PDCU supports both the DS8000 and DS6000 Note microcode levels will need to be at specific levels PDCU supports both open and fixed volumes PDCU has been built and tested on the following systems: Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows 2003, Windows XP Red Hat Linux Advanced Server 2.1, 3.0 AIX 5

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-27. PDCU - Supported Platforms and Storage

SS481.0

Notes: PDCU runs on the following platforms (please make sure you have downloaded PDCU for the correct platform): • Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows 2003, Windows XP • Red Hat Linux Advanced Server 2.1, 3.0 • AIX 5

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-33

Student Notebook

PDCU Installation The installation process is the essence of simplicity: Download appropriate zip (or equivalent) file for machine on which PDCU is to be installed. Extract the file to desired location. Please note that there is one Windows caveat: Do not install PDCU into a path that contains the character sequence pd. Doing so may result in an error message about the UTE.dll.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-28. PDCU Installation

SS481.0

Notes: To install PDCU, extract the files from the archive. A new directory named PerfUtil should be created. PDCU does not need to be installed as Administrator on Windows or as root on Linux and AIX. Windows only: Do not install PDCU into a path that contains the character sequence pd. Doing so may result in an error message about the UTE.dll.

7-34 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Configuring and Running PDCU Before it can collection performance statistics, PDCU must be provided with information about the DS via the adddsserver command: perfcollectcli adddsserver –svr DS_IP –usr username –passwd password DS_ID Once configured all that remains is to start collecting performance data perfcollectcli startdscollection –i interval –d duration DS_ID Note: PDCU writes all configuration and statistic information to standard out so this output should be piped to a file if the client wishes to actually use it ( “> filename.txt” in Windows) Alternatively, a quick-start script is provided which, once edited to have the correct DS information, issues both of the above commands

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-29. Configuring and Running PDCU

SS481.0

Notes: Edit the file sample_script.txt, included with PDCU, so it contains the information necessary to connect to your DS device: the DS Network Interface IP address or hostname, username, and password; and the DS device ID. On Windows, run this command: perfcollectcli -script sample_script.txt > output.txt On Linux or AIX, run this command: perfcollectcli.sh -script sample_script.txt > output.txt.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-35

Student Notebook

Where the PDCU Data is Stored PDCU data is NOT stored by default, but is rather sent to standard out. If the data needs to be stored (as is likely) the user should redirect standard out to a file. PDCU log information (including, in debug mode, raw counter values from ESSNI) is stored in perfcollectcli.log

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-30. Where the PDCU Data is Stored

SS481.0

Notes: The data can be output put to a flat .txt file or .csv file for use in a XCEL spread sheet.

7-36 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

PDCU Sample Configuration Data Output

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-31. PDCU Sample Configuration Data Output

SS481.0

Notes: The following is an example of the PDCU output, with field descriptions instead of actual data. Abbreviations follow the IEC international standard (for example, 1 GB = 10^9 B = 1,000,000,000 B). See the NIST reference on SI binary prefixes at this URL for details. http://physics.nist.gov/cuu/Units/binary.html Performance Data Collection --------------------------DS Device ID: IBM.2107.7503001 Data Collection Start: 2005-01-21 12:58:11 PST Data Collection Frequency: 5 minutes Data Collection Duration: 1 hour IBM Performance Data Collection Utility version 1.0.0

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-37

Student Notebook

Configuration Data -----------------Machine Type: 2107 Model Number: 922 Cache Memory: not available at this time. NVS Memory: not available at this time. Port Level Configuration -----------------------Port ID - Unique identifier of the HBA in hex. Location - Location of the port. Type - Port type: ESCON, FC-LW, FC-SW, or UNKNOWN. Speed (Gbps)- The port speed in Gbps. WWPN - The world-wide port name for the FC port in hex. Topology - The FC port topology: FC-AL, FCP, FICON, FCP/FICON, or UNKNOWN.

Rank Level Configuration -----------------------Rank ID - Unique identifier of the rank in hex. Pool ID - Unique identifier of the rank's extent pool in hex. Extent Type - Extent type: FB or CKD. Capacity - Total rank capacity in GB. RAID - RAID level: RAID-5, RAID-10, or UNKNOWN. Num Arrays - The number of arrays configured for this rank. RPM - The minimum RPM of all rank disks. Size - The minimum capacity of all rank disks in GB.

Volume Level Configuration -------------------------Volume ID Volume SN Nickname LSS

- Unique identifier of the volume in hex. - Serial number. The VOLSER for CKD or the SCSI LUN for FB. - User-specified volume nickname. - The LSS of the volume in hex.

7-38 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

PDCU Script Invocation

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-32. PDCU Script Invocation

SS481.0

Notes: Above is an example of the Quick Start script Invocation. The PDCU package comes with a script, and with minimal modifications it can be made ready to start the collection.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-39

Student Notebook

The Report Generator - Example Macro Packaged with PDCU is an example Excel macro for importing a file with stored PDCU output, performing some basic calculations, and then generating some basic graphs. Flat file created by PDCU is imported into Excel spreadsheet via example macro Reports are generated

(3) Port, Rank and Volume Reports Generated

(2) Import into Spreadsheet

PDCU

Port reports Rank reports Volume reports

Macro

File

(1) Collect Performance Data

Customization can be done on the reports Visual Basic experience required

Runs on Excel 2002

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-33. The Report Generator – Example Macro

SS481.0

Notes: There is a report macro being developed for XCEL reporting. This macro takes the output of the PDCU data collection process and turns it into some XCEL graphs which can be displayed or printed.

7-40 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Port Performance Data Collected via PDCU Port ID- Unique identifier of the HBA in hex

Speed (Gbps)- The port speed in Gbps.

I/O Rate- Average number of I/O operations per second.

Data Rate- Average transfer rate in KBps

Avg Xfer Size- Average transfer size in KB

Avg Resp Time- Average I/O response time in milliseconds.

FB Read I/Os- Number of FCP read operations.

FB Write I/Os- Number of FCP write operations.

FB KBs Read- Number of KBs read via FCP.

FB KBs Written- Number of KBs written via FCP.

FB Accum Read Time- Total time spent on FCP read in milliseconds.

FB Accum Write Time- Total time spent on FCP write in milliseconds.

CKD Read I/Os- Number of FICON read operations.

CKD Write I/Os- Number of FICON write operations.

CKD KBs Read- Number of KBs read via FICON.

CKD KBs Written- Number of KBs written via FICON.

CKD Accum Read Time- Total time spent on FICON read in milliseconds.

CKD Accum Write Time- Total time spent on FICON write in milliseconds.

PPRC Read I/Os- Number of PPRC read operations.

PPRC Write I/Os- Number of PPRC write operations.

PPRC KBs Read- Number of KBs read for PPRC activity.

PPRC KBs Written- Number of KBs written for PPRC activity.

PPRC Accum Recv Time- Total time spent on PPRC read in milliseconds.

PPRC Accum Send Time- Total time spent on PPRC write in milliseconds.

Interval Length- Interval length truncated to the second.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-34. Port Performance Data Collected via PDCU

SS481.0

Notes: Port-Level Statistics Interval Start: 2005-01-21 12:58:21 PST Interval End: 2005-01-21 01:03:21 PST Interval Length: 300 seconds --------------------Port ID Speed (Gbps) I/O Rate Data Rate Avg Xfer Size Avg Resp Time FB Read I/Os FB Write I/Os FB KBs Read FB KBs Written © Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

- Unique identifier of the HBA in hex. - The port speed in Gbps. - Average number of I/O operations per second. - Average transfer rate in KBps. - Average transfer size in KB. - Average I/O response time in milliseconds. - Number of FCP read operations. - Number of FCP write operations. - Number of KBs read via FCP. - Number of KBs written via FCP. Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-41

Student Notebook

FB Accum Read Time FB Accum Write Time CKD Read I/Os CKD Write I/Os CKD KBs Read CKD KBs Written CKD Accum Read Time CKD Accum Write Time PPRC Read I/Os PPRC Write I/Os PPRC KBs Read PPRC KBs Written PPRC Accum Recv Time PPRC Accum Send Time Interval Length

- Total time spent on FCP read in milliseconds. - Total time spent on FCP write in milliseconds. - Number of FICON read operations. - Number of FICON write operations. - Number of KBs read via FICON. - Number of KBs written via FICON. - Total time spent on FICON read in milliseconds. - Total time spent on FICON write in milliseconds. - Number of PPRC read operations. - Number of PPRC write operations. - Number of KBs read for PPRC activity. - Number of KBs written for PPRC activity. - Total time spent on PPRC read in milliseconds. - Total time spent on PPRC write in milliseconds. - Interval length truncated to the second.

7-42 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Rank Performance Data Collected via PDCU Rank ID- Unique identifier of the rank in hex.

RAID Type- RAID type: RAID-5, RAID-10, or UNKNOWN.

Num of Arrays- Number of arrays configured for the rank.

Read I/O Rate- Average number of read I/O operations per second.

Write I/O Rate- Average number of write I/O operations per second

Read Data Rate- Average read transfer rate in KBps.

Write Data Rate- Average write transfer rate in KBps

Avg Read Xfer Size- Average read transfer size in KB.

Avg Write Xfer Size- Average write transfer size in KB

Avg Read Resp Time- Average read response time in milliseconds.

Avg Write Resp Time- Average write response time in milliseconds

Read I/Os- Number of read I/O operations.

Write I/Os- Number of write I/O operations

KBs Read- Number of KBs read.

KBs Written- Number of KBs written.

Accum Read Time- Total time spent reading in milliseconds.

Accum Write Time- Total time spent writing in milliseconds.

Interval Length- Interval length truncated to the second.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-35. Rank Performance Data Collected via PDCU

SS481.0

Notes: Rank-Level Statistics Interval Start: 2005-01-21 12:58:21 PST Interval End: 2005-01-21 01:03:21 PST Interval Length: 300 seconds --------------------Rank ID RAID Type Num of Arrays Read I/O Rate Write I/O Rate Read Data Rate Write Data Rate Avg Read Xfer Size Avg Write Xfer Size Avg Read Resp Time © Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

- Unique identifier of the rank in hex. - RAID type: RAID-5, RAID-10, or UNKNOWN. - Number of arrays configured for the rank. - Average number of read I/O operations per second. - Average number of write I/O operations per second. - Average read transfer rate in KBps. - Average write transfer rate in KBps. - Average read transfer size in KB. - Average write transfer size in KB. - Average read response time in milliseconds. Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-43

Student Notebook

Avg Write Resp Time Read I/Os Write I/Os KBs Read KBs Written Accum Read Time Accum Write Time Interval Length

- Average write response time in milliseconds. - Number of read I/O operations. - Number of write I/O operations. - Number of KBs read. - Number of KBs written. - Total time spent reading in milliseconds. - Total time spent writing in milliseconds. - Interval length truncated to the second.

7-44 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Volume Performance Data Collected via PDCU Volume ID- Unique identifier of the volume in hex.

I/O Rate- Average number of I/O operations per second.

Data Rate- Average transfer rate in KBps.

Avg Xfer Size- Average transfer size in KB.

Avg Resp Time- Average response time in milliseconds.

Delayed I/O Perc- Percentage of DASD Fast Write requests delayed due to NVS full conditions.

Total Hit Perc- Cache hit percentage.

Read Hit Perc- Read cache hit percentage.

Write Hit Perc- Write cache hit percentage

Non-seq Read I/Os- Number of normal read operations.

Non-seq Write I/Os- Number of normal write operations.

Seq Read I/Os- Number of sequential read operations.

Seq Write I/Os- Number of sequential write operations

Non-seq Read Hits- Number of cache hits for normal read operations.

Non-seq Write Hits- Number of cache hits for normal write operations

Seq Read Hits- Number of cache hits for sequential read operations.

Seq Write Hits- Number of cache hits for sequential write operations

KBs Read- Number of KBs read.

KBs Written- Number of KBs written.

Accum Read Time- Total time spent reading in milliseconds.

Accum Write Time- Total time spent writing in milliseconds.

Non-seq Disk->Cache Ops- Number of disk to cache transfers for non-sequential I/O operations.

Seq Disk->Cache Ops - Number of disk to cache transfers for sequential I/O operations

Cache->Disk Ops- Number of cache to disk transfers for all I/O operations.

NVS Allocs- Number of NVS space allocations.

Non-seq DFW I/Os- Number of normal DASD Fast Write requests.

Seq DFW I/Os- Number of sequential DASD Fast Write requests.

NVS Delayed DFW I/Os- Number of DASD Fast Write requests delayed due to NVS space constraints.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-36. Volume Performance Data Collected via PDCU

SS481.0

Notes: Volume-Level Statistics Interval Start: 2005-01-21 12:58:21 PST Interval End: 2005-01-21 01:03:21 PST Interval Length: 300 seconds ----------------------Volume ID I/O Rate Data Rate Avg Xfer Size Avg Resp Time Delayed I/O Perc Total Hit Perc Read Hit Perc Write Hit Perc © Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

- Unique identifier of the volume in hex. - Average number of I/O operations per second. - Average transfer rate in KBps. - Average transfer size in KB. - Average response time in milliseconds. - Percentage of DASD Fast Write requests delayed due to NVS full conditions. - Cache hit percentage. - Read cache hit percentage. - Write cache hit percentage. Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-45

Student Notebook

Non-seq Read I/Os - Number of normal read operations. Non-seq Write I/Os - Number of normal write operations. Seq Read I/Os - Number of sequential read operations. Seq Write I/Os - Number of sequential write operations. Non-seq Read Hits - Number of cache hits for normal read operations. Non-seq Write Hits - Number of cache hits for normal write operations. Seq Read Hits - Number of cache hits for sequential read operations. Seq Write Hits - Number of cache hits for sequential write operations. KBs Read - Number of KBs read. KBs Written - Number of KBs written. Accum Read Time - Total time spent reading in milliseconds. Accum Write Time - Total time spent writing in milliseconds. Non-seq Disk->Cache Ops- Number of disk to cache transfers for non-sequential I/O operations.

7-46 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Volume Performance Data Collected Cache Delayed I/Os- Number of I/O requests delayed due to cache space constraints.

Rec Mode Read I/Os- Number of record mode read I/O requests.

Rec Mode Read Hits- Number of record mode cache hits.

CC/XRC Trks Read- Number of tracks read from the Concurrent Copy or XRC Sidefile.

CC/XRC Contam Writes- Number of contaminating writes for Concurrent Copy or XRC operations.

PPRC Trk Xfers- Number of full or partial tracks transferred to the secondary device of a PPRC pair.

Quick Write Prom- Number of quick write promote operations.

CFW Read I/Os- Number of Cache Fast Write read requests.

CFW Write I/Os- Number of Cache Fast Write write requests

CFW Read Hits- Number of cache hits for Cache Fast Write read requests.

CFW Write Hits- Number of cache hits for Cache Fast Write write requests.

Irreg Trk Acc- Number of irregular track access requests.

Irreg Trk Acc Hits- Number of cache hits for irregular track access requests.

Backend Read Ops- Number of physical array read operations.

Backend Write Ops- Number of physical array write operations.

Backend KBs Read- Number of KBs read from physical arrays.

Backend KBs Written- Number of KBs written to physical arrays.

Backend Accum Read Time- Total time spent reading from physical arrays in milliseconds.

Backend Accum Write Time- Total time spent writing from physical arrays in milliseconds.

ICL Read I/Os- Number of Inhibit Cache Loading requests.

Cache Bypass Write I/Os- Number of Bypass Cache requests.

Backend Data Xfer Time- Total time spent on lower interface I/O activity.

Interval Length- Interval length truncated to the second.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-37. Volume Performance Data Collected

SS481.0

Notes: Seq Disk->Cache Ops Cache->Disk Ops NVS Allocs Non-seq DFW I/Os Seq DFW I/Os NVS Delayed DFW I/Os Cache Delayed I/Os Rec Mode Read I/Os Rec Mode Read Hits CC/XRC Trks Read CC/XRC Contam Writes

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

- Number of disk to cache transfers for sequential I/O operations. - Number of cache to disk transfers for all I/O operations. - Number of NVS space allocations. - Number of normal DASD Fast Write requests. - Number of sequential DASD Fast Write requests. - Number of DASD Fast Write requests delayed due to NVS space constraints. - Number of I/O requests delayed due to cache space constraints. - Number of record mode read I/O requests. - Number of record mode cache hits. - Number of tracks read from the Concurrent Copy or XRC Solidify. - Number of contaminating writes for Concurrent Copy or XRC operations. Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-47

Student Notebook

PPRC Trk Xfers

- Number of full or partial tracks transferred to the secondary device of a PPRC pair. Quick Write Prom - Number of quick write promote operations. CFW Read I/Os - Number of Cache Fast Write read requests. CFW Write I/Os - Number of Cache Fast Write write requests. CFW Read Hits - Number of cache hits for Cache Fast Write read requests. CFW Write Hits - Number of cache hits for Cache Fast Write write requests. Irreg Trk Acc - Number of irregular track access requests. Irreg Trk Acc Hits - Number of cache hits for irregular track access requests. Backend Read Ops - Number of physical array read operations. Backend Write Ops - Number of physical array write operations. Backend KBs Read - Number of KBs read from physical arrays. Backend KBs Written - Number of KBs written to physical arrays. Backend Accum Read Time- Total time spent reading from physical arrays in milliseconds. Backend Accum Write Time - Total time spent writing from physical arrays in milliseconds. ICL Read I/Os - Number of Inhibit Cache Loading requests. Cache Bypass Write I/Os - Number of Bypass Cache requests. Backend Data Xfer Time - Total time spent on lower interface I/O activity. Interval Length - Interval length truncated to the second.

7-48 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Port Reports The five ports with the highest total I/O rate (I/O operations per second) The five ports with the highest total transfer rate (MBs per sec) The five ports with the highest average response time (milliseconds per I/O operation)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-38. Port Reports

SS481.0

Notes: The port report list the five most active ports on the subsystem in terms of I/O rate, transfer rate, and response time.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-49

Student Notebook

Rank Reports 2.5

2 Total I/O Rate

The five ranks with the highest total I/O rate (I/O operations per sec)

IBM.2107-7502301/R0

1.5

IBM.2107-7502301/R1 IBM.2107-7502301/R2 1

IBM.2107-7502301/R3

0.5

0 01/14/20 01/14/20 01/14/20 01/14/20 01/14/20 01/14/20 01/14/20 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 01:26:24 01:40:48 01:55:12 02:09:36 02:24:00 02:38:24 02:52:48 Time

140 120 100 Total Data Rate

The five ranks with the highest total transfer rate (MBs per sec)

IBM.2107-7502301/R0 80

IBM.2107-7502301/R1 IBM.2107-7502301/R2

60

IBM.2107-7502301/R3 40 20

The five ranks with the highest average response time (millisecs per I/O op)

0 01/14/20 01/14/20 01/14/20 01/14/20 01/14/20 01/14/20 01/14/20 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 01:26:24 01:40:48 01:55:12 02:09:36 02:24:00 02:38:24 02:52:48 Time

90

Average Response Time

80 70 60 IBM.2107-7502301/R0 50

IBM.2107-7502301/R1

40

IBM.2107-7502301/R2 IBM.2107-7502301/R3

30 20 10 0 01/14/20 01/14/20 01/14/20 01/14/20 01/14/20 01/14/20 01/14/20 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 01:26:24 01:40:48 01:55:12 02:09:36 02:24:00 02:38:24 02:52:48 Time

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-39. Rank Reports

SS481.0

Notes: The rank report lists the five most active ranks on the subsystem in terms of I/O rate, transfer rate, and response time.

7-50 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Volume Reports The five volumes with the highest normal write I/O rate (I/O operations per second)

160 140 Normal Read I/O Rate

The five volumes with the highest normal read I/O rate (I/O operations per second)

120 IBM.2107-7502301/0000 100

IBM.2107-7502301/1014 IBM.2107-7502301/1016

80

IBM.2107-7502301/1015

60

IBM.2107-7502301/1013

40 20

The five volumes with the highest sequential read I/O rate (I/O operations per second)

0 01/14/2 01/14/2 01/14/2 01/14/2 01/14/2 01/14/2 01/14/2 005 005 005 005 005 005 005 01:26:2 01:40:4 01:55:1 02:09:3 02:24:0 02:38:2 02:52:4 8 4 0 6 2 8 4 Time

The five volumes with the highest sequential write I/O rate (I/O operations per second)

70 Normal Write I/O Rate

The five volumes with the lowest read cache hit ratio

80

The five volumes with the highest cache-to-disk transfers (number of track transfers) The five volumes with the highest disk-to-cache transfers (number of track transfers)

60 IBM.2107-7502301/1013 50

IBM.2107-7502301/101a IBM.2107-7502301/1016

40

IBM.2107-7502301/1015

30

IBM.2107-7502301/1014

20 10

The five volumes with the lowest write cache hit ratio

0 01/14/2 01/14/2 01/14/2 01/14/2 01/14/2 01/14/2 01/14/2 005 005 005 005 005 005 005 01:26:2 01:40:4 01:55:1 02:09:3 02:24:0 02:38:2 02:52:4 4 8 2 6 0 4 8 Time

8000 7000 NVS Delayed DFW I/Os

Uempty

The five volumes with the highest NVS delayed requests (number of track transfers)

6000 IBM.2107-7502301/1014 5000

IBM.2107-7502301/1015 IBM.2107-7502301/1016

4000

IBM.2107-7502301/1013

3000

IBM.2107-7502301/1018

2000 1000 0 01/14/2 01/14/2 01/14/2 01/14/2 01/14/2 01/14/2 01/14/2 005 005 005 005 005 005 005 01:26:2 01:40:4 01:55:1 02:09:3 02:24:0 02:38:2 02:52:4 4 8 2 6 0 4 8 Time

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-40. Volume Reports

SS481.0

Notes: The volumes report looks at different I/O types such as reads and write, both sequential and random, and cache hit ratios for the volumes. These can point out hot volumes and could lead to volume or data movement to do tuning. However, with the I/O capability and bandwidth displayed in earlier performance charts, tuning may not be necessary, at least initially.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-51

Student Notebook

PDCU Documentation PDCU comes with a README file which provides basic documentation which provides basic installation, usage, and statistics-gathered information. Also discusses how to create customized reports A sample MS Excel macro is available to illustrate one method of performing analysis and graph generation with PDCU data.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-41. PDCU Documentation

SS481.0

Notes: The PDCU package comes with a readme file that documents the functions and how to use the PDCU.

7-52 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

PDCU Summary Availability Outlook: 3/2005 Provide performance data collection utility for DS8000 and DS6000 Include a CLI interface Support all available DS8000 and DS6000 performance data Volume, rank, IO port (extend pool not needed) Support monitoring one DS8000 and DS6000 Support monitoring multiple DS8000 and DS6000 devices via multiple instances of the utility Support monitoring at least three fully configured DS8000 and DS6000 from one server (assuming three instances of the tool are running) Support for z/OS and open attached DS8000 and DS6000 Simple install and execution Can be scheduled The utility should be able to be invoked/scheduled by system services (that is, Windows Scheduler, Linux CRON) Data output is documented Includes sample reports © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-42. PDCU Summary

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-53

Student Notebook

Checkpoint Exercise -- Unit 7 Checkpoint 1. T/F The PDCU is a performance data collection utility used to collect raw data from a DS6000 or DS8000 system. 2. T/F The PDCU utility has a GUI and a Command Line Interface. 3. T/F The output of the PDCU data collection can be loaded into a spreadsheet for processing and reporting graphs. 4. T/F The report generated by PDCU excel graphs can report on volume usage and identify potential problem areas.

7-54 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit Summary Having completed this unit, you should be able to understand: Current measured DS8000 performance charts The TotalStorage Productivity Center TPC 2.3 Performance Data Collection Utility (PDCU) Installation and use Reports

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 7-43. Unit Summary

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 7. DS8000 and DS6000 Performance, TPC and Productivity Data Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-55

Student Notebook

7-56 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit 8. DS Copy Services What This Unit Is About The DS6000/DS8000 storage subsystem uses the Copy Services functions currently implemented in the ESS subsystems. This unit discusses the Copy Services function of FlashCopy, Metro Mirror, Global Copy and Global Mirror and how these functions work. In addition, the unit overviews the GUI and DSCLI interfaces to these functions and discuses migration from the ESS Copy Services environment to the DS Copy Services environment.

What You Should Be Able to Do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Discuss the IBM TotalStorage DS Copy Services functions available for Open systems • Describe the concepts of Metro Mirror, Global Copy, • Discuss Global Copy versus Global Mirror • Describe the Remote Mirror Paths using FCP links

How You Will Check Your Progress Review the user interfaces for IBM TotalStorage DS8000 Copy Services: • DS8000 Copy Services GUI interface • DSCLI commands

References SG24-6452

IBM TotalStorage DS8000 Series Architecture and Concepts

SC24-7623

IBM TotalStorage: DS8000 Users Guide

GC26-0495

IBM TotalStorage DS8000 Introduction and Planning Guide

SC26-7625

IBM TotalStorage DS8000 Command Line User's Guide

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-1

Student Notebook

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you should be able to: Describe the IBM DS8000 Copy Services Describe the FlashCopy functions Describe the Remote Mirror functions Describe the DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Copy Services Describe the IBM DS8000 CLI for Copy Services Describe the migration from ESS to DS8000 Copy Services

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-1. Unit Objectives

SS481.0

Notes:

8-2

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

8.1 Advanced Copy Services Review

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-3

Student Notebook

Topic: Local Flash Copy

Review of the Advanced Copy Services Local Flash Copy Remote Mirror and Copy

Advanced Copy Services for DS6000 and DS8000 IBM TotalStorage DS CLI for Copy Services DS Storage Manager Copy Services GUI

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-2. Topic: Local Flash Copy

SS481.0

Notes:

8-4

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

FlashCopy Implementation Time Copy data command issued

Source

Write

Target

Copy immediately available

Read Read and write to both source and copy possible

Optional background copy When copy is complete, relationship between source and target ends

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-3. FlashCopy Implementation

SS481.0

Notes: There are three types of access to the volume. First, if a background copy is being done and the data has been copied to the target, then any I/Os to that data on either the source or target volume are handled as normal I/O to that volume. Second, if a read is to be done to the target and the data has not been moved yet, then that block is accessed from the source volume for that I/O. Third, if updates occur on either volume below the copy line, then a Copy on Demand operation moves the block to be accessed to the target before any updates can occur. If an application wants to update the target before the source data has been copied to the target, the data is first read from the source, written to the target, then updated by the application. The target volumes bitmap is updated to indicate that the copy has been made.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-5

Student Notebook

FlashCopy NOCOPY to COPY

Time Write

Read

FlashCopy command issued with NOCOPY

Change BACKGROUND from NOCOPY to COPY

Source

Target

When copy is complete, relationship between source and target ends

BACKGROUND COPY

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-4. FlashCopy NOCOPY to COPY

SS481.0

Notes: If the Background COPY option is used, then this is all copied eventually, but tracks needed for update immediately after the relationship has started may need to be copied on demand to the target so the source tracks can be changed. NOPCOPY is used where there is no long-term requirement to access the volume, say for a backup to tape. COPY is used when there is a long-term need to access the target volume, such as testing or development.

8-6

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

Persistent FlashCopy

Time

Source

Source

Target

Target

FlashCopy command issued with COPY and PERSISTENT

When copy is complete, relationship between source and target persists

Explicitly withdraw the relationship

Source

Target

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-5. Persistent Flash Copy

SS481.0

Notes: The FlashCopy relationship normally ends when the background copy is complete. This destroys the bit maps being used to track changes. If the relationship needs to be maintained or if the user wants to be able to verify that a FlashCopy relationship exists, then the persistent FlashCopy is used to keep the relationship active even though the data has been moved.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-7

Student Notebook

Multiple Relationship FlashCopy A volume can participate in multiple FlashCopy relationships One source to many targets A source can have up to 12 targets A target can only have one source A target cannot be a source at the same time A volume, LUN, or data set can be only a source or target at any given time However, data set source and target can reside within a single volume Increased flexibility Improved capacity management and utilization

One-to-many (multitarget) © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-6. Multiple Relationship FlashCopy

SS481.0In

Notes: A target track cannot have more than one source track. For example, if full volume FlashCopy were performed, a data set FlashCopy to that volume would not be possible until the full volume relationship is withdrawn. But, two data set FlashCopy operations can be performed to the same target volume as long as the target track (extent) is not already in a relationship. The FlashCopy succeeds since the tracks for the target data sets are on different extents on the target volume.

8-8

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

Incremental FlashCopy Change recording tracks changes made to source and target volumes after establish of FlashCopy relationship Use in conjunction with background copy and persistent relationship options Supported only at full volume/ LUN level There can only be one incremental relation per volume but can coexist with other non-incremental relationships During refresh: Only changed data is copied from the source to the target Source and target volumes can be reversed Source volume (previously the target) refreshes the target volume (previously the source) with only changed data Background copy must complete first

source

target

A

B

Establish Copy A to B

Both A and B get updated

Resynchronize: B becomes an exact copy of newest updates in A again

or

Increased flexibility Faster completion time for physical copy

Reverse restore: A becomes an exact copy of newest updates in B

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-7. Incremental FlashCopy

SS481.0

Notes: Source A to target B - this has to be established with the BACKGROUND(COPY) option and persistent relationship. A and B are both updated - independent of each of the volumes, updates are written to volume A and to volume B indicated through a circle and a rectangle within the extent. Resynchronize B with A - When resynchronizing B with A the changed rectangle will be overridden by its original content and the changes made to A indicated through the circle is also copied to B. It is also possible to reverse this incremental refresh and resynchronize A with B instead of the previous resynchronize step.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-9

Student Notebook

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

FlashCopy Consistency Group Support Hold off initiation / completion of write I/O to the source volumes until FlashCopy establish is completed Select source and target volumes with freeze option Create Consistency Group Created tasks to allow resumption of I/O One per LSS Enables creation of a consistent point-in-time copy across multiple volumes with minimum host impact Target of each source volume are within one ESS but source volumes within a consistency group can span ESSs

FlashCopy S1 to T1 Writes cannot proceed on S1 Any writes occurring on S2-S4 are not dependent writes

S1

T1

S2

T2

FlashCopy S2 to T2 Writes cannot proceed on S1 or S2 Any writes occurring on S3-S4 are not dependent writes FlashCopy S3 to T3 and S4 to T4 T1-T4 contain a consistent copy

S3

T3

S4

T4

Issue Consistency Group Created Writes may proceed to S1-S4.

Source volumes can span multiple CS-Web domains if using CLI scripts

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-8. FlashCopy Consistency Group Support

SS481.0

Notes: The FlashCopy function has added consistency groups. This means that you can freeze volumes in an LSS and perform FlashCopies on them, and then release the volumes with a consistency group-formed function. During the freeze, I/Os are queued so that the volumes can quiesce and be at the same point in time. The FlashCopy is issued against all the volumes that need to be consistent in time, and then I/O can be restarted. This means that applications do not have to be stopped or quiesced if you are using a freeze consistency group approach. Once the FlashCopies are established you need to issue the Consistency Group Created task immediately to restart the I/O processing. Failure to do this causes the application to be hung and eventually fail with timeouts.

8-10 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

8.2 Remote Mirror and Copy

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-11

Student Notebook

Topic: Remote Mirror and Copy Review of the Advanced Copy Services Local Flash Copy Remote Mirror and Copy

Advanced Copy Services for DS6000 and DS8000 IBM TotalStorage DS CLI for Copy Services DS Storage Manager Copy Services GUI

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-9. Topic: Remote Mirror and Copy

SS481.0

Notes:

8-12 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Disk Storage Mirroring Leading solution : performance, and scalabilité for disk mirroring Metro Mirror

Disk Mirroring solutions for ESS and DS Metro Mirror (Synchronous PPRC) Secondary Site (PPRC secondary)

Primary Site (PPRC primary)

Global Mirror (Asynchronous PPRC) Metro Mirror/Global Copy (Asynchronous Cascading PPRC) Global Copy (PPRC Extended Distance)

Global Mirror Global Copy

Metro Mirror

Primary Site (PPRC primary)

FlashCopy

Global Copy

FlashCopy

Remote Site (with 'safety copy')

Intermediate Site (PPRC secondary/primary)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-10. Disk Storage Mirroring

SS481.0

Notes: Metro Mirror and Global Copy are volume copy functions that allow a remote storage device, such as a DS8000, DS6000 or ESS connected to a local DS8000 to mirror volume across FCP links to a remote data center. The mirrored volumes are kept in continuous update mode, so every primary volume I/O is written to the local and remote volume. An asynchronous mode called Global Copy is used for environment where the remote site is too far away to use the Metro Mirror, which is limited to approximately 300 km. To use Global Copy, a user must have a way of creating a consistent copy using a procedure which stops updates while synchronizing the primary and secondary volumes. A third function Global Mirror is the newest function and replaces most global copy or cascaded functions.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-13

Student Notebook

Metro Mirror (Synchronous PPRC)

Distant synchronous copy Updates secured both on primary and secondary before host receives completion of the IO Volume level Up to 103 km Invoked by GUI Copy services CLI (open systems) TSO commands Automated by Scripts (open) GDPS or other (zOS) Support of Consistency Groups

Write to primary volume. The primary initiates an I/O to the secondary to transfer the data. Secondary indicates to the primary that the write is complete. Primary acknowledges to the application system that the write is complete.

Server

1

4 2

DS primary

PPRC 3

DS secondary

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-11. Metro Mirror (Synchronous PPRC)

SS481.0

Notes: The metro mirror or synchronous PPRC is a function designed for DR. It has distance limitations and adds performance delays into applications using the volumes that use this function, but it provides a remote copy that is synchronized I/O for I/O, so if you have a problem at the production site, you can suspend and switch to the secondary volumes and they are ready to go with no forward recovery required.

8-14 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

Global Copy (PPRC XD)

Write to primary volume. Primary acknowledges to the application system that the write is complete. At some later time:

Distant asynchronous copy Host receives completion when update is secured on the primary Modified tracks are sent to the secondary asynchronously Less bandwidth required Continental distances No or little impact on the primary response time Invoked by GUI Copy Server CLI (open systems) TSO commands Automated by Scripts (open) GDPS or other (z/OS) Can be switched to synchronous PPRC

The primary initiates an I/O to the secondary to transfer the data. Secondary indicates to the primary that the write is complete. Primary resets indication of modified track.

Server Server 1

2 3

DS primary

PPRC

XD

ESS secondary

Updated tracks are sent periodically

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-12. Global Copy (PPRC XD)

SS481.0

Notes: The global copy is just a long distance copy. There is no guarantee of consistency so it’s no good for DR, but if the data is idle or static it works fine to copy it to a remote location. If you are copying active data, then you have a problem. To get any kind of volume time consistency, you must synchronize the volumes and get a copy at the point they are synchronized. You did not have to do that with metro mirror because they were always synchronized.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-15

Student Notebook

FlashCopy on Remote Mirror and Copy Primary FlashCopy Source Volume

FlashCopy to PPRC Primary Volume

FlashCopy Target Volume

PPRC relation PPRC Primary Volume

PPRC Secondary Volume

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-13. FlashCopy on Remote Mirror and Copy Primary

SS481.0

Notes: Here is another approach. Take a FlashCopy of your production volumes while quiesced and create your consistent copy at the production site, now Global Copy the static target volumes to the remote site.

8-16 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM TotalStorage Metro Mirror / Global Copy Three sites cascading A secondary can be a primary of another PPRC relationship Automated via GDPS Enables a consistent copy at long distance Only one copy on the intermediate site Server Synchronous to XD (typical usage) Synchronous to Synchronous XD to XD NOT XD to Synchronous

1

4 2

DS primary

PPRC 3

DS secondary primary

PPRC

XD

DS secondary

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-14. IBM TotalStorage Metro Mirror / Global Copy

SS481.0

Notes: This is another flavor which gives you a local synchronous copy and a remote XD copy. It might be easier to sync the remote mirror if all you have to suspend is the link to the production secondary. At least then you don’t have to stop the production applications.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-17

Student Notebook

PPRC Global Mirror PRIMARY APPLICATION HOSTS

REMOTE APPLICATION HOSTS

CHAN EXT

PPRC 'A' PRIMARY

CHAN EXT

PPRC-XD OVER LONG DISTANCE

PPRC ‘B’ Secondary and FC Source

FC ‘C’ Target

0 0

1 0

1 0

1

1

0

0

1 0 0 0 0 1 0

Incremental FlashCopy

0 0

0 0

Change Recording bitmap

1 0 0 0 0 1 0

Out of Sync bitmap

Remote Site

Local Site

PPRC Extended Distance (PPRC-XD) from local to remote site Automatic periodic consistent copies created at remote site Volume A uses change recording bitmap while consistency group is created All data sent to remote and inband FlashCopy at remote creates consistent data on volume C Designed to adjusts to peak workloads without impacting primary application © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-15. PPRC Global Mirror

SS481.0

Notes: This is the newest function in the Copy Services Suite. It uses the global copy and FlashCopy functions and adds session management to create consistency groups in cycles, and send them to the remote secondary. Each time the remote secondary is synchronized, a FlashCopy is taken to capture the consistent volumes. The cycle is very quick, so every 3-5 seconds you get a consistent copy. Now if there is a problem, you take the last good copy and recover. It’s only 3 or 4 seconds old so not much forward recovery to do, but there is some, so you can’t just assume it good and go with it. You may lose three or four transactions or more, and depending on your business, those could be important transactions, so apply what logs you have and get those updates applied and you’re good to go.

8-18 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

PPRC Global Mirror Global Mirror is Host independent (z/OS, UNIX, ...) So far, up to eight ESSs in the same Consistency Group No specific software required Based on PPRC-XD and FlashCopy IBM technologies Gives users the guarantee that remote images are consistent Cycle is 3 to 5 seconds for Data RPO (Recovery Point Objective) Coordination Time around 1 ms every 3 to 5 seconds Very low impact on write response times at Primary Site High scalability for Data Image Copy at Remote Site (swap of FlashCopy targets)

A

B

Primary Volume

Vol. XD Swap of "changed bitmap" every 3 à 5 seconds

C

D

Vol. FC

Image

Sequence of Flashcopies from B :

K7

CCCC D CCCCCCCCC

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-16. PPRC Global Mirror

SS481.0

Notes: The global mirror function uses the existing global copy and FlashCopy to set up a long-distance copy, and a means of capturing that copy periodically to a tertiary volume. Now all that is needed is a way of creating consistency, and you have a mechanism to create a long-distance mirroring function. The global mirror function adds a session manager that allows groups of LSSs to create consistency groups using the same I/O queue full or long busy, and then release groups of consistency blocks one at a time to the secondary volumes. Once there, a fast in-band FlashCopy is issued, and the consistent volumes are captured to the tertiary volumes. The cycle of consistency creation is done every 3-5 seconds or as specified by the customer.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-19

Student Notebook

PPRC-XD Normal Operations PPRC-XD Long Distance

Channel Extender

1. We are in normal PPRC-XD mode 2. Writes are being sent to the remote site via the normal PPRC-XD methods

Channel Extender Remote PPRC Pair

Local Site (Primary)

Remote Site (Secondary)

Phase 0: PPRC XD mode : write updates are continuously sent to the secondary site volumes The secondary volumes are not in a consistent state

Host I/O

OOS Out of Sync Bit Map

I/O to be sent to Secondary

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-17. PPRC-XD Normal Operations

SS481.0

Notes: A primary LUN or hdisk is copied to a remote DS at another site. The volumes are nonsynchronous and track a sent to the remote DS subsystems as applications process the primary disk. Tracks are not sent in order of I/Os, and they are not time stamped. A bit map is used to determine if a track or block has changed, and if so, the changed block is sent to the secondary subsystem.

8-20 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

PPRC Async Increment Pending Start Increment Command

PPRC – XD Long Distance

1. Primary accepts Start Increment command Channel Extender

Channel Extender

2. Pause incoming I/O and create CR Bitmaps. 3. State: Increment Pending

Remote PPRC Pair

4. Set Timer and wait for Run command Local Site (Primary )

Remote Site (Secondary )

Phase 1: When Increment Pending begins, all writes to the source volume are paused for a brief period of time (1 to 3 ms). During this time the master ESS coordinates the Consistency Group “n” across the subordinates. CR

OOS

Change Out of Sync Recording Bit Map Bit Map

I/O to be sent to Secondary

State: Increment Pending © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-18. PPRC Async Increment Pending

SS481.0

Notes: The PPRC-XD uses a change recording bitmap or CR. For global mirror the CR is updated and the I/O is paused to allow the master LSS to coordinate the consistency group across all subordinate LSSs. A timer is set and is released when the master has created the consistency group.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-21

Student Notebook

PPRC Async Run Consistency Group Run Command

1. Primary accepts Run command PPRC – XD Long Distance

Channel Extender

2. State: Consistency Group in Progress 3. Host I/O is resumed. Changes only logged in CR Bitmaps.

Channel Extender

4. OOS continues to drain to the remote site via the PPRC XD link.

Remote PPRC Pair

Local Site (Primary)

Remote Site (Secondary)

5. Wait for Increment Complete (Maximum Increment Timer)

Phase 2: Host I/O

CR

OOS

Change Out of Sync Recording Bit Map Bit Map

New Host I/O

State: Consistency Group in Progress

Once the coordination of the consistency group is complete, host writes resume and all data (NOT full tracks) in the consistency group is transmitted to the secondary volumes (draining process). New write updates are part of the next n+1 consistency group, and are logged in a new Change Recording Bit map. New write updates are not sent to secondary volumes as long as modified tracks before the Increment Pending (Consistency Group “n”) are currently drained.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-19. PPRC Async Run Consistency Group

SS481.0

Notes: The primary LSS or master LSS accepts the Run command and the CR bitmap is moved to the OOS bitmap. The state of the operation changes to Consistency Group in Progress. The OOS bitmap is referenced and all blocks are drained to the secondary volumes. New writes are allowed to proceed and update the CR bitmap, and are part of the next consistency group. These are logged into the CR bitmap, and held until the previous OOS bitmap is drained to the secondary.

8-22 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Back to Normal Increment Complete

1. External source queries and waits for OOS to finish draining to remote site

PPRC – XD Long Distance

Channel Extender

2. External source starts FlashCopy commands on Remote site with no BG copy.

Channel Extender

3. Primary receives Increment Complete when FlashCopy commands are done.

Remote PPRC Pair

4. The CR and OOS bitmaps are merged Local Site (Primary)

Remote Site (Secondary)

5. State: “Normal” (PPRC-XD Mode, Host I/O is buffered in the OOS again)

Phase 3: When the drain process is complete, the secondary volumes are automatically copied via the IBM FlashCopy function in order to form a Consistency Group. CR

Host I/O Change Recording Bit Map

OOS Out of Sync Bit Map

State: Normal

New Host I/O

Master receives “Increment Complete” from each secondary ESS when FlashCopies are done. At this point we have returned to the PPRC-XD state and the cycle repeats indefinitely.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-20. Back to Normal

SS481.0

Notes: The external source waits for the OOS to drain the data to the remote site, and then issues in-band FlashCopy commands with NOCOPY,INCR,CHGREC,PERSISTENT,INHIBITWRT. The Primary receives an Increment Complete message when the FlashCopies are done. The Next Increment is set and the CR bit map is moved to the Out-of-Sync bitmap or OOS and the next drain is started to the secondary volumes. Writes are released, the CR is updated and waits for the next Run command to begin the cycle again.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-23

Student Notebook

8-24 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

8.3 Advanced Copy Services

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-25

Student Notebook

Topic: Advanced Copy Services

Review of the Advanced Copy Services Local Flash Copy Remote Mirror and Copy

Advanced Copy Services for DS6000 and DS8000 IBM TotalStorage DS CLI for Copy Services DS Storage Manager Copy Services GUI

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-21. Topic: Advanced Copy Services

SS481.0

Notes:

8-26 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

Advanced Copy Services Advanced Copy Services functions available on the ESS 800 are all available on the DS8000 (except for IBM TotalStorage Metro/Global Copy) and on the DS6000 (except for IBM TotalStorage Metro/Global Copy and IBM TotalStorage z/OS Global Mirror (XRC)) IBM TotalStorage FlashCopy GUI does not support Consistency Groups

PPRC Must use FCP PPRC links GUI does not support FREEZE/RUN Functions invoked via DS CLI or for a one time event the GUI Tasks can not be saved using the new GUI

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-22. Advanced Copy Services

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-27

Student Notebook

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

IBM TotalStorage Metro/Global Copy Original support (not available on the DS8000 or DS6000) Concept PPRC secondary volume serves as PPRC primary volume for another PPRC relationship Same secondary volume serves as both target and source

Intended benefit Long distance remote copy solution for zSeries and open systems data with the performance impact of only a short distance Metro Mirror

Remote Pairs Local Pairs

Global Copy

Host I/O

Primary Primary

Local Site

Secondary

Secondary

Intermediate

Remote

Site

Site

DS8000 DS6000 Technical Overview Workshop

Unit 08 Copy Services |

© 2005 IBM Corporation

© 2003 IBM Corporation

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-23. IBM TotalStorage Metro/Global Copy

SS481.0

Notes: The Copy Services that are available for the DS8000 are FlashCopy and Metro Mirror. There is intention to support Global Copy and Global Mirror, but those are not available yet (5/10/05).

8-28 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

Statement of Direction: Metro/Global Copy Enhancement Enhancement (to be available on DS8000 and DS6000) Allow intermediate site to use Global Mirror to the remote site Provides data consistency in the event both the local and intermediate sites are lost in a disaster

Remote Pairs Local Pairs

Global Mirror

Host I/O

FC

Primary Primary

Local Site

Secondary

Secondary

Intermediate

Remote

Site

Site

FlashCopy target

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-24. Statement of Direction: Metro/Global Copy Enhancement

SS481.0

Notes: The cascaded PPRC function is not supported for the DS8000, but in the ESS, it allows a three-volume cascade to be set up, where the second volume is a secondary and a primary at the same time.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-29

Student Notebook

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

DS8000 LPAR and Copy Services LPAR 1

LPAR 2 PPRC Primary

PPRC Primary

PPRC Secondary

FlashCopy Source

PPRC Secondary

FlashCopy Source

X

FlashCopy Target

FlashCopy Target

FlashCopy within an LPAR PPRC within an LPAR or across LPARs

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-25. DS8000 LPAR and Copy Services

SS481.0

Notes: The FlashCopy function can only operate to volumes on extent pools that belong to the LPAR. Volumes on the other LPAR are not available for FlashCopy, however, the PPRC function can be used to mirror to a volume in the other LPAR.

8-30 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

License for FlashCopy (1 of 2) I want to FlashCopy 10 TB of FB and 12 TB of CKD.

DS8000 with 45 TB disk capacity in total, 45 TB FlashCopy authorization, 45 TB of OEL Licensed function and license scope of ALL

User FlashCopies up to 20 TB of FB

user data plus FC data up to 20 TB FB

20 TB (FB) + 25 TB (CKD) + -------45 TB total capacity --------

solution User has 20 TB of FB data and has 25 TB of CKD data allocated. The user has to purchase a Point-in-Time function equal to the total of both the FB and CKD capacity, that is 20 TB (FB) + 25 TB (CKD) equals 45 TB.

user data plus FC data up to 25 TB CKD

User FlashCopies up to 25 TB of CKD

Important - If user changes license scope from ALL to FB or CKD an IML is required

FC - FlashCopy

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-26. License for FlashCopy (1 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: The scope of the license describes the intended use for the function. If All storage is specified, then both CKD and FB volumes can be FlashCopied, but if one or the other is specified, then only LSSs in that mode can be used and only up to that amount.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-31

Student Notebook

License for FlashCopy (2 of 2) DS8000 with 45 TB disk capacity in total, 25 TB of CKD FlashCopy authorization with license scope of CKD, 45 TB of OEL Licensed function

User cannot FlashCopy any FB

20 TB FB

25 TB CKD

User authorize to FlashCopy up to 25 TB

20 TB (FB) + 25 TB (CKD) + -------45 TB total capacity --------

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-27. License for FlashCopy (2 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: In the example above, if the FlashCopy license is bought only for CKD storage, then no FB FlashCopies will be allowed and then only up to 25 TB of storage.

8-32 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

License for Remote Mirror Copy Primary DS8000 with 45 TB disk capacity in total, Secondary DS8000 with 45 TB disk capacity, 45 TB Remote Mirror Copy authorization for primary DS8000 and 45 TB Remote Mirror Copy for secondary DS8000, 45 TB of OEL Licensed function for primary DS8000 and 45 TB of OEL Licensed function for secondary DS8000. The license scope may be FB and CKD or ALL

20 TB FB user data

20 TB FB user data

Metro Mirror 25 TB CKD user data

25 TB CKD user data

Primary DS8000

Secondary DS8000

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-28. Licence for Remote Mirror Copy

SS481.0

Notes: The remote mirror can be licensed in much the same way, either for all storage or for just FB or CKD storage.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-33

Student Notebook

8-34 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

8.4 DSCLI for Copy Services

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-35

Student Notebook

Topic: DS CLI for Copy Services Review of the Advanced Copy Services Local Flash Copy Remote Mirror and Copy

Advanced Copy Services for DS6000 and DS8000 IBM TotalStorage DS CLI for Copy Services DS Storage Manager Copy Services GUI

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-29. Topic: DS CLI for Copy Services

SS481.0

Notes:

8-36 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

What’s New?

The new DS CLI replaces the CS CLI and ESS CLI Provides new functions to dynamically create and manage FlashCopy and PPRC relationships without any use of a GUI Allows a PPRC relationship between 2105 and the DS8000 and DS6000 Enables dynamic FlashCopy and PPRC relationships on ESS 800 storage servers Prior to DS CLI it was required to create a task using the GUI interface and then saving it DS CLI commands can be saved as scripts which significantly reduces the time to create, edit and verify their content Uses a consistent syntax with other IBM TotalStorage products now and in the future All of the function available to the GUI is also available via the DS CLI © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-30. What’s New?

SS481.0

Notes: Probably the biggest change to Copy Services from the ESS to the DS8000 is the use of the DSCLI. In the ESS, all functions had to be implemented using the ESS Specialist Copy Services GUI, and saving those functions as tasks which could be automated using reExecuteTask.sh. Now in the DS6000 and DS8000 the only way to automate Copy Services is using the DSCLI. The GUI can no longer be used create tasks, so although it can be used to create a FlashCopy or a Remote Copy relationships, it has little use for automation.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-37

Student Notebook

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

ESS Copy Services Command Flow with CS CLI

Open systems host CLI script

ESS CLIsoftware software ESSCS CLI

Network interface

CS Server A

CS Server B

CS Client

CS Client

Cluster 1 Cluster 2 ESS 800

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-31. ESS Copy Services Command Flow with CS CLI

SS481.0

Notes: The ESSCLI is installed on the host system and communicates directly with the ESS cluster servers over the IP network. The ESSCLI has a network component that communicates to a CS client interface and the Copy Services Server in one of two defined Copy Services Servers in a CS Server Group.

8-38 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 Copy Services Components

S-HMC 1 (internal)

Processor Complex 0

Ethernet Switch 1

Customer Network DS Storage Manager

DS CLI

DS8000 (S-HMC 2) (external)

Ethernet Switch 2

Processor Complex 1

DS API

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-32. DS8000 Copy Services Components

SS481.0

Notes: The DSCLI is also installed on a customer host system along with other software such as the DS Storage Manager and the DS API, and uses the network interface client to communicate with the network interface server in the HMC or external S-HMC. These consoles are connected to the DS8000 processor complex via internal Ethernet switches located in the DS8000 base frame.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-39

Student Notebook

DS8000 CLI Copy Services Command Flow

O pen system s host

Storage HM C

CLI interpreter

CLI script

ESS CLI softw software are DS CLI External netw ork interface

Netw ork interface

CS Server A

CS Server B

CS Client

CS Client

Cluster 1 Cluster 2 ESS 800

Dual internal netw ork interfaces

CLI interface

CLI interface

Server 0

Server 1 DS8000

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-33. DS8000 CLI Copy Services Command Flow

SS481.0

Notes: The DSCLI can communicate with both the DS8000 or the ESS using the network interface which is basically the same component in both systems. A portion of the DSCLI commands and all of the Copy Services commands can be issued to an ESS running 2.4.0.x code to either of the two Copy Services Servers or to the DS8000 through the HMC network interface server.

8-40 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS6000 CLI Copy Services Command Flow

Open systems host

DS Storage Management PC

CLI script

ESS CLI software software DS CLI

CLI interpreter

Network interface

Network interface

CLI interface

CLI interface

Controller 1

Controller 2

DS6000 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-34. DS6000 CLI Copy Services Command Flow

SS481.0

Notes: The DSCLI can communicate with both the DS6000 through the SMC and its network interface server. The network interface can then communicate commands directly to the DS6000 command line interface for execution.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-41

Student Notebook

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

CLI Copy Services Coexistence for ESS and DS

Open systems host

Storage HMC

ESS 800 tasks

DS8000 tasks

ESS CLI software

DS CLI software

Network interface

Infoserver

CLI interpreter

External network interface

Dual internal network interfaces

CLI interface

CLI interface

Server 0

Server 1 DS8000

Infoserver

Cluster 1 Cluster 2 ESS 800

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-35. CLI Copy Services Coexistence for ESS and DS

SS481.0

Notes: Since both the ESSCLI and the DSCLI can be loaded and run at the same time on a host system, you can still use the existing task and scripts for the ESS, and at the same time issue DSCLI commands and script to the DS6000 or DS8000 via the HMC.

8-42 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS CLI Copy Services Commands DS CLI can be used to invoke: FlashCopy PPRC IBM TotalStorage Metro Mirror Synchronous PPRC

IBM TotalStorage Global Copy PPRC-XD

IBM TotalStorage Global Mirror Asynchronous PPRC

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-36. DS CLI Copy Services Commands

SS481.0

Notes: The DSCLI can be used to invoke all of the PPRC and FlashCopy functions.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-43

Student Notebook

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

DS CLI FlashCopy

mkflash Establish FlashCopy pairs -wait (respond when background copy complete) -restore lsflash List FlashCopy relationships with status information –activecp filter or actcpy status indicates background copy active Outsynctrks status reports out of sync tracks chflash Modify FlashCopy relationship -Refreshtgt (starts background copy, withdraws at end) rmflash Withdraw FlashCopy relationship -Refreshtgt (starts background copy, withdraws at end)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-37. DS CLI FlashCopy

SS481.0

Notes: The mkflash command is the basic FlashCopy function. You can start FlashCopies or stop them with rmflash and list current relationships with lsflash. The chflash allows changing the options on an existing relationship.

8-44 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

DS CLI PPRC - Paths

lsavailpprcport List FCP ports available for PPRC path definition Port id (Ixxxx) identifies enclosure, adapter, port mkpprcpath Establish PPRC path chpprcpath Modify PPRC path –freezeconsistgrp resetconsistgrp lspprcpath List PPRC paths with status rmpprcpath Delete PPRC path

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-38. DS CLI PPRC - Paths

SS481.0

Notes: The PPRC function can also be invoked using the DSCLI. The PPRC function requires paths be established to the secondary LSS from the primary LSS. These path commands control that function.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-45

Student Notebook

DS CLI PPRC - Global Mirror LSS/LCU session (consistency group) mksession (define, open and add volumes) chsession (add/remove vols) rmsession (close session) Async process session mkasyncpprc (start or resume async process) showasyncpprc (display async status) chasyncpprc (pause async process) stopasyncpprc (terminate async process)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-39. DS CLI PPRC – Global Mirror

SS481.0

Notes: The mksession command defines a global mirror session and can be used to add volumes to it. It also, chsession can be used to add more volumes at a later time. The mkasyncpprc, stpasynpprc, showasyncpprc or chasyncpprc start, stop, change, suspend a defined global mirror session.

8-46 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

DS CLI PPRC - Pairs

mkpprc Establish/re-establish PPRC pair -wait (respond when full duplex) lspprc List PPRC relationships and status (for example, copy pending, full duplex, suspended) chpprc Modify PPRC relationship -type sync or XD -resync (failback) -reversecp (failover) -wait (respond when full duplex) rmpprc Suspend or terminate PPRC pair –type suspend or break © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-40. DS CLI PPRC - Pairs

SS481.0

Notes: The mkpprc, rmpprc, lspprc and chpprc can start and stop or change PPRC relationships, such as metro mirror or global copy. These commands must also be used to set up the basic PPRC-XD functions used for the global mirror sessions.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-47

Student Notebook

DS CLI Clearvol clearvol command The clearvol command clears Copy Services relationships for a base logical volume PPRC primary/secondary relationships FlashCopy source/target relationships

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-41. DS CLI Clearvol

SS481.0

Notes: The clearvol is a new command that is useful for clearing any existing relationships from a volume.

8-48 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS CLI PPRC DS8000/DS6000 can have PPRC relationships with ESS 800 Invoked with DS CLI ESS 800 must be at LIC 2.4.x or higher ESS 800 Copy Services cannot create tasks that include DS8000/DS6000 boxes DS CLI can be used for ESS 800 copy services but not ESS 800 configuration Removes the need to define tasks on the ESS! Use one of the Copy Services Servers (A or B) IP addresses instead of the management console address as you would for the DS8000/DS6000 PPRC source has to be in the same Copy Services Domain as the server but the target does not need to be within the same domain ESS where you wish to perform FlashCopy must be a client of the server

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-42. DS CLI PPRC

SS481.0

Notes: The CLI Migration is a task that is performed to move ESSCLI tasks to the DSCLI scripts. The process of migrating to a DS8000 for Copy Services from an ESS that is heavily involved in Copy Services PPRC or FlashCopy or both requires that the tasks saved in the ESS Specialist CS task list be translated and converted to DSCLI command strings. These DSCLI commands can then be placed into files and saved as DSCLI scripts which can be run in much the same way the ESS tasks were run from shell scripts to automate the Copy Services functions.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-49

Student Notebook

8-50 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

8.5 DS Storage Manager for Copy Services

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-51

Student Notebook

Topic: DS Storage Manager Copy Services GUI Review of the Advanced Copy Services Local Flash Copy Remote Mirror and Copy

Advanced Copy Services for DS6000 and DS8000 IBM TotalStorage DS CLI for Copy Services DS Storage Manager Copy Services GUI

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-43. Topic: DS Storage Manager Copy Services GUI

SS481.0

Notes:

8-52 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

DS Storage Manager Copy Services GUI

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-44. DS Storage Manager Copy Services GUI

SS481.0

Notes: The GUI real-time has a Copy Services interface.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-53

Student Notebook

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

GUI Create FlashCopy Pairs Define relationship types Single source/single target Single source/multiple targets Select source volumes Select target volumes

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-45. GUI Create FlashCopy Pairs

SS481.0

Notes: The GUI is limited it its scope of operation. It may be a good testing tool, but little more.

8-54 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

GUI FlashCopy

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-46. GUI FlashCopy

SS481.0

Notes: The FlashCopy GUI allows the user to select a single source and single target and establish a FlashCopy relationship.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-55

Student Notebook

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

GUI Select FlashCopy Options (1 of 2) Common options Persistent Initiate background copy Enable change recording Permit if target is online Establish target on existing PPRC source Advanced options Inhibit writes to source Inhibit writes to target Allow target to be restored to pre-FlashCopy state (revertible) Sequence number

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-47. GUI Select FlashCopy Options (1 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: The options of FlashCopy are available except the consistency group options.

8-56 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

GUI Select FlashCopy Options (2 of 2) Options available after selecting a common or advanced option Refresh target volumes (incremental) Displayed when objects have persistent and change recording

Reverse relationship (incremental) Displayed when objects have persistent and change recording

Commit changes Displayed when objects had the target to be restored to pre-FlashCopy state’ selected

Discard Changes Displayed when objects had the target to be restored to pre-FlashCopy state selected

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-48. GUI Select FlashCopy Options (2 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: These options can be selected after the initial options.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-57

Student Notebook

Paths

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

© 2003 IBM Corporation © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-49. Paths

SS481.0

Notes: The GUI displays the result in a list of FlashCopy relationships.

8-58 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

GUI LSS Copy Options Concurrent copy timeout

z/OS Global Mirror (XRC) timeout Critical mode enabled Consistency group timeout enabled When true, a primary logical device on this logical subsystem in an LSS consistency group becomes long busy after reporting an error condition that causes metro mirror suspension until either a consistency group created operation is performed or until the extended long busy timeout has elapsed. When false, a logical device on this logical subsystem does not become long busy after reporting an error that causes a metro mirror suspension. Consistency group timeout Default is 120 seconds

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-50. GUI LSS Copy Options

SS481.0

Notes: The GUI allows us to set up XRC timeouts and consistency groups.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-59

Student Notebook

IBM MOP Products and Solutions Support Center

Metro Mirror Real-time

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-51. Metro Mirror Real-time

SS481.0

Notes: The GUI panel to create a PPRC path. To create a new path, select Action Create and click Go. You are directed through a wizard to select the source and target LSS and the I/O port connected to the source LSS. The wizard allows you to select the PPRC options and then Verify your settings and Finish to create the path. Paths must be created before volume pairs can be created.

8-60 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 GUI Copy Services

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-52. DS8000 GUI Copy Services

SS481.0

Notes: The DS8000 GUI Copy Services GUI can be used to execute Copy Services function in single shot mode. There is currently no ability to save GUI tasks and execute them as was the case in the ESS Copy Services Web interface. So, automation of the Copy Service functions is primarily done using the DSCLI.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-61

Student Notebook

Communicate with ESS Copy Services

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-53. Communicate with ESS Copy Services

SS481.0

Notes: To communicate with ESS Copy Services domain, the user must define the Copy Services Servers of the Copy Services domain. The GUI provides a panel to perform this definition. Once defined, the DS8000 can participate in the ESS Copy Services domain functions.

8-62 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create FlashCopy

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-54. Create FlashCopy

SS481.0

Notes: To create a FlashCopy using the GUI, select the Copy Services menu and select the FlashCopy function. A panel is displayed and the user can select the Create action to create a FlashCopy. The panel wizard continues and walks the user through the process of selecting a source volume and target volume for the FlashCopy.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-63

Student Notebook

Create a FlashCopy Wizard

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-55. Create a FlashCopy Wizard

SS481.0

Notes: The create a FlashCopy wizard walks the user through the process of creating a FlashCopy of a source volume.

8-64 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Select a Source Volume

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-56. Select a Source Volume

SS481.0

Notes: The user is given a list of source volumes and is asked to select a source volume for the FlashCopy. Click next and you are given a list of target volumes.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-65

Student Notebook

ESS Copy Services CLI Commands rsExecuteTask Executes one or more saved tasks Tasks can perform any PPRC or FlashCopy function Tasks run in parallel rsQuery Obtains status of volumes and paths rsQueryComplete Queries for the completion of PPRC copy initialization rsList2105s Lists the mapping between host disk drive name (for example, hdisk) to ESS LUN serial number rsPrimeServer Loads rsList2105s output into ESS Copy Services server Makes Copy Services server easier to use (can use host names to identify volumes) rsTestConnection A debugging tool to test communication to the ESS Copy Services server

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-57. ESS Copy Services CLI Commands

SS481.0

Notes: The CLI commands supported allow you to test the ESS Copy Services connection, query volumes or PPRC initialization, or prime the CS Server with disk names. No tasks can be created with the CLI. The tasks must be created using the graphical interface, and then they can be executed using the rsExecuteTask command. The CLI includes IBM Java 1.1.8 or higher for Windows, AIX and Sun. Other platforms must get it separately to use the CLI. In contrast, the DSCLI has a very robust set of commands for Copy Services.

8-66 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DSCLI Copy Services Commands FlashCopy Commands

PPRC Commands

commitflash

failoverpprc

commitremoteflash incflash

freezepprc lspprcpath

incremoteflash

lsavailpprcport

lsflash lsremoteflash

mkgmir mkpprcpath

mkflash

mkesconpprcpath

mkremoteflash

mkpprc

reverseflash

pausegmir

reverseremoteflash revertflash

pausegmi resumegmir

revertremoteflash

resumepprc

rmflash rmremoteflash

rmgmir rmpprc

setremoteflashrev setflashrevertible

rmpprcpath unfreezepprc

unfreezeflash © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-58. DSCLI Copy Services Commands

SS481.0

Notes: You can easily upgrade your system to use DS CLI by following the remove and install procedures put in place for DS CLI. However, there are some things that you need to consider before making this upgrade. The DS CLI is designed to support the following features that exist on the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server (ESS) Models 750 and 800: • A Copy Services domain, configured as part of the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server (ESS) Models 750 and 800. • FlashCopy Version 2 and PPRC Version 2 licenses that are available on the ESS. However, the DS CLI is not designed to support the CLI scripts that you have written for these features without modification.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-67

Student Notebook

Make a FlashCopy dscli>mkflash -dev IBM.2107-75FA120 0010:0210 -record -persist 0010:0210 0011:0211 0012:02120013:0213 0014:0214 Date/Time: Fri Feb 25 12:23:49 PST 2002 DS CLI Version: 5.0.1.126 DS: IBM.2107-75FA120 FlashCopy pair 0010:0210 successfully created. FlashCopy pair 0011:0211 successfully created. FlashCopy pair 0012:0212 successfully created. FlashCopy pair 0013:0213 successfully created. FlashCopy pair 0014:0214 successfully created.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-59. Make a FlashCopy

SS481.0

Notes: In the display above, a FlashCopy command is issued and the resulting output is displayed showing that the command was successful. As you can see, you can specify one or more volume pairs in these commands. This mkflash command also sets up an incremental FlashCopy because of the -record and -persist options that are set with the command.

8-68 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

List Established FlashCopies dscli>lsflash -l -dev IBM.2107-75FA120 0010:0210 Date/Time: Fri Feb 25 12:27:49 PST 2002 DS CLI Version: 5.0.1.126 DS: IBM.2107-75FA120 ID SrcLSS Sequence Num Timeout Active Copy Recording Persistent Revertible Source Write Enabled Target Write Enabled Background Copy Out Of Sync Tracks Date Created Date Synced

0010:0210 00 10 120 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled 0 02/25/2005 02/25/2005

12:23:49 12:23:50

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-60. List Established FlashCopies

SS481.0

Notes: This command lists the options for FlashCopies.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-69

Student Notebook

Checkpoint Exercise -- Unit 8 Checkpoint 1. T/F The DS8000 supports all of the ESS Copy Services features. 2. T/F The DS8000 Metro Mirror can be connected to a ESS as a secondary subsystem for Remote Copies 3. T/F The DS6000 support PPRC over ESCON channels with an ESS subsystem. 4. T/F The DS8000 CLI supports Copy Services commands to allow users to automate their FlashCopy or Metro Mirror copies. 5. T/F The DS8000 Storage Manager can be used to automate DS8000 Copy Services.

8-70 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit Summary Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Describe the IBM DS8000 Copy Services Describe the FlashCopy functions Describe the Remote Mirror functions Describe the DS8000 Storage Manager GUI Copy Services Describe the IBM DS8000 CLI for Copy Services Describe the migration from ESS to DS8000 Copy Services

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 8-61. Unit Summary

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 8. DS Copy Services Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-71

Student Notebook

8-72 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration What This Unit Is About The DS6000/DS8000 storage subsystem allows you to create logical volumes and attach them to hosts. This unit looks at considerations for attachment to host systems, including multipath drivers, host setup requirements, and examples of LUN creation and attachment to a host.

What You Should Be Able to Do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Describe the host attachment consideration for pSeries hosts • Describe the host attachment consideration for Windows hosts • Describe the host attachment consideration for Linux hosts • Describe the host attachment consideration for iSeries hosts

How You Will Check Your Progress Accountability: • Checkpoint • Machine exercises

References SG24-6452

IBM TotalStorage DS8000 Series Architecture and Concepts

SC24-7623

IBM TotalStorage: DS8000 User's Guide

GC26-0495

IBM TotalStorage DS8000 Introduction and Planning Guide

SY27-7641

IBM TotalStorage DS8000 Installation Guide

SC26-7628

IBM TotalStorage DS8000 Host Attachment Guide

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-1

Student Notebook

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you should be able to: Describe the pSeries host attachment considerations Describe the Windows host attachment considerations Describe the Linux host attachment considerations Describe the iSeries host attachment considerations

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-1. Unit Objectives

SS481.0

Notes:

9-2

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

9.1 AIX Support

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-3

Student Notebook

Topics: AIX Support AIX Support Windows Support Linux Support iSeries Support

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-2. Topics: AIX Support

SS481.0

Notes:

9-4

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM MOP Product and Solution Support Center

DS8000 and DS6000 AIX Support Support Configuration AIX server Checking of code level Installing SDD and DSXXXX Fileset Replace 2105 fileset

Discover WWN of FC HBA

DS6000 Volume group configuration Host attachment configuration LUN creation

AIX server Cfgmgr

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-3. DS8000 and DS6000 AIX Support

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-5

Student Notebook

IBM MOP Product and Solution Support Center

IBM pSeries and RS/6000 Servers - AIX (1 of 2) Supported FC adapters: The following fibre-channel adapters are supported for RS/6000 or pSeries host systems: Feature code 6228 Feature code 6239 Feature code 5716

Host Attachment scripts: Two different Host Attachment scripts for AIX: Attachment script to be used with SDD Attachment script to be used with MPIO

Verification: Use command lsdev –Cc disk to verify that DS6000 or DS8000 volumes are correctly recognized on the AIX host: Example: lsdev -Cc disk | grep 2107 hdisk3 Available 30-68-01 IBM FC 2107 hdisk4 Available 30-68-01 IBM FC 2107 hdisk5 Available 30-68-01 IBM FC 2107 … © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-4. IBM pSeries and RS/6000 Servers - AIX (1 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes:

9-6

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM pSeries and RS/6000 Servers - AIX (2 of 2) Supported multipath software: IBM SDD 1.6.0 for AIX 5.1 ML7, 5.2 ML5 and 5.3 ML1 AIX MPIO for AIX 5.2 ML5 and 5.3 ML1 Boot support: DS8000 and DS6000 are supported as boot devices for AIX hosts that support fibre channel boot capabilities.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-5. IBM pSeries and RS/6000 Servers - AIX (2 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-7

Student Notebook

Checking AIX Code Level

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-6. Checking AIX Code Level

SS481.0

Notes: The fibre channel adapters can be listed using the lsdev command. Use the –Cc option and grep the adapters for the string fcs.

9-8

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Remove 2105 Fileset (1 of 9)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-7. Remove 2105 Fileset (1 of 9)

SS481.0

Notes: If the server has never been attached to an IBM ESS then, we can proceed with the installation of the new 2107 device driver and SDD, but if it has been configured with ESS volumes the old SDD and the devices.fcp.ibm.2105.rt must be removed first. Unmount all filesystems on ESS disks, vary the volume groups offline, and export the file systems. All devices of the ESS and the dpo device of the SDD driver must be removed with rmdev. List the devices currently in use.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-9

Student Notebook

Remove 2105 Fileset (2 of 9)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-8. Remove 2105 Fileset (2 of 9)

SS481.0

Notes: List the software installed using lslpp and list the hdisks using lsdev. First rmdev the dpo device of SDD. Make sure any filesystems on these LUNS are unmounted and the volume groups are offline. You can export the volume groups too. If you need the data on these volumes it is OK, you can import them again once the new device driver and SDD are installed.

9-10 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Remove 2105 Fileset (3 of 9)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-9. Remove 2105 Fileset (3 of 9)

SS481.0

Notes: Remove the hdisks with rmdev –l hdisk# -d for each device, also delete the vpath devices with rmdev –l vpath# -d. Make sure all the devices are gone by doing a lsdev –Cc disk. Only the internal HDD should remain. Do an lsvg and only rootvg should remain unless there are filesystems on non-ESS disks.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-11

Student Notebook

Remove 2105 Fileset (4 of 9)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-10. Remove 2105 Fileset (4 of 9)

SS481.0

Notes: Remove the fibre channel adapters too.

9-12 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Remove 2105 Fileset (5 of 9)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-11. Remove 2105 Fileset (5 of 9)

SS481.0

Notes: Go into smit and Software, -> Utilities -> Remove installed software. Find the devices.fcp.disk.ibm2105.rte and remove it from the system. Also find the SDD software and dremove it too.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-13

Student Notebook

Remove 2105 Fileset (6 of 9)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-12. Remove 2105 Fileset (6 of 9)

SS481.0

Notes: Select the fileset and continue.

9-14 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Remove 2105 Fileset (7 of 9)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-13. Remove 2105 Fileset (7 of 9)

SS481.0

Notes: Make sure the preview option is no. If set to yes, the uninstall does not occur.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-15

Student Notebook

Remove 2105 Fileset (8 of 9)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-14. Remove 2105 Fileset (8 of 9)

SS481.0

Notes: The ibm2105.rte files are removed; verify it from the output.

9-16 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Remove 2105 Fileset (9 of 9)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-15. Remove 2105 Fileset (9 of 9)

SS481.0

Notes: Run cfgmgr and verify that only internal disks remain.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-17

Student Notebook

FileSet and MP SDD Installation

devices.fcp.disk.ibm.rte http://www-1.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?rs=540andcontext=ST52G7anddc=D400andq1=ESS+scriptanduid=ssg1S4000106andloc=en_USandcs=utf-8andlang=en

Platform AIX 5.2 SDD v1.6.0.2 http://www-1.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?rs=540andcontext=ST52G7anddc=D430anduid=ssg1S4000065andloc=en_USandcs=utf-8andlang=en

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-16. FileSet and MP SDD Installation

SS481.0

Notes: Let’s install the new device driver and SDD. The user does have an option to use mpio if running AIX 5.2 or 5.3 The new filesets provide a standard device driver which is generic and supports either ESS 2105 or DS6000 1750 or DS8000 2107 devices. And the SDD component at 1.6.0.2.

9-18 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

MP SDD Installation (1 of 7)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-17. MP SDD Installation (1 of 7)

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-19

Student Notebook

MP SDD Installation (2 of 7)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-18. MP SDD Installation (2 of 7)

SS481.0

Notes: Unpack the device driver and SDD using tar with the –xvf options.

9-20 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

MP SDD Installation (3 of 7)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-19. MP SDD Installation (3 of 7)

SS481.0

Notes: Create a .toc file. This may or may not be necessary as the installation process usually does this.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-21

Student Notebook

MP SDD Installation (4 of 7)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-20. MP SDD Installation (4 of 7)

SS481.0

Notes: Call smit software install for latest available software.

9-22 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

MP SDD Installation (5 of 7)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-21. MP SDD Installation (5 of 7)

SS481.0

Notes: Select the device driver fileset, both the device driver and SDD are installed.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-23

Student Notebook

MP SDD Installation (6 of 7)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-22. MP SDD Installation (6 of 7)

SS481.0

Notes: Run the install and verify the OK result.

9-24 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

MP SDD Installation (7 of 7)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-23. MP SDD Installation (7 of 7)

SS481.0

Notes: List the result and verify the install.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-25

Student Notebook

Discover WWN of FC HBAs (1 of 3)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-24. Discover WWN of FC HBAs (1 of 3)

SS481.0

Notes: Now let’s go discover the devices again using the new drivers and SDD. Check the fibre cards.

9-26 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Discover WWN of FC HBAs (2 of 3)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-25. Discover WWN of FC HBAs (2 of 3)

SS481.0

Notes: List the fcs0 and fcs1 to get the WWN of the adapters.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-27

Student Notebook

Discover WWN of FC HBAs (3 of 3)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-26. Discover WWN of FC HBAs (3 of 3)

SS481.0

Notes: List the WWN of fcs1.

9-28 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Now You Go to the DS6000 (1 of 4)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-27. Now You Go to the DS6000 (1 of 4)

SS481.0

Notes: Now let go define the disk in the DS6000. Log on to the DSCLI. If you have not installed it yet, then get the CD containing the code and install the AIX version on the system. It is not a smooth installation, but a bin file that can run in –silent mode if being done from a telnet session.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-29

Student Notebook

Now You Go to the DS6000 (2 of 4)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-28. Now You Go to the DS6000 (2 of 4)

SS481.0

Notes: Verify that you have arrays and ranks and FB extent pools for open system volumes.

9-30 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Now You Go to the DS6000 (3 of 4)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-29. Now You Go to the DS6000 (3 of 4)

SS481.0

Notes: OK, looks like we have the extent pools we need to create volumes. If not, back up and make them now, then we can proceed.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-31

Student Notebook

Now You Go to the DS6000 (4 of 4)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-30. Now You Go to the DS6000 (4 of 4)

SS481.0

Notes: List the hostconnections defined and the current volume groups. We do not have anything here for AIX so we have to create one.

9-32 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Volume Group

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-31. Volume Group

SS481.0

Notes: Let’s make a volume group. We make a volume group with the type scsimask with a name of VG_AIX_Server.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-33

Student Notebook

Host Attachment (1 of 3)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-32. Host Attachment (1 of 3)

SS481.0

Notes: Make two hostconnections using the WWNs of the adapters on the AIX server using VG4 we just defined and the I/O ports that they connect into on the DS6000. List them and verify that they are correct.

9-34 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Host Attachment (2 of 3)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-33. Host Attachment (2 of 3)

SS481.0

Notes: We are just listing the hosttype scsimask to show what host types it includes. pSeries is what we want, so this is correct.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-35

Student Notebook

Host Attachment (3 of 3) I/O ports lwxyz (RICT) w=frame 0-2 (DS8000) 0 (DS6000)

x=enclosure 0-7 (DS8000) 0-1 (DS6000)

y=card 0, 1, 3, or 4 (DS8000) 0-1 (DS6000)

z=port 0-3 top to bottom (DS8000 FICON/FCP) 0-3 left to right (DS6000 FICON/FCP) 0-1 top to bottom (DS8000 ESCON)

I0000-I2343 (DS8000) I0000-I0003 and I0100-I0103 (DS6000)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-34. Host Attachment (3 of 3)

SS481.0

Notes: These are the I/O ports definitions.

9-36 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

LUN Creation (1 of 2)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-35. LUN Creation (1 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: List the devices already defined.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-37

Student Notebook

LUN Creation (2 of 2)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-36. LUN Creation (2 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: Make an FB volume, or two or three, depending on what you need.

9-38 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

On AIX Server After CFGMGR No Connection to the Switch

The FC HBA is not connected to the switch

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-37. On AIX Server After CFGMGR - No Connection to the Switch

SS481.0

Notes: Run cfgmgr. Oops, no connection to the ESS so we can’t see the LUNs.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-39

Student Notebook

IBM MOP Product and Solution Support Center

On AIX Server After CFGMGR Connection to the Switch

The FC HBA is connected to the switch

The FC HBA is connected to the switch

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-38. On AIX Server After GFGMGR - Connection to the Switch

SS481.0

Notes: OK, we fixed the problem and rerun cfgmgr; now the adapter is showing up.

9-40 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

On AIX Server After CFGMGR Connection to the Switch and to the DS6000

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-39. On AIX Server After CFGMGR - Connection to the Switch and to the DS6000

SS481.0

Notes: Let’s see if the LUN is there.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-41

Student Notebook

After CFGMGR (1 of 3)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-40. After CFGMGR (1 of 3)

SS481.0

Notes: Yes, a couple of new devices and a vpath device, so SDD is working.

9-42 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

After CFGMGR (2 of 3)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-41. After CFGMGR (2 of 3)

SS481.0

Notes: Do an lsdev and the devices display as 1750 disks from the DS6000.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-43

Student Notebook

After CFGMGR (3 of 3)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-42. After CFGMGR (3 of 3)

SS481.0

Notes: Query the device using SDDs datapath command.

9-44 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

After Creation of VG and FS (1 of 3)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-43. After Creation of VG and FS (1 of 3)

SS481.0

Notes: OK, the volume is there, so we made a volume group, logical volume, and a filesystem using smit, and now we can display the results. Display the volume info with lspv or lscfg.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-45

Student Notebook

After Creation of VG and FS (2 of 3)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-44. After Creation of VG and FS (2 of 3)

SS481.0

Notes: The volume group DS6KFS shows up in the lsvg and a df –k shows us a filesystem mounted on the mount point by the same name. Done.

9-46 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

After Creation of VG and FS (3 of 3)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-45. After Creation of VG and FS (3 of 3)

SS481.0

Notes: The device is defined and shows as a device with two paths on fscsi0 and fscsi1. It is device 1203 on the DS6000 13AAY2A.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-47

Student Notebook

9-48 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

9.2 Windows Support

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-49

Student Notebook

Topics: Windows AIX Support Windows Support Linux Support iSeries Support

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-46. Topics: Windows

SS481.0

Notes: The DS6000 or DS8000 can configure volumes for Windows servers. This section covers Windows setup and configuration considerations.

9-50 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM MOP Product and Solution Support Center

Windows Support Support Configuration Windows 2000 server

Installing SDD and DSXXXX Fileset Discover WWN of FC HBA

DS6K Volume group configuration Host attachment configuration LUN creation

Windows 2000 server Rescan or reboot

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-47. Windows Support

SS481.0

Notes: The Windows servers uses SDD for multipathing support.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-51

Student Notebook

IBM MOP Product and Solution Support Center

Intel-Based Servers - Windows Supported multipath softwares: SDD is available for MS Windows 2000 and MS Windows Server 2003 SDD does not support I/O Load balancing with Windows 2000 cluster configurations (MSCS) Boot support: DS8000 and DS6000 are supported as boot devices on MS Windows 2000 (32-bit) or MS Windows Server 2003 (32-bit or 64-bit) servers that support Fibre Channel boot capabilities. Restrictions: DS API is only available for MS Windows 2000

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-48. Intel-Based Servers - Windows

SS481.0

Notes: Support is provided for multipath access and boot support, but applications using the DS API may only run on Windows 2000.

9-52 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Windows Disk Management (1 of 2)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-49. Windows Disk Management (1 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: We start with a Windows server with nothing attached but the C drive.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-53

Student Notebook

Windows Disk Management (2 of 2)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-50. Windows Disk Management (2 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes:

9-54 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

MP SDD Installation (1 of 3)

Web site: www-.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?rs=540andcontext=ST52G7anddc=D430anduid=ssg1S4000054andloc=en_USandcs=utf-8andlang=en

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-51. MP SDD Installation (1 of 3)

SS481.0

Notes: Go to the Web site and get the SDD or get it from the CD.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-55

Student Notebook

MP SDD Installation (2 of 3)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-52. MP SDD Installation (2 of 3)

SS481.0

Notes: Expand the file and run the setup.exe to install the product.

9-56 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

MP SDD Installation (3 of 3)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-53. MP SDD Installation (3 of 3)

SS481.0

Notes: Reboot after the installation to finish.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-57

Student Notebook

Volume Group on DS6000 (1 of 6)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-54. Volume Group on DS6000 (1 of 6)

SS481.0

Notes: Create a DS6000 or DS8000 volume group to connect the volumes to the host connection. Create a volume group using the GUI or the DSCLI.

9-58 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Volume Group on DS6000 (2 of 6)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-55. Volume Group on DS6000 (2 of 6)

SS481.0

Notes: Select the volume group type. Note that many hosts share this type and are selected as well. That’s OK, there is no difference, they all use Map 256 as their addressing mode.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-59

Student Notebook

Volume Group on DS6000 (3 of 6)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-56. Volume Group on DS6000 (3 of 6)

SS481.0

Notes: Now we need to associate a host attachment with the volumes.

9-60 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Volume Group on DS6000 (4 of 6)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-57. Volume Group on DS6000 (4 of 6)

SS481.0

Notes: Select the volumes for the volume group.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-61

Student Notebook

Volume Group on DS6000 (5 of 6)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-58. Volume Group on DS6000 (5 of 6)

SS481.0

Notes: Verify the volume group properties.

9-62 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Volume Group on DS6000 (6 of 6)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-59. Volume Group on DS6000 (6 of 6)

SS481.0

Notes: The volume group has been successfully added.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-63

Student Notebook

Host System on DS6000

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-60. Host System on DS6000

SS481.0

Notes: We are going to create a host system.

9-64 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Host System - General Host Information

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-61. Host System - General Host Information

SS481.0

Notes: Select the host system type and assign a nickname.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-65

Student Notebook

Host System - Define Host Ports (1 of 2)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-62. Host System - Define Host Ports (1 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: Define the host attachments for the host.

9-66 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Host System - Define Host Ports (2 of 2)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-63. Host System - Define Host Ports (2 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: Add the fibre channel attachment.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-67

Student Notebook

Host System - Define Host WWPN

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-64. Host System - Define Host WWPN

SS481.0

Notes: Specify the WWPN for the ports of this host.

9-68 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Host System - Specify Storage Units

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-65. Host System - Specify Storage Units

SS481.0

Notes: Specify the storage unit the host is attached to.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-69

Student Notebook

Host System Specify Storage Units Parameters

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-66. Host System - Specify Storage Units Parameters

SS481.0

Notes: Specify the volume group the host is associated with.

9-70 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Host System - Storage Units Parameters

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-67. Host System - Storage Units Parameters

SS481.0

Notes: Specify the host ports the host connects to on the DS6000.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-71

Student Notebook

Host System - Verification

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-68. Host System - Verification

SS481.0

Notes: Verify the parameters for the host attachment.

9-72 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Host System on DS6000

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-69. Host System on DS6000

SS481.0

Notes: View the results. The server Host_Win2k has been added to the storage unit.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-73

Student Notebook

After SDD Install on Windows 2000 (1 of 2)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-70. After SDD Install on Windows 2000 (1 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes:

9-74 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

After SDD Install on Windows 2000 (2 of 2)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-71. After SDD Install on Windows 2000 (2 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-75

Student Notebook

After Rescan or Reboot (1 of 6)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-72. After Rescan or Reboot (1 of 6)

SS481.0

Notes: Let’s see what happens after the volumes have been added. This display shows the new volume, Disk 1 on the Disk Administrator.

9-76 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

After Rescan or Reboot (2 of 6)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-73. After Rescan or Reboot (2 of 6)

SS481.0

Notes: Here is the E drive added to the system.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-77

Student Notebook

After Rescan or Reboot (3 of 6)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-74. After Rescan or Reboot (3 of 6)

SS481.0

Notes: Here are the properties of the new drive added to the Windows system.

9-78 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

After Rescan or Reboot (4 of 6)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-75. After Rescan or Reboot (4 of 6)

SS481.0

Notes: Here is the SDD display of the volume and it paths over the two HBAs. Currently we only have the device attached to one controller so the I/O is done over that path unless there is a failure, in which case the other adapter is used. The DS6000 runs in a failover mode instead of load balancing, so we see all of the I/O for a single LUN over one path. To load balance we must attach LUNs to each adapter as its preferred path.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-79

Student Notebook

After Rescan or Reboot (5 of 6)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-76. After Rescan or Reboot (5 of 6)

SS481.0

Notes: Here are the volumes defined for the Windows system.

9-80 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

After Rescan or Reboot (6 of 6)

Due to controller failover

LSS 12

LSS 13

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-77. After Rescan or Reboot (6 of 6)

SS481.0

Notes: Here is another SDD display after a second volume was added and attached to the other path.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-81

Student Notebook

9-82 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

9.3 Linux Support

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-83

Student Notebook

Topics: Linux AIX Support Windows Support Linux Support iSeries Support

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-78. Topics: Linux

SS481.0

Notes: The DS6000 or DS8000 can configure volumes for Windows servers. This section covers Linux setup and configuration considerations.

9-84 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Agenda Support Configuration Linux server Checking of code level Discover WWN of FC HBA Installing SDD

DS6000 Volume group configuration Host attachment configuration LUN creation

Linux server modprobe and scsi_scan

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-79. Agenda

SS481.0

Notes: The configuration of LUNs for the Linux platforms consists of: • Verifying the code levels, • Discovering the HBAs • Installing SDD for multi-path access • Configuring the volume groups and • Configuring the host attachments for Linux • Discovering the LUNs from the DS6000 or DS8000

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-85

Student Notebook

Servers - LINUX RH

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-80. Servers – LINUX RH

SS481.0

Notes: Let’s check the level of the Linux OS and look at the FC HBAs we have installed. The uname command displays the Linux system and its current level.

9-86 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Firmware Checking (1 of 3)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-81. Firmware Checking (1 of 3)

SS481.0

Notes: The firmware level of the HBAs is contained in files located under the adapter type in the /proc/scsi directory. First cd to the /proc/scsi directory and list the files looking for the Qlogic adapter. We see a qla2300 2Gb FC adapter, so cd into that directory and list the files. The 1 and 2 files are what we are looking for.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-87

Student Notebook

Firmware Checking (2 of 3)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-82. Firmware Checking (2 of 3)

SS481.0

Notes: Cat the contents of 1 and 2 to see the information related to the firmware levels of the cards. Verify that with the FC interoperability matrix from IBM and make sure you have the recommended levels.

9-88 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Firmware Checking (3 of 3)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-83. Firmware Checking (3 of 3)

SS481.0

Notes: Cat the 2 file as well.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-89

Student Notebook

Checking of Number of LUNs (1 of 2)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-84. Checking of Number of LUNs (1 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: Let’s check the LUNs. The modules.conf contains information about the adapters.

9-90 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Checking of Number of LUNs (2 of 2)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-85. Checking of Number of LUNs (2 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: The RAM-disk should be rebuilt to configure the new adapter information so that it remains loaded even after a reboot. Make a copy of the old RAM-disk image first.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-91

Student Notebook

Rebuild the RAM-Disk (1 of 2)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-86. Rebuild the RAM-Disk (1 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: Now rename the file to a .sav copy and then issue the mkinitrd command.

9-92 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Rebuild the RAM-Disk (2 of 2)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-87. Rebuild the RAM-Disk (2 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: Now reboot.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-93

Student Notebook

Now You Go to the DS6000

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-88. Now You Go to the DS6000

SS481.0

Notes: Now we are going to make sure we have the Linux host and volumes configured in the DS6000. Do a lsvolgrp and an lshostconnect to see if the host is defined and if a volumegroup for the Linux host exists. It does. The volume group V6 is listed and two Linux hosts with IDs 0005 and 0006 are there.

9-94 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Volume Group

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-89. Volume Group

SS481.0

Notes: Show the volume group V6, which was the Linux Volume Group.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-95

Student Notebook

Host Attachment (1 of 2)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-90. Host Attachment (1 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: Show the host connections 0005 and 0006, which is the Linux host.

9-96 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Host Attachment (2 of 2)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-91. Host Attachment (2 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: List the FB volumes we have and note the volume 1204. This volume does nicely.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-97

Student Notebook

LUN

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-92. LUN

SS481.0

Notes: Show the attributes of the LUN 1204 using the showfbvol command.

9-98 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

MP SDD Installation (1 of 4)

Platform Linux SDD v1.6.0.2 www-1.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?rs=540andcontext=ST52G7anddc=D430anduid=ssg1S4000065andloc=en_USandcs=utf-8andlang=en

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-93. MP SDD Installation (1 of 4)

SS481.0

Notes: Let’s install SDD for our multipath driver. The CD contains a version of SDD for the Linux host platform. We install version 1.6.0.2

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-99

Student Notebook

MP SDD Installation (2 of 4)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-94. MP SDD Installation (2 of 4)

SS481.0

Notes: List the files, for SDD the file is IBMsdd-1.6.0.1-3.i686.rhel3.rpm.

9-100 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

MP SDD Installation (3 of 4)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-95. MP SDD Installation (3 of 4)

SS481.0

Notes: Install the file.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-101

Student Notebook

MP SDD Installation (4 of 4)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-96. MP SDD Installation (4 of 4)

SS481.0

Notes: List the result.

9-102 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Check LUN Availability

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-97. Check LUN Availability

SS481.0

Notes: Check for LUNs, oops we don’t see any yet. Why not? Well, we installed SDD but we have not started or configured the LUNs yet, so let’s do that.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-103

Student Notebook

Determine if Module qla2300 is Installed

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-98. Determine if Module qla2300 is Installed

SS481.0

Notes: List the modules; we use qla2300.

9-104 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unload Module qla2300

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-99. Unload Module qla2300

SS481.0

Notes: Issue a modprobe command with qla2300.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-105

Student Notebook

Reload Module for qla2300 in Order to Discover New LUNs

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-100. Reload Module for qla2300 in Order to Discover New LUNs

SS481.0

Notes: Now cat the scsi devices and we have some LUNs. The two at the bottom are from the DS6000 which is a 1750500 device. We saw the device two times because of the two adapters.

9-106 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

The LUNs Are Not Seen by SDD

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-101. The LUNs Are Not Seen by SDD

SS481.0

Notes: Issue a datapath query device command. Well, no devices found, guess we are not there yet, so issue sdd start and then cfgvpath.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-107

Student Notebook

The LUNs Are Seen by SDD

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-102. The LUNs Are Seen by SDD

SS481.0

Notes: Now do the datapath query device. That looks better. Now we see the device 1204 on DS6000 13AAY2A. The device is identified as vpatha and it has two paths 0 and 1. Notice the device is seen as two scsi devices sdb and sdc. If we do an lsvpcfg we get information about the device.

9-108 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Add a New Partition to Linux with the LUN from DS6000 (1 of 2)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-103. Add a New Partition to Linux with the LUN from DS6000 (1 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: Let’s format the device for use using fdisk. The m option prints the menu and then you can use the n option to add a new partition.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-109

Student Notebook

Add a New Partition to Linux with the LUN from DS6000 (2 of 2)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-104. Add a New Partition to Linux with the LUN from DS6000 (2 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: Select a p Primary partition and a number 1 for the partition number. Let’s just use the whole disk so enter 1 as the start and 1024 as the end, and then w write it to the disk. OK, so we formatted the disk.

9-110 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create a Filesystem (1 of 2)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-105. Create a Filesystem (1 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: Now we can make a filesystem on the disk. Use the mkfs command as shown to create a filesystem on device /dev/vpatha. Remember not to use the other scsi devices /dev/sdb or /dev/sdc or you won’t get the multipath/failover operations that you most likely want and SDD provides, but only if you use the SDD pseudo device vpatha. Remember that the DS6000 uses a preferred path access which the new SDD supports for the 1750, so it is not like the load balancing of the ESS or the DS8000.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-111

Student Notebook

Create a Filesystem (2 of 2)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-106. Create a Filesystem (2 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: OK, so query the adapter and see the results. The device was selected over one of the two paths, not both. This is because the DS6000 works with a preferred path or failover type of multipath access, so both paths to the device are not used, but if a failover occurs, then the second path 0 takes over.

9-112 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Mount the Filesystem /PSSCeduc1 (1 of 2)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-107. Mount the Filesystem /PSSCeduc1 (1 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: Mount the filesystem we created on /PSSCeduc1. OK, we are done.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-113

Student Notebook

Mount the Filesystem /PSSCeduc1 (2 of 2)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-108. Mount the Filesystem /PSSCeduc1 (2 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes: There it is; we have a DS6000 LUN attached to the Linux host.

9-114 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

9.4 iSeries Support

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-115

Student Notebook

Topics: iSeries AIX Support Windows Support Linux Support iSeries Support

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-109. Topics: iSeries

SS481.0

Notes:

9-116 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

iSeries Servers - OS/400 and i5/OS (1 of 2) Supported FC adapters: The following fibre-channel adapters are supported for iSeries systems running OS/400 or i5/OS: 2766 2 Gigabit Fibre Channel Disk Controller PCI 2787 2 Gigabit Fibre Channel Disk Controller PCI-X Each adapter requires its own dedicated IO processor Supported multipath software: SDD is not available for iSeries servers Multipath support is provided only in i5/OS V5R3 or higher With an i5/OS V5R3 system, a Volume can be shared by multiple fibre-channel adapters if they are within the same i5/OS LPAR iSeries Volumes 1 to 32 LUNs for each attachment to an IBM iSeries fibre-channel adapter DS6000 LUNs are identified as storage unit device type 1750 on the iSeries hosts DS8000 LUNs are identified as storage unit device type 2107 on the iSeries hosts iSeries LUNs can only be created with the following predefined sizes: 8.5 GB, 17.5 GB , 35.1 GB , 70.5 GB , 141.1 GB or 282.2 GB

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-110. iSeries Servers – OS/400 and i5/OS (1 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-117

Student Notebook

iSeries Servers - OS/400 and i5/OS (2 of 2) Boot support : DS8000 and DS6000 are NOT supported as boot devices for iSeries hosts Restrictions and limitations : 0 to 32 LUNs per target (FC adapter) !! iSeries supports only homogeneous SAN environment (only iSeries initiators): All Hosts systems within an IBM iSeries zone must be IBM iSeries systems DS Application program Interface (DS API / CIM Agent) is not available for iSeries servers

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-111. iSeries Servers – OS/400 and i5/OS (2 of 2)

SS481.0

Notes:

9-118 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS6000 Connection to iSeries Systems: Step by Step Commands The next slides describe the different operation that have been performed to define an iSeries host on the DS6000 and use its volumes Major DS6000 commands are provided either in graphical mode or command line mode Different screen captures are also copied from different program to show how the DS6000 volumes are seen and used form the iSeries host

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-112. DS6000 Connection to iSeries Systems: Step by Step Commands

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-119

Student Notebook

IBM MOP Product and Solution Support Center

iSeries Host Definition

From the GUI, define first an iSeries host named Host-iSeries with one FC switched attachment

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-113. iSeries Host Definition

SS481.0

Notes:

9-120 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM MOP Product and Solution Support Center

iSeries Volume Group Creation From the GUI, then define a Volume Group for iSeries host named VG-iSeries

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-114. iSeries Volume Group Creation

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-121

Student Notebook

IBM MOP Product and Solution Support Center

iSeries Volume Group Creation And add the iSeries FC host attachment to the Volume Group

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-115. iSeries Volume Group Creation

SS481.0

Notes:

9-122 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM MOP Product and Solution Support Center

iSeries Volume Group Creation: Summary

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-116. iSeries Volume Group Creation: Summary

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-123

Student Notebook

Volume Group Verification Volume Group verification from the CLI : VG-iSeries has ID V5

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-117. Volume Group Verification

SS481.0

Notes:

9-124 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Host Verification Host verification from the CLI with commands lshostconnect and showhostconnect: Host-iSeries has ID 0004, is assigned to VG V5 and attached to the DS6000 by FC ports I0000 and I0100

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-118. Host Verification

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-125

Student Notebook

Creation of iSeries Protected Volumes on the DS6000 Creation of 2x 8 GB Protected OS400 Volumes (type A01) into the iSeries Volume Group VG-iSeries

Verification: We see the new volumes with ID 1400 and 1401

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-119. Creation of iSeries Protected Volumes on the DS6000

SS481.0

Notes:

9-126 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM MOP Product and Solution Support Center

DS6000 Volumes View from the iSeries Two new disks appear on the list of disks displayed by the WRKDSKSTS command. Disk type is 1750 for DS6000.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-120. DS6000 Volumes View from the iSeries

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-127

Student Notebook

IBM MOP Product and Solution Support Center

Creation of iSeries Unprotected Volumes on the DS6000 Creation of 2x 8 GB Unprotected OS/400 Volumes (type A81) into the iSeries Volume Group VG-iSeries

Verification: We see the new volumes with ID 1500 and 1501

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-121. Creation of iSeries Unprotected Volumes on the DS6000

SS481.0

Notes:

9-128 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Volume Group Verification Verification: From command showvolgrp, we see that Volume Group VG-iSeries Include now the 4 Volumes 1400, 1401, 1500 and 1501

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-122. Volume Group Verification

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-129

Student Notebook

DS6000 Volumes Usage in iSeries Disk Pools (1 of 4) The 2 Protected disks have been added to a disk pool (2) and are usable. Two new unprotected disks appear but are not yet configured.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-123. DS6000 Volumes Usage in iSeries Disk Pools (1 of 4)

SS481.0

Notes:

9-130 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM MOP Product and Solution Support Center

DS6000 Volumes Usage in iSeries Disk Pools (2 of 4) Add now the two unprotected disks to a new disk pool.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-124. DS6000 Volumes Usage in iSeries Disk Pools (2 of 4)

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-131

Student Notebook

IBM MOP Product and Solution Support Center

DS6000 Volumes Usage in iSeries Disk Pools (3 of 4) Verification: The two unprotected disks have been added to the new disk pool. They are still unprotected and the mirroring will have to be started.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-125. DS6000 Volumes Usage in iSeries Disk Pools (3 of 4)

SS481.0

Notes:

9-132 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM MOP Product and Solution Support Center

DS6000 Volumes Usage in iSeries Disk Pools (4 of 4) Disk pool usage test : To use the new disk pool, just create the objects in the asp (or disk pool) 2 or 3

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-126. DS6000 Volumes Usage in iSeries Disk Pools (4 of 4)

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-133

Student Notebook

Checkpoint Exercise - Unit 9 Checkpoint 1. T/F The DS8000 requires a new fileset for the 2107 devices to attach to a pSeries system. 2. T/F The DS8000 MPIO multipath driver can be used instead of the SDD multipath driver on the AIX platforms. 3. T/F The DS8000 SDD software replace the current ESS SDD package and supports both products. 4. T/F For systems using other multipath drivers such as Veritas, SDD is not required.

9-134 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit Summary Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Describe the pSeries host attachment considerations Describe the Windows host attachment considerations Describe the Linux host attachment considerations Describe the iSeries host attachment considerations

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure 9-127. Unit Summary

SS481.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Unit 9. DS Host Attachment Consideration Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

9-135

Student Notebook

9-136 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Appendix A. DS8000 LPAR

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Appendix A. DS8000 LPAR Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

A-1

Student Notebook

DS8300 Logical Partitions: Terminology Partitions When a multiprocessor computer is subdivided into multiple, independent operating system images. Resources Resources are defined as a system’s processors, memory, and I/O slots. I/O slots can be populated by different adapters, such as Ethernet, SCSI, Fibre Channel or other device controllers. Logical Partitioning (LPAR) A logical partition uses hardware and firmware to logically partition the resources on a system. LPARs logically separate the operating system images, so there is not a dependency on the hardware building blocks.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure A-1. DS8300 Logical Partitions: Terminology

SS481.0

Notes: LPAR is one component of the POWER5 system technology that is part of the IBM Virtualization Engine. Using IBM Virtualization Engine technology, selected models of the DS8000 series can be used as a single, large storage system, or can be used as multiple storage systems with logical partitioning (LPAR) capabilities. IBM LPAR technology, which is unique in the storage industry, allows the resources of the storage system to be allocated into separate logical storage system partitions, each of which is totally independent and isolated. Virtualization Engine (VE) delivers the capabilities to simplify the infrastructure by allowing the management of heterogeneous partitions/servers on a single system.

A-2

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Server LPAR Concept Overview An LPAR Uses hardware and firmware to logically partition resources Is a subset of logical resources that is capable of supporting an operating system Consists of CPUs, memory, and I/O slots that are a subset of the pool of available resources within a system Very flexible granularity according to AIX level (5.2, 5.3, and so forth) No need to conform to physical boundaries of building blocks In an LPAR An operating system instance runs with dedicated (AIX 5.2) or shared (AIX 5.3) resources: processors, memory, and I/O slots These resources are assigned to the logical partition The total amount of assignable resources is limited by the physically installed resources in the system LPARs provide Isolation between LPARs to prevent unauthorized access between partition boundaries Fault isolation such that one LPARs operations do not interfere with the operation of other LPARs Support for multiple independent workloads, different operating systems, operating system levels, applications, and so forth © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure A-2. Server LPAR Concept Overview

SS481.0

Notes: Resources are defined as a system’s processors, memory, and I/O slots. I/O slots can be populated by different adapters, such as Ethernet, SCSI, Fibre Channel or other device controllers. A disk is allocated to a partition by assigning it the I/O slot that contains the disk’s controller.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Appendix A. DS8000 LPAR Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

A-3

Student Notebook

Potential “Applications” in Storage System LPARs L3 Cache Memory DIMMs

L3 Cache

P5

P5

Memory DIMMs

Memory DIMMs

Memory DIMMs

Memory DIMMs

Memory DIMMs

Memory DIMMs

P5

P5

Memory DIMMs L3 Cache

L3 Cache

…

2-way P5 570 Server

2-way P5 570 Server

Integrated File Systems SFS NAS Others Additional Storage Protocols / Interfaces iSCSI gateway Object Server Database Acceleration/Offload DB2 (Health check, multilevel security, DB reorgs, image copies, HSM) Oracle

…

Backup / Recovery TSM, Legato, Veritas, others Disk to Tape offload Integrated Domain-Specific Apps Reference Data Medical Imaging Integrated Functions ESSNet SVC Delayed RPO

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure A-3. Potential “Applications” in Storage System LPARs

SS481.0

Notes: Generally, production and test environments should be isolated from each other. Without partitioning, the only practical way of performing application development and testing is to purchase additional hardware and software. Partitioning is a way to set aside a portion of the system resources to use for testing new versions of applications and operating systems, while the production environment continues to run. This eliminates the need for additional servers dedicated to testing, and provides more confidence that the test versions migrate smoothly into production because they are tested on the production hardware system.

A-4

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Logical Partition Illustration

Logical Partition 1

Logical Partition 0

Logical Partition 2

Processor

Processor

Processor

Processor

Processor

Processor

Cache

Cache

Cache

Cache

Cache

Cache

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

Memory

HMC: hardware management console

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure A-4. Logical Partition Illustration

SS481.0

Notes: In the DS8300 Model 9A2 each processor complex has four processors and up to 128 GB memory. Initially there is also a 50/50 split for processor and memory allocation. Therefore, every LPAR has two processors, so every storage facility image has four processors. The memory limit depends on the total amount of available memory in the whole system.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Appendix A. DS8000 LPAR Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

A-5

Student Notebook

LPAR Protection in IBM POWER5 Hardware PHYP HypervisorControlled Page Tables

Partition 1 Proc

Physical Memory

HypervisorControlled TCE Tables For DMA

Partition 1 I/O Slot

I/O Load/Store

N

N

Proc N

Proc

{

Real Addresses

Bus Addresses

I/O Slot

Virtual Addresses

Proc

Addr N

I/O Slot I/O Slot

I/O Load/Store

0

0

Proc 0

Partition 2 I/O Slot

{

Addr 0

Real Addresses

Partition 2

Bus Addresses

Proc

Virtual Addresses

Proc

I/O Slot

The Hardware and Hypervisor manage the real to virtual memory mapping to provide robust isolation between partitions © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure A-5. LPAR Protection in IBM POWER5™ Hardware

SS481.0

Notes: This is a fairly technical chart that shows how the hardware and firmware mechanisms work to ensure that operating systems running in different partitions can't interfere with each other. This example shows resources owned by two partitions, in red and blue. Virtual addresses in the processors are translated by page tables into addresses into real memory, and only the Hypervisor is allowed to change those tables. There are several Hypervisor calls that the operating system uses to request new pages and delete old ones. Each partition also needs some amount of real address memory, starting at address 0. Since the partitions can't really all have access to address 0, there is a special register in the processor that gets automatically added to all real address requests. That way, each operating system thinks it has an address 0, but in fact that address range can be redirected anywhere in physical memory. For I/O devices that do DMA, there is an equivalent translation method called Translation Control Entries that is also controlled by the Hypervisor. This is controlled at an I/O adapter A-6

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

slot level. When a device tries to transfer data into or out of memory, this mechanism ensures that it can only access memory that is valid for that partition. Lastly, the processors have to read and write registers in the I/O devices to set up I/O operations. Access to those address spaces are also controlled through the virtual-to-real translation in the page tables.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Appendix A. DS8000 LPAR Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

A-7

Student Notebook

LPAR Applied to Storage Facility Images (SFI) DS8300

Processor complex 0

LPAR01

LPAR02

Processor complex 1 Storage Facility Image 1

LPAR11

Two eServers P5 570 Processor complex Each processor complex supports one or more LPARs Currently, each processor complex divided into two LPARs

An LPAR in a Processor Complex Set of resources to support exec of an operating system

The Storage Facility Image (SFI)

Storage Facility Image 2

LPAR12

LPARxy x=Processor complex number y=Storage facility number

Built from a pair of LPARs One of each processor complex Each image can run it own level of microcode Each Storage image has a unique ID and arrays connected

Note: An LPAR in a processor complex is not the same as a SFI in the DS8300

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure A-6. LPAR Applied to Storage Facility Images (SFI)

SS481.0

Notes: The DS8300 series incorporates two SServer p5 570s. We call each of these a processor complex. Each processor complex supports one or more LPARs. Currently each processor complex on the DS8300 is divided into two LPARs. An LPAR is a set of resources on a processor complex that support the execution of an operating system. The storage facility image is built from a pair of LPARs, one on each processor complex.

A-8

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Basic Storage This is a big picture look at a basic Storage Subsystem There are Host Adapters that communicate with the Host Systems and the CECs There are CECs with the processors, memory, and microcode that control everything There are Device Adapters that communicate with the CECs and the DDMs And DDMs to write and read the host’s data

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure A-7. Basic Storage

SS481.0

Notes: The DS8000 base frame contains two processor complexes. The Model 921 has 2-way processors while the Model 922 and Model 9A2 have 4-way processors. (2-way means that each processor complex has two CPUs, while 4-way means that each processor complex has four CPUs.) For the purpose of using LPARs the 2-way processor can not be split up, but the 4-way processor can be split across the LPARs.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Appendix A. DS8000 LPAR Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

A-9

Student Notebook

Model 921 or 922 Single Storage Facility Image This is a big picture look at a 2107 model 921 or 922 that support one Storage Facility Image There are all the same basic components as the previous page But the 2107 is different because each of the 2107 CECs are running one LPAR (Logical Partition) Both of the LPARs (one in each CEC) work together to create a single Storage Facility Image Basically the Host Systems would see a single storage subsystem similar to the previous page

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure A-8. Model 921 or 922 Single Storage Facility Image

SS481.0

Notes: A Model 922 supports one storage facility image or one LPAR. The storage unit is the same, but a single Image is created owning all the resources and having a storage image ID. If the storage unit has a serial number of IBM.2107-1300230, then the storage facility image ID is IBM.2107-1300231.

A-10 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8000 Model 9A2 LPARs The model 9A2 supports dual (two) Storage Facility Images on one base rack and its expansion racks The CECs run two LPARs (Logical Partitions) that create two separate 2107 storage facility images Each image has its own Host Adapters Each image has its own Device Adapters And each image has its own DDMs From a host system point of view this looks like two 2107 images © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure A-9. DS8000 Model 9A2 LPARs

SS481.0

Notes: The management of the resource allocation between LPARs on a pSeries is done via the Storage Hardware Management Console (S-HMC). Because the DS8300 Model 9A2 provides a fixed split between the two storage facility images, there is no management or configuration necessary via the S-HMC. The DS8300 comes preconfigured with all required LPAR resources assigned to either storage facility image. If the Storage Unit has a serial number of IBM.2107-1300230, then the Storage Facility Image 1 ID is IBM.2107-1300231 and Storage Facility Image 2 is IBM.2107-1300232.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Appendix A. DS8000 LPAR Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

A-11

Student Notebook

DS8300 Architecture with LPAR First application of the pSeries Virtualization Engine technology in DS8000 partitions the subsystem into two virtual storage system images Split processors, cache, adapters and disks between images Robust isolation between images via hardware and POWER hypervisor firmware Each storage subsystem LPAR can run its own level of microcode Delivered AS IS, no need using the MC to configure

Host Adapters

Host Adapters

Host Adapters

Host Adapters

Host Adapters

Host Adapters

Fault Tolerant Switch Fabric

LPAR Image1

LPAR Image2

RAID Adapters

RAID Adapters

LPAR Image1

LPAR Image2

RAID Adapters

RAID Adapters

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure A-10. DS8300 Architecture with LPAR

SS481.0

Notes: The management of the resource allocation between LPARs on a pSeries is done via the Storage Hardware Management Console (S-HMC). Because the DS8300 Model 9A2 provides a fixed split between the two storage facility images, there is no management or configuration necessary via the S-HMC. The DS8300 comes preconfigured with all required LPAR resources assigned to either storage facility image. The figure above shows the split of all available resources between the two storage facility images. Each storage facility image has 50% of all available resources.

A-12 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

DS8300 Example of Storage Facility Images System 1 Open System

System 2 zSeries

Storage Facility Image 1 Capacity: LIC level: License function: License feature:

Storage Facility Image 2

20 TB Fixed Block (FB) A Point-in-time Copy FlashCopy

Capacity: LIC level: License function: License feature:

LUN0 LUN1

3390-3

LUN2

3390-3

10 TB Count Key Data (CKD) B no Copy function no Copy feature

DS8300 Model 9A2 (Physical Capacity: 30TB)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure A-11. DS8300 Example of Storage Facility Images

SS481.0

Notes: Each storage facility image has access to: • • • • •

50 percent of the processors 50 percent of the processor memory 1 loop of the RIO-G interconnection Up to 16 host adapters (four I/O drawers with up to four host adapters) From 16 to 320 disk drives (up to 96 TB of capacity)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Appendix A. DS8000 LPAR Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

A-13

Student Notebook

DS8300 Resource Allocation Example Storage Facility Image 1 Processor Processorcomplex complex00 2 Processors Processors RIO-G interface

Processor complex 1

HA HA DA HA HA DA

I/O drawer 0

2 Processors Processors RIO-G interface

RIO-G interface

HA HA DA HA HA DA SCSI controller

I/O drawer 1

A

A'

boot data data

boot data data

Ethernet-Port

RIO-G interface

Memory

SCSI controller

Ethernet-Port

B

B'

boot data data

boot data data

S-HMC C

C'

boot data data

boot data data

Ethernet-Port

Ethernet-Port

D

D'

boot data data

boot data data

CD/DVD

CD/DVD

Memory

HA HA DA HA HA DA

Memory

I/O drawer 3

SCSI controller

2 Processors

RIO-G interface RIO-G interface

HA HA DA HA HA DA

Memory SCSI controller RIO-G interface

2 Processors

RIO-G interface

I/O drawer 2

Storage Facility Image 2 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure A-12. DS8300 Resource Allocation Example

SS481.0

Notes: In this section we explain which hardware resources are required to build a storage facility image. The management of the resource allocation between LPARs on a pSeries is done via the Storage Hardware Management Console (S-HMC). Because the DS8300 Model 9A2 provides a fixed split between the two storage facility images, there is no management or configuration necessary via the S-HMC. The DS8300 comes preconfigured with all required LPAR resources assigned to either storage facility image.

A-14 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

Uempty

Storage Facility Virtualization Logical view: virtual Storage Facility images

Storage Facility image 1 LIC

RIO-G I/O

I/O

Memory Processor

Storage Facility image 2

LIC

LIC

Memory

Memory

Processor

RIO-G I/O

I/O

LIC Memory

Processor

Processor

LPAR Hypervisor takes part of

Physical view: physical storage unit

takes part of

takes part of

RIO-G I/O

I/O

Memory

Memory

Processor

Processor

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure A-13. Storage Facility Virtualization

SS481.0

Notes: A Storage Facility image is a virtual storage subsystem with it own copy of Licensed Internal Code (LIC) which consists of the AIX kernel and the functional code. Both Storage Facility images share the physical hardware and the LPAR hypervisor manages this sharing of the hardware.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Appendix A. DS8000 LPAR Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

A-15

Student Notebook

DS8300 SFIs and Copy Services Storage Facility Image 1

PPRC Primary

Storage Facility Image 2

PPRC Secondary

PPRC Primary

FlashCopy Source

PPRC Secondary

FlashCopy Source

8

FlashCopy Target

FlashCopy Target

Remote Mirroring and Copy (PPRC) within a Storage Facility Image or across Storage Facility Images FlashCopy within a Storage Facility Image only

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure A-14. DS8300 SFIs and Copy Services

SS481.0

Notes: The Copy Services features are installed separately on each LPAR.

A-16 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

AP

Appendix B. DS8000 Layout and Cabling Rules

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Appendix B. DS8000 Layout and Cabling Rules Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

B-1

Student Notebook

Topic: DS8000 Layout and Cabling Rules

DS8000 Highlights DS8000 Hardware components DS8000 Architecture DS8000 Cache Management DS8000 RAS Features DS8000 Layout and cabling rules Supplemental Information Ordering Considerations

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure B-1. Topic: DS8000 Layout and Cabling Rules

SS481.0

Notes: The DS8000 I/O enclosures and cabling rules.

B-2

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

AP

I/O Enclosure Numbers I/O enclosure numbers Front view Base Frame (front view)

I/O enclosure numbers Rear view

Expansion Frame (front view)

Expansion Frame (rear view)

Base Frame (rear view)

Complex 0

Complex 0

Complex 1

Complex 1

1

0

5

4

4

5

0

1

3

2

7

6

6

7

2

3

The numbers in the I/O enclosures pictured above are the I/O enclosure numbers. They are used in the RIO-G loop diagrams shown on the following pages. Refer back to the above diagrams to see where the enclosures are physically located.

The I/O enclosure numbers do not change with each model, unlike the way the RIO-G loops are wired. All further diagrams in this presentation are from the front view of the DS8000. Even numbered I/O enclosures are always cabled closer to server 0. Odd numbered I/O enclosures are always cabled closer to server 1.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure B-2. I/O Enclosure Numbers

SS481.0

Notes: The DS8000 has up to eight I/O enclosures or RIO-G bays. Four are in the base frame and four are in the first expansion frame of the model 922 or 9A2.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Appendix B. DS8000 Layout and Cabling Rules Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

B-3

Student Notebook

Model 921 – Two I/O Enclosures

I/O enclosure 3

Server 0 (EVEN LSS)

Loop 0

RIO-G ports

Server 1 (ODD LSS) RIO-G ports

I/O enclosure 2

This configuration will not be available at GA. ( At GA a model 921 will always ship with four I/O enclosures).

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure B-3. Model 921 – Two I/O Enclosures

SS481.0

Notes: The DS8000 model 921 can only support one RIO-G loop with either two or four I/O enclosures attached. Currently, there is no supported configuration with only two I/O enclosures.

B-4

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

AP

Model 921 – Four I/O Enclosures I/O enclosure 0

Server 0 (EVEN LSS)

I/O enclosure 3

Loop 0

RIO-G ports

Server 1 (ODD LSS) RIO-G ports

I/O enclosure 2

I/O enclosure 1

Four enclosures is the maximum number for a model 921.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure B-4. Model 921 – Four I/O Enclosures

SS481.0

Notes: The DS8000 model 921 can support one RIO-G loop with four I/O enclosures attached. There is one set of RIO-G ports on the model 921 and they form a loop with four I/O enclosures. The enclosures can have four Has each and two DAs each.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Appendix B. DS8000 Layout and Cabling Rules Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

B-5

Student Notebook

Model 922 – Four I/O Enclosures I/O enclosure 0

Server 0 EVEN LSSs

Loop 0

RIO-G ports

Server 1 ODD LSSs RIO-G ports

I/O enclosure 3 I/O enclosure 1

Loop 1 I/O enclosure 2

On Loop 0 on 921

A model 922 has extra hardware to support a second RIO-G loop In this configuration. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure B-5. Model 922 – Four I/O Enclosures

SS481.0

Notes: The DS8000 model 922 can support two RIO-G loops with four or eight I/O enclosures attached. The second set of four RIO-G bays are housed in the 92E expansion unit.

B-6

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

AP

Model 922 – Eight I/O Enclosures I/O enclosure 0

Server 0 EVEN LSSs

I/O enclosure 7

Loop 0

RIO-G ports

Server 1 ODD LSSs RIO-G ports

I/O enclosure 4

I/O enclosure 3

I/O enclosure 6

I/O enclosure 1

Loop 1 I/O enclosure 2

I/O enclosure 5

Eight enclosures is the maximum number for a model 922. More enclosures need more RIO-G ports. To get more RIO-G ports we need more processor complexes.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure B-6. Model 922 – Eight I/O Enclosures

SS481.0

Notes: The DS8000 model 922 with eight RIO-G bays gives the maximum performance and throughput.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Appendix B. DS8000 Layout and Cabling Rules Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

B-7

Student Notebook

Model 9A2 – Four I/O Enclosures Different

I/O enclosure 0

Server 0 EVEN LSSs (two instances)

!!! Opposite / 922

Loop 0

Loop 0 belongs to SFI 1

RIO-G ports

Server 1 ODD LSSs (two instances)

RIO-G ports

I/O enclosure 1 I/O enclosure 3

Loop 1 Loop 1 belongs to SFI 2 I/O enclosure 2

The 9A2 is split into two storage facility images (SFIs). Each SFI controls one RIO-G loop and all the enclosures and adapters on that loop. Resources cannot be shared between SFIs.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure B-7. Model 9A2 – Four I/O Enclosures

SS481.0

Notes: The DS8000 model 9A2 supports two RIO-G loop with two I/O enclosures attached, but the LPAR capability of the 9A2 splits the bays and assigns two of them to each LPAR. This is depicted by the colors in the slide above.

B-8

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

AP

Model 9A2 – Eight I/O Enclosures !!! Opposite / 922 I/O enclosure 0

Server 0 EVEN LSSs (two instances)

I/O enclosure 5

Loop 0 belongs to SFI 1

Loop 0

RIO-G ports

Server 1 ODD LSSs (two instances)

RIO-G ports

I/O enclosure 4

I/O enclosure 1

I/O enclosure 6

I/O enclosure 3

Loop 1 Loop 1 belongs to SFI 2 I/O enclosure 2

I/O enclosure 7

The 9A2 is split into two storage facility images (SFIs). Each SFI controls one RIO-G loop and all the enclosures and adapters on that loop. Resources cannot be shared between SFIs. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure B-8. Model 9A2 – Eight I/O Enclosures

SS481.0

Notes: The DS8000 model 9A2 supports two RIO-G loops with either four I/O enclosures attached, but the LPAR capability of the 9A2 splits the bays and assigns four of them to each LPAR.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Appendix B. DS8000 Layout and Cabling Rules Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

B-9

Student Notebook

Example - Model 921 - Four DA Pairs: Plug Order Server 0

Server 1 RIO-G loop 0

I/O Enclosure 0 1

DA Pair

0

DA pair 0

0

0

3

1

DA pair 1

0

I/O Enclosure 2

I/O Enclosure 1

0

I/O Enclosure 3 2

2

DA pair 2

DA pair 3

0

3

0

0

0

0

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

0

0

0

0

Base Frame Full : 128 DDMs

15

15

Front

Rear

0

0

Add Expansion Frame Model 921 Full : 384 DDMs

15

15

Front

Rear

0

0

15

15

15

15

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005

Figure B-9. Example – Model 921 - Four DA Pairs: Plug Order

SS481.0

Notes: You can put 4 disk enclosures of 16 DDMs on each DA pair so that provides 8 x 16 DDMs or 128 disks. That fills the 921 base frame. To attach more disks we need to have an Expansion 92E frame and one or two more DA pairs in the four I/O enclosures. Let’s add the disk enclosure pairs one at a time. Can you predict where the next one will be attached?

B-10 DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

AP

Appendix C. Checkpoint Solutions Unit 1 1. False, the DS8000 uses Power5 processors. 2. True, the LPAR function is a feature of the Power5 processor and the Model 922 can be split into two LPARs. 3. True, the RIO-G bays are a high bandwidth I/O enclosure which connect hosts and backend storage the processor complex. 4. D, all of the above 5. True, the DS8000 Storage Manager supports offline configuration.

Unit 2 1. C, the disk groups are called array sites in the DS8000. 2. True, the rank define the disk format of CKD or FB. 3. False, the extent pool defines the server affinity and pools the ranks into groups for logical volume definition. 4. True, users should define one extent pool for each server.

Unit 3 1. True, the DSCLI is an installable package for host servers. 2. False, the DSCLI must access the DS6000 or DS8000 HMC to perform it’s functions. 3. False, the DSCLI is an installable package for the DS6000 or DS80000, it manages the hardware real-time and has no off-line capability. It does not allow XML files to be imported or exported. 4. True, the DSCLI is the primary Copy Services interface for the DS6000 or DS8000 5. True, the DSCLI can be used to configure either a DS6000 or DS8000.

Unit 4 1. True, the DS6000 uses PowerPC 2-way processors. 2. False, the LPAR function is a feature of the Power5 processor in the DS8000 but not the DS6000. The Model 511 cannot be split into LPARs. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Appendix C. Checkpoint Solutions Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

C-1

Student Notebook

3. True, the RIO-G bays are a high bandwidth I/O enclosure which connect hosts and backend storage the processor complex. 4. D, all of the above 5. True, the DS6000 Storage Manager supports offline configuration.

Unit 5 1. True, the DS6000 uses PowerPC 2-way processors. 2. False, the LPAR function is a feature of the Power5 processor in the DS8000, but not the DS6000. The Model 511 cannot be split into LPARs. 3. True, the RIO-G bays are a high bandwidth I/O enclosure which connect hosts and backend storage.

Unit 6 1. False, the DS8000 GUI can be accessed with a Web browser. 2. True, the DS8000 Storage Manager has a Real-Time and an off-line GUI interface. 3. True, the DS8000 Storage Manager can Export XML file which can also be downloaded and applied to the real hardware configuration. 4. False, there is also a Command Line Interface. 5. False, the DS6000 has it's won separate DS6000 Storage Manager software package.

Unit 7 1. True, PDCU is a subset of the TPC for disk and can be used as a raw data collection tool for the DS products until TPC for disk supports the DS products. 2. False, the PDCU only supports a CLI. 3. True, Excel Macros are to be provided for use with PDCU. 4. True, Excel Macros identify most active or highest rate of access and would be useful in identifying problems.

Unit 8 1. True, the DS8000 supports all of the Copy Services functions C-2

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1 Student Notebook

AP

2. True, the DS8000 and ESS support compatible Remote Mirror functions and can operate as primary or secondary subsystems in the Metro Mirror Copy. 3. False, the DS6000 does not support ESCON interfaces. 4. True, the DSCLI is the primary Copy Services interface for the DS6000 or DS8000 5. False, the DS8000 Storage Manager can only execute single shot Copy Services functions.

Unit 9 1. True, the pSeries systems requires the IBM 2107 fileset prior to accessing LUNs on these systems. 2. True, the pSeries systems may choose to use the MPIO driver instead of SDD. 3. True, the DS8000 provides SDD for multipath operation and support the DS6000, DS8000, SVC, and ESS systems. 4. True, the SDD driver is not required if other multipath drivers are in place.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

Appendix C. Checkpoint Solutions Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

C-3

Student Notebook

C-4

DS8000 and DS6000 for Open Systems Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005

V3.1.0.1

backpg

Back page


®